diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
205 files changed, 9649 insertions, 3218 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/dv1394 b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/dv1394 deleted file mode 100644 index 2ee3686..0000000 --- a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/dv1394 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9 +0,0 @@ -What: dv1394 (a.k.a. "OHCI-DV I/O support" for FireWire) -Contact: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net -Description: - New application development should use raw1394 + userspace libraries - instead, notably libiec61883 which is functionally equivalent. - -Users: - ffmpeg/libavformat (used by a variety of media players) - dvgrab v1.x (replaced by dvgrab2 on top of raw1394 and resp. libraries) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cf63f26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/proc-pid-oom_adj @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +What: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj +When: August 2012 +Why: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj allows userspace to influence the oom killer's + badness heuristic used to determine which task to kill when the kernel + is out of memory. + + The badness heuristic has since been rewritten since the introduction of + this tunable such that its meaning is deprecated. The value was + implemented as a bitshift on a score generated by the badness() + function that did not have any precise units of measure. With the + rewrite, the score is given as a proportion of available memory to the + task allocating pages, so using a bitshift which grows the score + exponentially is, thus, impossible to tune with fine granularity. + + A much more powerful interface, /proc/<pid>/oom_score_adj, was + introduced with the oom killer rewrite that allows users to increase or + decrease the badness() score linearly. This interface will replace + /proc/<pid>/oom_adj. + + A warning will be emitted to the kernel log if an application uses this + deprecated interface. After it is printed once, future warnings will be + suppressed until the kernel is rebooted. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/dv1394 b/Documentation/ABI/removed/dv1394 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c2310b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/dv1394 @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +What: dv1394 (a.k.a. "OHCI-DV I/O support" for FireWire) +Date: May 2010 (scheduled), finally removed in kernel v2.6.37 +Contact: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net +Description: + /dev/dv1394/* were character device files, one for each FireWire + controller and for NTSC and PAL respectively, from which DV data + could be received by read() or transmitted by write(). A few + ioctl()s allowed limited control. + This special-purpose interface has been superseded by libraw1394 + + libiec61883 which are functionally equivalent, support HDV, and + transparently work on top of the newer firewire kernel drivers. + +Users: + ffmpeg/libavformat (if configured for DV1394) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 b/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..490aa1e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394 @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +What: raw1394 (a.k.a. "Raw IEEE1394 I/O support" for FireWire) +Date: May 2010 (scheduled), finally removed in kernel v2.6.37 +Contact: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net +Description: + /dev/raw1394 was a character device file that allowed low-level + access to FireWire buses. Its major drawbacks were its inability + to implement sensible device security policies, and its low level + of abstraction that required userspace clients do duplicate much + of the kernel's ieee1394 core functionality. + Replaced by /dev/fw*, i.e. the <linux/firewire-cdev.h> ABI of + firewire-core. + +Users: + libraw1394 (works with firewire-cdev too, transparent to library ABI + users) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394_legacy_isochronous b/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394_legacy_isochronous deleted file mode 100644 index 1b62962..0000000 --- a/Documentation/ABI/removed/raw1394_legacy_isochronous +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -What: legacy isochronous ABI of raw1394 (1st generation iso ABI) -Date: June 2007 (scheduled), removed in kernel v2.6.23 -Contact: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net -Description: - The two request types RAW1394_REQ_ISO_SEND, RAW1394_REQ_ISO_LISTEN have - been deprecated for quite some time. They are very inefficient as they - come with high interrupt load and several layers of callbacks for each - packet. Because of these deficiencies, the video1394 and dv1394 drivers - and the 3rd-generation isochronous ABI in raw1394 (rawiso) were created. - -Users: - libraw1394 users via the long deprecated API raw1394_iso_write, - raw1394_start_iso_write, raw1394_start_iso_rcv, raw1394_stop_iso_rcv - - libdc1394, which optionally uses these old libraw1394 calls - alternatively to the more efficient video1394 ABI diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/removed/video1394 b/Documentation/ABI/removed/video1394 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c39c25a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/removed/video1394 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +What: video1394 (a.k.a. "OHCI-1394 Video support" for FireWire) +Date: May 2010 (scheduled), finally removed in kernel v2.6.37 +Contact: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net +Description: + /dev/video1394/* were character device files, one for each FireWire + controller, which were used for isochronous I/O. It was added as an + alternative to raw1394's isochronous I/O functionality which had + performance issues in its first generation. Any video1394 user had + to use raw1394 + libraw1394 too because video1394 did not provide + asynchronous I/O for device discovery and configuration. + Replaced by /dev/fw*, i.e. the <linux/firewire-cdev.h> ABI of + firewire-core. + +Users: + libdc1394 (works with firewire-cdev too, transparent to library ABI + users) diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ata b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ata new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a93215 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-ata @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +What: /sys/class/ata_... +Date: August 2008 +Contact: Gwendal Grignou<gwendal@google.com> +Description: + +Provide a place in sysfs for storing the ATA topology of the system. This allows +retrieving various information about ATA objects. + +Files under /sys/class/ata_port +------------------------------- + + For each port, a directory ataX is created where X is the ata_port_id of + the port. The device parent is the ata host device. + +idle_irq (read) + + Number of IRQ received by the port while idle [some ata HBA only]. + +nr_pmp_links (read) + + If a SATA Port Multiplier (PM) is connected, number of link behind it. + +Files under /sys/class/ata_link +------------------------------- + + Behind each port, there is a ata_link. If there is a SATA PM in the + topology, 15 ata_link objects are created. + + If a link is behind a port, the directory name is linkX, where X is + ata_port_id of the port. + If a link is behind a PM, its name is linkX.Y where X is ata_port_id + of the parent port and Y the PM port. + +hw_sata_spd_limit + + Maximum speed supported by the connected SATA device. + +sata_spd_limit + + Maximum speed imposed by libata. + +sata_spd + + Current speed of the link [1.5, 3Gps,...]. + +Files under /sys/class/ata_device +--------------------------------- + + Behind each link, up to two ata device are created. + The name of the directory is devX[.Y].Z where: + - X is ata_port_id of the port where the device is connected, + - Y the port of the PM if any, and + - Z the device id: for PATA, there is usually 2 devices [0,1], + only 1 for SATA. + +class + Device class. Can be "ata" for disk, "atapi" for packet device, + "pmp" for PM, or "none" if no device was found behind the link. + +dma_mode + + Transfer modes supported by the device when in DMA mode. + Mostly used by PATA device. + +pio_mode + + Transfer modes supported by the device when in PIO mode. + Mostly used by PATA device. + +xfer_mode + + Current transfer mode. + +id + + Cached result of IDENTIFY command, as described in ATA8 7.16 and 7.17. + Only valid if the device is not a PM. + +gscr + + Cached result of the dump of PM GSCR register. + Valid registers are: + 0: SATA_PMP_GSCR_PROD_ID, + 1: SATA_PMP_GSCR_REV, + 2: SATA_PMP_GSCR_PORT_INFO, + 32: SATA_PMP_GSCR_ERROR, + 33: SATA_PMP_GSCR_ERROR_EN, + 64: SATA_PMP_GSCR_FEAT, + 96: SATA_PMP_GSCR_FEAT_EN, + 130: SATA_PMP_GSCR_SII_GPIO + Only valid if the device is a PM. + +spdn_cnt + + Number of time libata decided to lower the speed of link due to errors. + +ering + + Formatted output of the error ring of the device. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c8b3b48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/disksize +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The disksize file is read-write and specifies the disk size + which represents the limit on the *uncompressed* worth of data + that can be stored in this disk. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/initstate +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The disksize file is read-only and shows the initialization + state of the device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/reset +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The disksize file is write-only and allows resetting the + device. The reset operation frees all the memory assocaited + with this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_reads +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The num_reads file is read-only and specifies the number of + reads (failed or successful) done on this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/num_writes +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The num_writes file is read-only and specifies the number of + writes (failed or successful) done on this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/invalid_io +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The invalid_io file is read-only and specifies the number of + non-page-size-aligned I/O requests issued to this device. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/notify_free +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The notify_free file is read-only and specifies the number of + swap slot free notifications received by this device. These + notifications are send to a swap block device when a swap slot + is freed. This statistic is applicable only when this disk is + being used as a swap disk. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/discard +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The discard file is read-only and specifies the number of + discard requests received by this device. These requests + provide information to block device regarding blocks which are + no longer used by filesystem. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/zero_pages +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The zero_pages file is read-only and specifies number of zero + filled pages written to this disk. No memory is allocated for + such pages. + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/orig_data_size +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The orig_data_size file is read-only and specifies uncompressed + size of data stored in this disk. This excludes zero-filled + pages (zero_pages) since no memory is allocated for them. + Unit: bytes + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/compr_data_size +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The compr_data_size file is read-only and specifies compressed + size of data stored in this disk. So, compression ratio can be + calculated using orig_data_size and this statistic. + Unit: bytes + +What: /sys/block/zram<id>/mem_used_total +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Nitin Gupta <ngupta@vflare.org> +Description: + The mem_used_total file is read-only and specifies the amount + of memory, including allocator fragmentation and metadata + overhead, allocated for this disk. So, allocator space + efficiency can be calculated using compr_data_size and this + statistic. + Unit: bytes
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90a87e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +What: /sys/bus/rbd/ +Date: November 2010 +Contact: Yehuda Sadeh <yehuda@hq.newdream.net>, + Sage Weil <sage@newdream.net> +Description: + +Being used for adding and removing rbd block devices. + +Usage: <mon ip addr> <options> <pool name> <rbd image name> [snap name] + + $ echo "192.168.0.1 name=admin rbd foo" > /sys/bus/rbd/add + +The snapshot name can be "-" or omitted to map the image read/write. A <dev-id> +will be assigned for any registered block device. If snapshot is used, it will +be mapped read-only. + +Removal of a device: + + $ echo <dev-id> > /sys/bus/rbd/remove + +Entries under /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/ +-------------------------------------------- + +client_id + + The ceph unique client id that was assigned for this specific session. + +major + + The block device major number. + +name + + The name of the rbd image. + +pool + + The pool where this rbd image resides. The pool-name pair is unique + per rados system. + +size + + The size (in bytes) of the mapped block device. + +refresh + + Writing to this file will reread the image header data and set + all relevant datastructures accordingly. + +current_snap + + The current snapshot for which the device is mapped. + +create_snap + + Create a snapshot: + + $ echo <snap-name> > /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_create + +rollback_snap + + Rolls back data to the specified snapshot. This goes over the entire + list of rados blocks and sends a rollback command to each. + + $ echo <snap-name> > /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_rollback + +snap_* + + A directory per each snapshot + + +Entries under /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/snap_<snap-name> +------------------------------------------------------------- + +id + + The rados internal snapshot id assigned for this snapshot + +size + + The size of the image when this snapshot was taken. + + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv new file mode 100644 index 0000000..38dd762 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-batman-adv @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + +What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + The /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/mesh_iface file + displays the batman mesh interface this <iface> + currently is associated with. + +What: /sys/class/net/<iface>/batman-adv/iface_status +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Indicates the status of <iface> as it is seen by batman. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh new file mode 100644 index 0000000..748fe17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-net-mesh @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/aggregated_ogms +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the batman protocol messages of the + mesh <mesh_iface> shall be aggregated or not. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/bonding +Date: June 2010 +Contact: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going through the + mesh will be sent using multiple interfaces at the + same time (if available). + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/fragmentation +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Andreas Langer <an.langer@gmx.de> +Description: + Indicates whether the data traffic going through the + mesh will be fragmented or silently discarded if the + packet size exceeds the outgoing interface MTU. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_bandwidth +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the bandwidth which is propagated by this + node if gw_mode was set to 'server'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_mode +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the state of the gateway features. Can be + either 'off', 'client' or 'server'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/gw_sel_class +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the selection criteria this node will use + to choose a gateway if gw_mode was set to 'client'. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/orig_interval +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Defines the interval in milliseconds in which batman + sends its protocol messages. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/hop_penalty +Date: Oct 2010 +Contact: Linus Lüssing <linus.luessing@web.de> +Description: + Defines the penalty which will be applied to an + originator message's tq-field on every hop. + +What: /sys/class/net/<mesh_iface>/mesh/vis_mode +Date: May 2010 +Contact: Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Description: + Each batman node only maintains information about its + own local neighborhood, therefore generating graphs + showing the topology of the entire mesh is not easily + feasible without having a central instance to collect + the local topologies from all nodes. This file allows + to activate the collecting (server) mode. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power index 6123c52..7628cd1 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power @@ -77,3 +77,91 @@ Description: devices this attribute is set to "enabled" by bus type code or device drivers and in that cases it should be safe to leave the default value. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_count +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_count attribute contains the number + of signaled wakeup events associated with the device. This + attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up + the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active_count +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_active_count attribute contains the + number of times the processing of wakeup events associated with + the device was completed (at the kernel level). This attribute + is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the + system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_hit_count +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_hit_count attribute contains the + number of times the processing of a wakeup event associated with + the device might prevent the system from entering a sleep state. + This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to + wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_active attribute contains either 1, + or 0, depending on whether or not a wakeup event associated with + the device is being processed (1). This attribute is read-only. + If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep + states, this attribute is empty. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_total_time_ms +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_total_time_ms attribute contains + the total time of processing wakeup events associated with the + device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the + device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, + this attribute is empty. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_max_time_ms +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_max_time_ms attribute contains + the maximum time of processing a single wakeup event associated + with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. + If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep + states, this attribute is empty. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_last_time_ms +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_last_time_ms attribute contains + the value of the monotonic clock corresponding to the time of + signaling the last wakeup event associated with the device, in + milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is + not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, this + attribute is empty. + +What: /sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms +Date: September 2010 +Contact: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> +Description: + The /sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms attribute + contains the autosuspend delay value (in milliseconds). Some + drivers do not want their device to suspend as soon as it + becomes idle at run time; they want the device to remain + inactive for a certain minimum period of time first. That + period is called the autosuspend delay. Negative values will + prevent the device from being suspended at run time (similar + to writing "on" to the power/control attribute). Values >= + 1000 will cause the autosuspend timer expiration to be rounded + up to the nearest second. + + Not all drivers support this attribute. If it isn't supported, + attempts to read or write it will yield I/O errors. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-ibm-rtl b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-ibm-rtl new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b82deea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-ibm-rtl @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +What: state +Date: Sep 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: Vernon Mauery <vernux@us.ibm.com> +Description: The state file allows a means by which to change in and + out of Premium Real-Time Mode (PRTM), as well as the + ability to query the current state. + 0 => PRTM off + 1 => PRTM enabled +Users: The ibm-prtm userspace daemon uses this interface. + + +What: version +Date: Sep 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: Vernon Mauery <vernux@us.ibm.com> +Description: The version file provides a means by which to query + the RTL table version that lives in the Extended + BIOS Data Area (EBDA). +Users: The ibm-prtm userspace daemon uses this interface. + + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone index 063bda7..698b808 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_dpi +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_dpi Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the @@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_profile Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile. This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/firmware_version Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 This file is readonly. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5] +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/profile[1-5] Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the store. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/settings Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/startup_profile Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5. @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5. When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile and the mouse activates this profile immediately. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/tcu +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/tcu Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU. -What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/weight +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/weight Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f9f30e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/actual_profile +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in + range 0-4. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the + firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases + further usage in other programs. To receive the real version + number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the + left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21 + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes + internally. + When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific + button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are + included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. + The returned data is 77 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When read, these files return the respective profile settings. + The returned data is 43 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These + can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be + set. The data has to be 6 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile + that's active when the mouse is powered on. + When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile + and the mouse activates this profile immediately. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit + can be initiated/cancelled. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image +Date: October 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the + sampled underground. This works only in the course of a + calibration process initiated with tcu. + The returned data is 1028 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c37b82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_cpi +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the + press of a button. + When read, this file returns the raw number of the actual cpi + setting reported by the mouse. This number has to be further + processed to receive the real dpi value. + + VALUE DPI + 1 400 + 2 800 + 4 1600 + + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in + range 0-4. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the + firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases + further usage in other programs. To receive the real version + number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the + left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 13 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + and light effects. + When read, these files return the respective profile settings. + The returned data is 13 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When written, this file lets one write the respective profile + buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 19 bytes long. + The mouse will reject invalid data. + Which profile to write is determined by the profile number + contained in the data. + This file is writeonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the + press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. + profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. + The returned data is 19 bytes in size. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4. + When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile + that's active when the mouse is powered on. + This file is readonly. + +What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings +Date: August 2010 +Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> +Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse. + The size of the data is 3 bytes and holds information on the + startup_profile. + When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse. + The data has to be 3 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid + data. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-module b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-module new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cfcec3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-module @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +What: /sys/module/pch_phub/drivers/.../pch_mac +Date: August 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.35 +Contact: masa-korg@dsn.okisemi.com +Description: Write/read GbE MAC address. + +What: /sys/module/pch_phub/drivers/.../pch_firmware +Date: August 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.35 +Contact: masa-korg@dsn.okisemi.com +Description: Write/read Option ROM data. + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop index 1d77539..41ff8ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop @@ -47,6 +47,20 @@ Date: January 2007 KernelVersion: 2.6.20 Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> Description: - Control the bluetooth device. 1 means on, 0 means off. + Control the wlan device. 1 means on, 0 means off. This may control the led, the device or both. Users: Lapsus + +What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/wimax +Date: October 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the wimax device. 1 means on, 0 means off. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/wwan +Date: October 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the wwan (3G) device. 1 means on, 0 means off. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4b5fef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/eeepc-wmi/cpufv +Date: Oct 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Change CPU clock configuration (write-only). + There are three available clock configuration: + * 0 -> Super Performance Mode + * 1 -> High Performance Mode + * 2 -> Power Saving Mode diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power index 2875f1f..194ca44 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power @@ -99,9 +99,38 @@ Description: dmesg -s 1000000 | grep 'hash matches' + If you do not get any matches (or they appear to be false + positives), it is possible that the last PM event point + referred to a device created by a loadable kernel module. In + this case cat /sys/power/pm_trace_dev_match (see below) after + your system is started up and the kernel modules are loaded. + CAUTION: Using it will cause your machine's real-time (CMOS) clock to be set to a random invalid time after a resume. +What; /sys/power/pm_trace_dev_match +Date: October 2010 +Contact: James Hogan <james@albanarts.com> +Description: + The /sys/power/pm_trace_dev_match file contains the name of the + device associated with the last PM event point saved in the RTC + across reboots when pm_trace has been used. More precisely it + contains the list of current devices (including those + registered by loadable kernel modules since boot) which match + the device hash in the RTC at boot, with a newline after each + one. + + The advantage of this file over the hash matches printed to the + kernel log (see /sys/power/pm_trace), is that it includes + devices created after boot by loadable kernel modules. + + Due to the small hash size necessary to fit in the RTC, it is + possible that more than one device matches the hash, in which + case further investigation is required to determine which + device is causing the problem. Note that genuine RTC clock + values (such as when pm_trace has not been used), can still + match a device and output it's name here. + What: /sys/power/pm_async Date: January 2009 Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b138b66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-tty @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +What: /sys/class/tty/console/active +Date: Nov 2010 +Contact: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> +Description: + Shows the list of currently configured + console devices, like 'tty1 ttyS0'. + The last entry in the file is the active + device connected to /dev/console. + The file supports poll() to detect virtual + console switches. + +What: /sys/class/tty/tty0/active +Date: Nov 2010 +Contact: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> +Description: + Shows the currently active virtual console + device, like 'tty1'. + The file supports poll() to detect virtual + console switches. diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03641a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl @@ -0,0 +1,561 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<!DOCTYPE set PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" + "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []> +<set> + <setinfo> + <title>The 802.11 subsystems – for kernel developers</title> + <subtitle> + Explaining wireless 802.11 networking in the Linux kernel + </subtitle> + + <copyright> + <year>2007-2009</year> + <holder>Johannes Berg</holder> + </copyright> + + <authorgroup> + <author> + <firstname>Johannes</firstname> + <surname>Berg</surname> + <affiliation> + <address><email>johannes@sipsolutions.net</email></address> + </affiliation> + </author> + </authorgroup> + + <legalnotice> + <para> + This documentation is free software; you can redistribute + it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public + License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation. + </para> + <para> + This documentation is distributed in the hope that it will be + useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied + warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + See the GNU General Public License for more details. + </para> + <para> + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public + License along with this documentation; if not, write to the Free + Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, + MA 02111-1307 USA + </para> + <para> + For more details see the file COPYING in the source + distribution of Linux. + </para> + </legalnotice> + + <abstract> + <para> + These books attempt to give a description of the + various subsystems that play a role in 802.11 wireless + networking in Linux. Since these books are for kernel + developers they attempts to document the structures + and functions used in the kernel as well as giving a + higher-level overview. + </para> + <para> + The reader is expected to be familiar with the 802.11 + standard as published by the IEEE in 802.11-2007 (or + possibly later versions). References to this standard + will be given as "802.11-2007 8.1.5". + </para> + </abstract> + </setinfo> + <book id="cfg80211-developers-guide"> + <bookinfo> + <title>The cfg80211 subsystem</title> + + <abstract> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Introduction + </abstract> + </bookinfo> + <chapter> + <title>Device registration</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Device registration +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_band +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_channel_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_channel +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_rate_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_rate +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_sta_ht_cap +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_supported_band +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_signal_type +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_params_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wireless_dev +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_new +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_register +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_unregister +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_free + +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_name +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_dev +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_priv +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h priv_to_wiphy +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h set_wiphy_dev +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wdev_priv + </chapter> + <chapter> + <title>Actions and configuration</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Actions and configuration +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ops +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h vif_params +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h key_params +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h survey_info_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h survey_info +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h beacon_parameters +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h plink_actions +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h station_parameters +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h station_info_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h rate_info_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h rate_info +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h station_info +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h monitor_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h mpath_info_flags +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h mpath_info +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h bss_parameters +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_txq_params +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_crypto_settings +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_auth_request +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_assoc_request +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_deauth_request +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_disassoc_request +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ibss_params +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_params +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_pmksa +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_rx_auth +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_auth_timeout +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h __cfg80211_auth_canceled +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_rx_assoc +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_assoc_timeout +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_deauth +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h __cfg80211_send_deauth +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_send_disassoc +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h __cfg80211_send_disassoc +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ibss_joined +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_result +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_roamed +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_disconnected +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ready_on_channel +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_remain_on_channel_expired +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_new_sta +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_mgmt +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_mgmt_tx_status +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_rssi_notify +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_pktloss_notify +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_michael_mic_failure + </chapter> + <chapter> + <title>Scanning and BSS list handling</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Scanning and BSS list handling +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ssid +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_request +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_done +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_bss +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_frame +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_unlink_bss +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_find_ie +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_bss_get_ie + </chapter> + <chapter> + <title>Utility functions</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Utility functions +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_channel_to_frequency +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_frequency_to_channel +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_get_channel +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_get_response_rate +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_hdrlen +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_radiotap_iterator + </chapter> + <chapter> + <title>Data path helpers</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Data path helpers +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_data_to_8023 +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_data_from_8023 +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_amsdu_to_8023s +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_classify8021d + </chapter> + <chapter> + <title>Regulatory enforcement infrastructure</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Regulatory enforcement infrastructure +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h regulatory_hint +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_apply_custom_regulatory +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h freq_reg_info + </chapter> + <chapter> + <title>RFkill integration</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h RFkill integration +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_rfkill_start_polling +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_rfkill_stop_polling + </chapter> + <chapter> + <title>Test mode</title> +!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Test mode +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_alloc_reply_skb +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_reply +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_alloc_event_skb +!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_event + </chapter> + </book> + <book id="mac80211-developers-guide"> + <bookinfo> + <title>The mac80211 subsystem</title> + <abstract> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Introduction +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Warning + </abstract> + </bookinfo> + + <toc></toc> + + <!-- + Generally, this document shall be ordered by increasing complexity. + It is important to note that readers should be able to read only + the first few sections to get a working driver and only advanced + usage should require reading the full document. + --> + + <part> + <title>The basic mac80211 driver interface</title> + <partintro> + <para> + You should read and understand the information contained + within this part of the book while implementing a driver. + In some chapters, advanced usage is noted, that may be + skipped at first. + </para> + <para> + This part of the book only covers station and monitor mode + functionality, additional information required to implement + the other modes is covered in the second part of the book. + </para> + </partintro> + + <chapter id="basics"> + <title>Basic hardware handling</title> + <para>TBD</para> + <para> + This chapter shall contain information on getting a hw + struct allocated and registered with mac80211. + </para> + <para> + Since it is required to allocate rates/modes before registering + a hw struct, this chapter shall also contain information on setting + up the rate/mode structs. + </para> + <para> + Additionally, some discussion about the callbacks and + the general programming model should be in here, including + the definition of ieee80211_ops which will be referred to + a lot. + </para> + <para> + Finally, a discussion of hardware capabilities should be done + with references to other parts of the book. + </para> + <!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order --> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_DEV +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ops +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_alloc_hw +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_register_hw +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tx_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_rx_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_radio_led_name +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_unregister_hw +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_free_hw + </chapter> + + <chapter id="phy-handling"> + <title>PHY configuration</title> + <para>TBD</para> + <para> + This chapter should describe PHY handling including + start/stop callbacks and the various structures used. + </para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf_flags + </chapter> + + <chapter id="iface-handling"> + <title>Virtual interfaces</title> + <para>TBD</para> + <para> + This chapter should describe virtual interface basics + that are relevant to the driver (VLANs, MGMT etc are not.) + It should explain the use of the add_iface/remove_iface + callbacks as well as the interface configuration callbacks. + </para> + <para>Things related to AP mode should be discussed there.</para> + <para> + Things related to supporting multiple interfaces should be + in the appropriate chapter, a BIG FAT note should be here about + this though and the recommendation to allow only a single + interface in STA mode at first! + </para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_vif + </chapter> + + <chapter id="rx-tx"> + <title>Receive and transmit processing</title> + <sect1> + <title>what should be here</title> + <para>TBD</para> + <para> + This should describe the receive and transmit + paths in mac80211/the drivers as well as + transmit status handling. + </para> + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>Frame format</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame format + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>Packet alignment</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/rx.c Packet alignment + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>Calling into mac80211 from interrupts</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Calling mac80211 from interrupts + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>functions/definitions</title> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_control_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rate_control_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_ni +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_ni +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_get +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_duration +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_get +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_stopped + </sect1> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="filters"> + <title>Frame filtering</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame filtering +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_filter_flags + </chapter> + + <chapter id="workqueue"> + <title>The mac80211 workqueue</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211 workqueue +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_work +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_delayed_work + </chapter> + </part> + + <part id="advanced"> + <title>Advanced driver interface</title> + <partintro> + <para> + Information contained within this part of the book is + of interest only for advanced interaction of mac80211 + with drivers to exploit more hardware capabilities and + improve performance. + </para> + </partintro> + + <chapter id="hardware-crypto-offload"> + <title>Hardware crypto acceleration</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Hardware crypto acceleration + <!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order --> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h set_key_cmd +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_conf +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_flags +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tkip_key_type +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_key +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_removed + </chapter> + + <chapter id="powersave"> + <title>Powersave support</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Powersave support + </chapter> + + <chapter id="beacon-filter"> + <title>Beacon filter support</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Beacon filter support +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_loss + </chapter> + + <chapter id="qos"> + <title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title> + <para>TBD</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params + </chapter> + + <chapter id="AP"> + <title>Access point mode support</title> + <para>TBD</para> + <para>Some parts of the if_conf should be discussed here instead</para> + <para> + Insert notes about VLAN interfaces with hw crypto here or + in the hw crypto chapter. + </para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_buffered_bc +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_get + </chapter> + + <chapter id="multi-iface"> + <title>Supporting multiple virtual interfaces</title> + <para>TBD</para> + <para> + Note: WDS with identical MAC address should almost always be OK + </para> + <para> + Insert notes about having multiple virtual interfaces with + different MAC addresses here, note which configurations are + supported by mac80211, add notes about supporting hw crypto + with it. + </para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic + </chapter> + + <chapter id="station-handling"> + <title>Station handling</title> + <para>TODO</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h sta_notify_cmd +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake + </chapter> + + <chapter id="hardware-scan-offload"> + <title>Hardware scan offload</title> + <para>TBD</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_scan_completed + </chapter> + + <chapter id="aggregation"> + <title>Aggregation</title> + <sect1> + <title>TX A-MPDU aggregation</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c TX A-MPDU aggregation +!Cnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>RX A-MPDU aggregation</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c RX A-MPDU aggregation +!Cnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c + </sect1> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action + </chapter> + + <chapter id="smps"> + <title>Spatial Multiplexing Powersave (SMPS)</title> +!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Spatial multiplexing power save +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_request_smps +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_smps_mode + </chapter> + </part> + + <part id="rate-control"> + <title>Rate control interface</title> + <partintro> + <para>TBD</para> + <para> + This part of the book describes the rate control algorithm + interface and how it relates to mac80211 and drivers. + </para> + </partintro> + <chapter id="ratecontrol-api"> + <title>Rate Control API</title> + <para>TBD</para> +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_changed +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate_control +!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_send_low + </chapter> + </part> + + <part id="internal"> + <title>Internals</title> + <partintro> + <para>TBD</para> + <para> + This part of the book describes mac80211 internals. + </para> + </partintro> + + <chapter id="key-handling"> + <title>Key handling</title> + <sect1> + <title>Key handling basics</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/key.c Key handling basics + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>MORE TBD</title> + <para>TBD</para> + </sect1> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="rx-processing"> + <title>Receive processing</title> + <para>TBD</para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="tx-processing"> + <title>Transmit processing</title> + <para>TBD</para> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="sta-info"> + <title>Station info handling</title> + <sect1> + <title>Programming information</title> +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_info +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h ieee80211_sta_info_flags + </sect1> + <sect1> + <title>STA information lifetime rules</title> +!Pnet/mac80211/sta_info.c STA information lifetime rules + </sect1> + </chapter> + + <chapter id="aggregation-internals"> + <title>Aggregation</title> +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_ampdu_mlme +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_tx +!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_rx + </chapter> + + <chapter id="synchronisation"> + <title>Synchronisation</title> + <para>TBD</para> + <para>Locking, lots of RCU</para> + </chapter> + </part> + </book> +</set> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 34929f24..8b6e00a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml device-drivers.xml \ kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \ gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \ genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \ - mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \ + 80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \ alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \ tracepoint.xml media.xml drm.xml diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index ecd35e9..35447e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -46,14 +46,18 @@ <sect1><title>Atomic and pointer manipulation</title> !Iarch/x86/include/asm/atomic.h -!Iarch/x86/include/asm/unaligned.h </sect1> <sect1><title>Delaying, scheduling, and timer routines</title> !Iinclude/linux/sched.h !Ekernel/sched.c +!Iinclude/linux/completion.h !Ekernel/timer.c </sect1> + <sect1><title>Wait queues and Wake events</title> +!Iinclude/linux/wait.h +!Ekernel/wait.c + </sect1> <sect1><title>High-resolution timers</title> !Iinclude/linux/ktime.h !Iinclude/linux/hrtimer.h @@ -300,6 +304,10 @@ X!Idrivers/video/console/fonts.c !Edrivers/input/ff-core.c !Edrivers/input/ff-memless.c </sect1> + <sect1><title>Multitouch Library</title> +!Iinclude/linux/input/mt.h +!Edrivers/input/input-mt.c + </sect1> <sect1><title>Polled input devices</title> !Iinclude/linux/input-polldev.h !Edrivers/input/input-polldev.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl index 910c923..2861055 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl @@ -136,6 +136,7 @@ #ifdef CONFIG_COMPAT .compat_ioctl = i915_compat_ioctl, #endif + .llseek = noop_llseek, }, .pci_driver = { .name = DRIVER_NAME, diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl index 1448b33..fb10fd0 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ </authorgroup> <copyright> - <year>2005-2006</year> + <year>2005-2010</year> <holder>Thomas Gleixner</holder> </copyright> <copyright> @@ -100,6 +100,10 @@ <listitem><para>Edge type</para></listitem> <listitem><para>Simple type</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> + During the implementation we identified another type: + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para>Fast EOI type</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> In the SMP world of the __do_IRQ() super-handler another type was identified: <itemizedlist> @@ -153,6 +157,7 @@ is still available. This leads to a kind of duality for the time being. Over time the new model should be used in more and more architectures, as it enables smaller and cleaner IRQ subsystems. + It's deprecated for three years now and about to be removed. </para> </chapter> <chapter id="bugs"> @@ -217,6 +222,7 @@ <itemizedlist> <listitem><para>handle_level_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_edge_irq</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>handle_fasteoi_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_simple_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_percpu_irq</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> @@ -233,33 +239,33 @@ are used by the default flow implementations. The following helper functions are implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -default_enable(irq) +default_enable(struct irq_data *data) { - desc->chip->unmask(irq); + desc->chip->irq_unmask(data); } -default_disable(irq) +default_disable(struct irq_data *data) { - if (!delay_disable(irq)) - desc->chip->mask(irq); + if (!delay_disable(data)) + desc->chip->irq_mask(data); } -default_ack(irq) +default_ack(struct irq_data *data) { - chip->ack(irq); + chip->irq_ack(data); } -default_mask_ack(irq) +default_mask_ack(struct irq_data *data) { - if (chip->mask_ack) { - chip->mask_ack(irq); + if (chip->irq_mask_ack) { + chip->irq_mask_ack(data); } else { - chip->mask(irq); - chip->ack(irq); + chip->irq_mask(data); + chip->irq_ack(data); } } -noop(irq) +noop(struct irq_data *data)) { } @@ -278,12 +284,27 @@ noop(irq) <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -desc->chip->start(); +desc->chip->irq_mask(); handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -desc->chip->end(); +desc->chip->irq_unmask(); </programlisting> </para> - </sect3> + </sect3> + <sect3 id="Default_FASTEOI_IRQ_flow_handler"> + <title>Default Fast EOI IRQ flow handler</title> + <para> + handle_fasteoi_irq provides a generic implementation + for interrupts, which only need an EOI at the end of + the handler + </para> + <para> + The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): + <programlisting> +handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); +desc->chip->irq_eoi(); + </programlisting> + </para> + </sect3> <sect3 id="Default_Edge_IRQ_flow_handler"> <title>Default Edge IRQ flow handler</title> <para> @@ -294,20 +315,19 @@ desc->chip->end(); The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> if (desc->status & running) { - desc->chip->hold(); + desc->chip->irq_mask(); desc->status |= pending | masked; return; } -desc->chip->start(); +desc->chip->irq_ack(); desc->status |= running; do { if (desc->status & masked) - desc->chip->enable(); + desc->chip->irq_unmask(); desc->status &= ~pending; handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); } while (status & pending); desc->status &= ~running; -desc->chip->end(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -342,9 +362,9 @@ handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -desc->chip->start(); handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -desc->chip->end(); +if (desc->chip->irq_eoi) + desc->chip->irq_eoi(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -375,8 +395,7 @@ desc->chip->end(); mechanism. (It's necessary to enable CONFIG_HARDIRQS_SW_RESEND when you want to use the delayed interrupt disable feature and your hardware is not capable of retriggering an interrupt.) - The delayed interrupt disable can be runtime enabled, per interrupt, - by setting the IRQ_DELAYED_DISABLE flag in the irq_desc status field. + The delayed interrupt disable is not configurable. </para> </sect2> </sect1> @@ -387,13 +406,13 @@ desc->chip->end(); contains all the direct chip relevant functions, which can be utilized by the irq flow implementations. <itemizedlist> - <listitem><para>ack()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>mask_ack() - Optional, recommended for performance</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>mask()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>unmask()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>retrigger() - Optional</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_type() - Optional</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_wake() - Optional</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_ack()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_mask_ack() - Optional, recommended for performance</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_mask()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_unmask()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_retrigger() - Optional</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_type() - Optional</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_wake() - Optional</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> These primitives are strictly intended to mean what they say: ack means ACK, masking means masking of an IRQ line, etc. It is up to the flow @@ -458,6 +477,7 @@ desc->chip->end(); <para> This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the internal functions. </para> +!Ikernel/irq/irqdesc.c !Ikernel/irq/handle.c !Ikernel/irq/chip.c </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl index a20c6f6..7160652 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl @@ -57,7 +57,6 @@ </para> <sect1><title>String Conversions</title> -!Ilib/vsprintf.c !Elib/vsprintf.c </sect1> <sect1><title>String Manipulation</title> @@ -94,6 +93,12 @@ X!Ilib/string.c !Elib/crc32.c !Elib/crc-ccitt.c </sect1> + + <sect1 id="idr"><title>idr/ida Functions</title> +!Pinclude/linux/idr.h idr sync +!Plib/idr.c IDA description +!Elib/idr.c + </sect1> </chapter> <chapter id="mm"> @@ -258,7 +263,8 @@ X!Earch/x86/kernel/mca_32.c !Iblock/blk-sysfs.c !Eblock/blk-settings.c !Eblock/blk-exec.c -!Eblock/blk-barrier.c +!Eblock/blk-flush.c +!Eblock/blk-lib.c !Eblock/blk-tag.c !Iblock/blk-tag.c !Eblock/blk-integrity.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl index 084f6ad..f66f4df 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl @@ -1645,7 +1645,9 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done. all the readers who were traversing the list when we deleted the element are finished. We use <function>call_rcu()</function> to register a callback which will actually destroy the object once - the readers are finished. + all pre-existing readers are finished. Alternatively, + <function>synchronize_rcu()</function> may be used to block until + all pre-existing are finished. </para> <para> But how does Read Copy Update know when the readers are @@ -1714,7 +1716,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done. - object_put(obj); + list_del_rcu(&obj->list); cache_num--; -+ call_rcu(&obj->rcu, cache_delete_rcu, obj); ++ call_rcu(&obj->rcu, cache_delete_rcu); } /* Must be holding cache_lock */ @@ -1725,14 +1727,6 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done. if (++cache_num > MAX_CACHE_SIZE) { struct object *i, *outcast = NULL; list_for_each_entry(i, &cache, list) { -@@ -85,6 +94,7 @@ - obj->popularity = 0; - atomic_set(&obj->refcnt, 1); /* The cache holds a reference */ - spin_lock_init(&obj->lock); -+ INIT_RCU_HEAD(&obj->rcu); - - spin_lock_irqsave(&cache_lock, flags); - __cache_add(obj); @@ -104,12 +114,11 @@ struct object *cache_find(int id) { @@ -1922,9 +1916,12 @@ machines due to caching. <function>mutex_lock()</function> </para> <para> - There is a <function>mutex_trylock()</function> which can be - used inside interrupt context, as it will not sleep. + There is a <function>mutex_trylock()</function> which does not + sleep. Still, it must not be used inside interrupt context since + its implementation is not safe for that. <function>mutex_unlock()</function> will also never sleep. + It cannot be used in interrupt context either since a mutex + must be released by the same task that acquired it. </para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> @@ -1958,6 +1955,12 @@ machines due to caching. </sect1> </chapter> + <chapter id="apiref"> + <title>Mutex API reference</title> +!Iinclude/linux/mutex.h +!Ekernel/mutex.c + </chapter> + <chapter id="references"> <title>Further reading</title> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl index 490d862..d71b57f 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl @@ -710,7 +710,18 @@ Task Addr Pid Parent [*] cpu State Thread Command <listitem><para>A simple shell</para></listitem> <listitem><para>The kdb core command set</para></listitem> <listitem><para>A registration API to register additional kdb shell commands.</para> - <para>A good example of a self-contained kdb module is the "ftdump" command for dumping the ftrace buffer. See: kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c</para></listitem> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para>A good example of a self-contained kdb module + is the "ftdump" command for dumping the ftrace buffer. See: + kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>For an example of how to dynamically register + a new kdb command you can build the kdb_hello.ko kernel module + from samples/kdb/kdb_hello.c. To build this example you can + set CONFIG_SAMPLES=y and CONFIG_SAMPLE_KDB=m in your kernel + config. Later run "modprobe kdb_hello" and the next time you + enter the kdb shell, you can run the "hello" + command.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist></listitem> <listitem><para>The implementation for kdb_printf() which emits messages directly to I/O drivers, bypassing the kernel log.</para></listitem> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl deleted file mode 100644 index affb15a..0000000 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mac80211.tmpl +++ /dev/null @@ -1,337 +0,0 @@ -<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> -<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN" - "http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []> - -<book id="mac80211-developers-guide"> - <bookinfo> - <title>The mac80211 subsystem for kernel developers</title> - - <authorgroup> - <author> - <firstname>Johannes</firstname> - <surname>Berg</surname> - <affiliation> - <address><email>johannes@sipsolutions.net</email></address> - </affiliation> - </author> - </authorgroup> - - <copyright> - <year>2007-2009</year> - <holder>Johannes Berg</holder> - </copyright> - - <legalnotice> - <para> - This documentation is free software; you can redistribute - it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public - License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation. - </para> - - <para> - This documentation is distributed in the hope that it will be - useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied - warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. - See the GNU General Public License for more details. - </para> - - <para> - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public - License along with this documentation; if not, write to the Free - Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, - MA 02111-1307 USA - </para> - - <para> - For more details see the file COPYING in the source - distribution of Linux. - </para> - </legalnotice> - - <abstract> -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Introduction -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Warning - </abstract> - </bookinfo> - - <toc></toc> - -<!-- -Generally, this document shall be ordered by increasing complexity. -It is important to note that readers should be able to read only -the first few sections to get a working driver and only advanced -usage should require reading the full document. ---> - - <part> - <title>The basic mac80211 driver interface</title> - <partintro> - <para> - You should read and understand the information contained - within this part of the book while implementing a driver. - In some chapters, advanced usage is noted, that may be - skipped at first. - </para> - <para> - This part of the book only covers station and monitor mode - functionality, additional information required to implement - the other modes is covered in the second part of the book. - </para> - </partintro> - - <chapter id="basics"> - <title>Basic hardware handling</title> - <para>TBD</para> - <para> - This chapter shall contain information on getting a hw - struct allocated and registered with mac80211. - </para> - <para> - Since it is required to allocate rates/modes before registering - a hw struct, this chapter shall also contain information on setting - up the rate/mode structs. - </para> - <para> - Additionally, some discussion about the callbacks and - the general programming model should be in here, including - the definition of ieee80211_ops which will be referred to - a lot. - </para> - <para> - Finally, a discussion of hardware capabilities should be done - with references to other parts of the book. - </para> -<!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order --> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw_flags -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_DEV -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ops -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_alloc_hw -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_register_hw -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tx_led_name -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_rx_led_name -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_radio_led_name -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_unregister_hw -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_free_hw - </chapter> - - <chapter id="phy-handling"> - <title>PHY configuration</title> - <para>TBD</para> - <para> - This chapter should describe PHY handling including - start/stop callbacks and the various structures used. - </para> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf_flags - </chapter> - - <chapter id="iface-handling"> - <title>Virtual interfaces</title> - <para>TBD</para> - <para> - This chapter should describe virtual interface basics - that are relevant to the driver (VLANs, MGMT etc are not.) - It should explain the use of the add_iface/remove_iface - callbacks as well as the interface configuration callbacks. - </para> - <para>Things related to AP mode should be discussed there.</para> - <para> - Things related to supporting multiple interfaces should be - in the appropriate chapter, a BIG FAT note should be here about - this though and the recommendation to allow only a single - interface in STA mode at first! - </para> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_vif - </chapter> - - <chapter id="rx-tx"> - <title>Receive and transmit processing</title> - <sect1> - <title>what should be here</title> - <para>TBD</para> - <para> - This should describe the receive and transmit - paths in mac80211/the drivers as well as - transmit status handling. - </para> - </sect1> - <sect1> - <title>Frame format</title> -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame format - </sect1> - <sect1> - <title>Packet alignment</title> -!Pnet/mac80211/rx.c Packet alignment - </sect1> - <sect1> - <title>Calling into mac80211 from interrupts</title> -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Calling mac80211 from interrupts - </sect1> - <sect1> - <title>functions/definitions</title> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_get -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_duration -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_get -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues - </sect1> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="filters"> - <title>Frame filtering</title> -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame filtering -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_filter_flags - </chapter> - </part> - - <part id="advanced"> - <title>Advanced driver interface</title> - <partintro> - <para> - Information contained within this part of the book is - of interest only for advanced interaction of mac80211 - with drivers to exploit more hardware capabilities and - improve performance. - </para> - </partintro> - - <chapter id="hardware-crypto-offload"> - <title>Hardware crypto acceleration</title> -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Hardware crypto acceleration -<!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order --> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h set_key_cmd -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_conf -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_alg -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_flags - </chapter> - - <chapter id="powersave"> - <title>Powersave support</title> -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Powersave support - </chapter> - - <chapter id="beacon-filter"> - <title>Beacon filter support</title> -!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Beacon filter support -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_loss - </chapter> - - <chapter id="qos"> - <title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title> - <para>TBD</para> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params - </chapter> - - <chapter id="AP"> - <title>Access point mode support</title> - <para>TBD</para> - <para>Some parts of the if_conf should be discussed here instead</para> - <para> - Insert notes about VLAN interfaces with hw crypto here or - in the hw crypto chapter. - </para> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_buffered_bc -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_get - </chapter> - - <chapter id="multi-iface"> - <title>Supporting multiple virtual interfaces</title> - <para>TBD</para> - <para> - Note: WDS with identical MAC address should almost always be OK - </para> - <para> - Insert notes about having multiple virtual interfaces with - different MAC addresses here, note which configurations are - supported by mac80211, add notes about supporting hw crypto - with it. - </para> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="hardware-scan-offload"> - <title>Hardware scan offload</title> - <para>TBD</para> -!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_scan_completed - </chapter> - </part> - - <part id="rate-control"> - <title>Rate control interface</title> - <partintro> - <para>TBD</para> - <para> - This part of the book describes the rate control algorithm - interface and how it relates to mac80211 and drivers. - </para> - </partintro> - <chapter id="dummy"> - <title>dummy chapter</title> - <para>TBD</para> - </chapter> - </part> - - <part id="internal"> - <title>Internals</title> - <partintro> - <para>TBD</para> - <para> - This part of the book describes mac80211 internals. - </para> - </partintro> - - <chapter id="key-handling"> - <title>Key handling</title> - <sect1> - <title>Key handling basics</title> -!Pnet/mac80211/key.c Key handling basics - </sect1> - <sect1> - <title>MORE TBD</title> - <para>TBD</para> - </sect1> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="rx-processing"> - <title>Receive processing</title> - <para>TBD</para> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="tx-processing"> - <title>Transmit processing</title> - <para>TBD</para> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="sta-info"> - <title>Station info handling</title> - <sect1> - <title>Programming information</title> -!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_info -!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h ieee80211_sta_info_flags - </sect1> - <sect1> - <title>STA information lifetime rules</title> -!Pnet/mac80211/sta_info.c STA information lifetime rules - </sect1> - </chapter> - - <chapter id="synchronisation"> - <title>Synchronisation</title> - <para>TBD</para> - <para>Locking, lots of RCU</para> - </chapter> - </part> -</book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl index 6ae9715..be34dcb 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl @@ -250,6 +250,9 @@ <!ENTITY sub-yuv422p SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuv422p.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-yuyv SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuyv.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-yvyu SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yvyu.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-srggb10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-srggb8 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-y10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-pixfmt SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-cropcap SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-dbg-g-register SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml"> @@ -347,6 +350,9 @@ <!ENTITY yuv422p SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuv422p.xml"> <!ENTITY yuyv SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yuyv.xml"> <!ENTITY yvyu SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-yvyu.xml"> +<!ENTITY srggb10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml"> +<!ENTITY srggb8 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml"> +<!ENTITY y10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml"> <!ENTITY cropcap SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml"> <!ENTITY dbg-g-register SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml"> <!ENTITY encoder-cmd SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-encoder-cmd.xml"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl index d858d92..4a38f60 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl @@ -79,10 +79,6 @@ </sect2> </sect1> </chapter> - <chapter id="clk"> - <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title> -!Iinclude/linux/sh_clk.h - </chapter> <chapter id="mach"> <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title> <sect1 id="dreamcast"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/tracepoint.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/tracepoint.tmpl index e8473ea..b57a9ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/tracepoint.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/tracepoint.tmpl @@ -104,4 +104,9 @@ <title>Block IO</title> !Iinclude/trace/events/block.h </chapter> + + <chapter id="workqueue"> + <title>Workqueue</title> +!Iinclude/trace/events/workqueue.h + </chapter> </book> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index 4d4ce0e..b4665b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ </orgname> <address> - <email>hjk@linutronix.de</email> + <email>hjk@hansjkoch.de</email> </address> </affiliation> </author> @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ GPL version 2. <para>If you know of any translations for this document, or you are interested in translating it, please email me -<email>hjk@linutronix.de</email>. +<email>hjk@hansjkoch.de</email>. </para> </sect1> @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ interested in translating it, please email me <title>Feedback</title> <para>Find something wrong with this document? (Or perhaps something right?) I would love to hear from you. Please email me at - <email>hjk@linutronix.de</email>.</para> + <email>hjk@hansjkoch.de</email>.</para> </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml index 54447f0..c9ce61d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml @@ -21,11 +21,15 @@ API.</para> <title>Opening and Closing Devices</title> <para>For compatibility reasons the character device file names -recommended for V4L2 video capture, overlay, radio, teletext and raw +recommended for V4L2 video capture, overlay, radio and raw vbi capture devices did not change from those used by V4L. They are listed in <xref linkend="devices" /> and below in <xref linkend="v4l-dev" />.</para> + <para>The teletext devices (minor range 192-223) have been removed in +V4L2 and no longer exist. There is no hardware available anymore for handling +pure teletext. Instead raw or sliced VBI is used.</para> + <para>The V4L <filename>videodev</filename> module automatically assigns minor numbers to drivers in load order, depending on the registered device type. We recommend that V4L2 drivers by default @@ -66,13 +70,6 @@ not compatible with V4L or V4L2.</para> </footnote>, <entry>64-127</entry> </row> <row> - <entry>Teletext decoder</entry> - <entry><para><filename>/dev/vtx</filename>, -<filename>/dev/vtx0</filename> to -<filename>/dev/vtx31</filename></para></entry> - <entry>192-223</entry> - </row> - <row> <entry>Raw VBI capture</entry> <entry><para><filename>/dev/vbi</filename>, <filename>/dev/vbi0</filename> to @@ -2345,6 +2342,17 @@ more information.</para> </listitem> </orderedlist> </section> + <section> + <title>V4L2 in Linux 2.6.37</title> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Remove the vtx (videotext/teletext) API. This API was no longer +used and no hardware exists to verify the API. Nor were any userspace applications found +that used it. It was originally scheduled for removal in 2.6.35. + </para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> <section id="other"> <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml index 8408caa..2fae3e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml @@ -312,10 +312,17 @@ minimum value disables backlight compensation.</entry> information and bits 24-31 must be zero.</entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_1</constant> + <constant>V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_2</constant></entry> + <entry>boolean</entry> + <entry>Switch on or off the illuminator 1 or 2 of the device + (usually a microscope).</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_LASTP1</constant></entry> <entry></entry> <entry>End of the predefined control IDs (currently -<constant>V4L2_CID_BG_COLOR</constant> + 1).</entry> +<constant>V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_2</constant> + 1).</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_PRIVATE_BASE</constant></entry> @@ -357,9 +364,6 @@ enumerate_menu (void) querymenu.index++) { if (0 == ioctl (fd, &VIDIOC-QUERYMENU;, &querymenu)) { printf (" %s\n", querymenu.name); - } else { - perror ("VIDIOC_QUERYMENU"); - exit (EXIT_FAILURE); } } } diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml index 0869d70..360d273 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-rds.xml @@ -3,15 +3,16 @@ <para>The Radio Data System transmits supplementary information in binary format, for example the station name or travel information, on an inaudible audio subcarrier of a radio program. This -interface is aimed at devices capable of receiving and decoding RDS +interface is aimed at devices capable of receiving and/or transmitting RDS information.</para> <para>For more information see the core RDS standard <xref linkend="en50067" /> and the RBDS standard <xref linkend="nrsc4" />.</para> <para>Note that the RBDS standard as is used in the USA is almost identical -to the RDS standard. Any RDS decoder can also handle RBDS. Only some of the fields -have slightly different meanings. See the RBDS standard for more information.</para> +to the RDS standard. Any RDS decoder/encoder can also handle RBDS. Only some of the +fields have slightly different meanings. See the RBDS standard for more +information.</para> <para>The RBDS standard also specifies support for MMBS (Modified Mobile Search). This is a proprietary format which seems to be discontinued. The RDS interface does not @@ -21,16 +22,25 @@ be needed, then please contact the linux-media mailing list: &v4l-ml;.</para> <section> <title>Querying Capabilities</title> - <para>Devices supporting the RDS capturing API -set the <constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_CAPTURE</constant> flag in + <para>Devices supporting the RDS capturing API set +the <constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_CAPTURE</constant> flag in the <structfield>capabilities</structfield> field of &v4l2-capability; -returned by the &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl. -Any tuner that supports RDS will set the -<constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS</constant> flag in the <structfield>capability</structfield> -field of &v4l2-tuner;. -Whether an RDS signal is present can be detected by looking at -the <structfield>rxsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-tuner;: the -<constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS</constant> will be set if RDS data was detected.</para> +returned by the &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl. Any tuner that supports RDS +will set the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS</constant> flag in +the <structfield>capability</structfield> field of &v4l2-tuner;. If +the driver only passes RDS blocks without interpreting the data +the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_BLOCK_IO</constant> flag has to be +set, see <link linkend="reading-rds-data">Reading RDS data</link>. +For future use the +flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_CONTROLS</constant> has also been +defined. However, a driver for a radio tuner with this capability does +not yet exist, so if you are planning to write such a driver you +should discuss this on the linux-media mailing list: &v4l-ml;.</para> + + <para> Whether an RDS signal is present can be detected by looking +at the <structfield>rxsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-tuner;: +the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS</constant> will be set if RDS data +was detected.</para> <para>Devices supporting the RDS output API set the <constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_OUTPUT</constant> flag in @@ -40,16 +50,31 @@ Any modulator that supports RDS will set the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS</constant> flag in the <structfield>capability</structfield> field of &v4l2-modulator;. In order to enable the RDS transmission one must set the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS</constant> -bit in the <structfield>txsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-modulator;.</para> - +bit in the <structfield>txsubchans</structfield> field of &v4l2-modulator;. +If the driver only passes RDS blocks without interpreting the data +the <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_BLOCK_IO</constant> flag has to be set. If the +tuner is capable of handling RDS entities like program identification codes and radio +text, the flag <constant>V4L2_TUNER_SUB_RDS_CONTROLS</constant> should be set, +see <link linkend="writing-rds-data">Writing RDS data</link> and +<link linkend="fm-tx-controls">FM Transmitter Control Reference</link>.</para> </section> - <section> + <section id="reading-rds-data"> <title>Reading RDS data</title> <para>RDS data can be read from the radio device -with the &func-read; function. The data is packed in groups of three bytes, +with the &func-read; function. The data is packed in groups of three bytes.</para> + </section> + + <section id="writing-rds-data"> + <title>Writing RDS data</title> + + <para>RDS data can be written to the radio device +with the &func-write; function. The data is packed in groups of three bytes, as follows:</para> + </section> + + <section> <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-rds-data"> <title>struct <structname>v4l2_rds_data</structname></title> @@ -111,48 +136,57 @@ as follows:</para> <tbody valign="top"> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_MSK</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>7</entry> <entry>Mask for bits 0-2 to get the block ID.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_A</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>0</entry> <entry>Block A.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_B</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>1</entry> <entry>Block B.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_C</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>2</entry> <entry>Block C.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_D</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>3</entry> <entry>Block D.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_C_ALT</entry> + <entry> </entry> <entry>4</entry> <entry>Block C'.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_INVALID</entry> + <entry>read-only</entry> <entry>7</entry> <entry>An invalid block.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_CORRECTED</entry> + <entry>read-only</entry> <entry>0x40</entry> <entry>A bit error was detected but corrected.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>V4L2_RDS_BLOCK_ERROR</entry> + <entry>read-only</entry> <entry>0x80</entry> - <entry>An incorrectable error occurred.</entry> + <entry>An uncorrectable error occurred.</entry> </row> </tbody> </tgroup> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml index 76184e8..414b1cf 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-teletext.xml @@ -1,35 +1,32 @@ <title>Teletext Interface</title> - <para>This interface aims at devices receiving and demodulating + <para>This interface was aimed at devices receiving and demodulating Teletext data [<xref linkend="ets300706" />, <xref linkend="itu653" />], evaluating the Teletext packages and storing formatted pages in cache memory. Such devices are usually implemented as microcontrollers with serial -interface (I<superscript>2</superscript>C) and can be found on older +interface (I<superscript>2</superscript>C) and could be found on old TV cards, dedicated Teletext decoding cards and home-brew devices connected to the PC parallel port.</para> - <para>The Teletext API was designed by Martin Buck. It is defined in + <para>The Teletext API was designed by Martin Buck. It was defined in the kernel header file <filename>linux/videotext.h</filename>, the specification is available from <ulink url="ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/"> ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/misc/videotext/</ulink>. (Videotext is the name of -the German public television Teletext service.) Conventional character -device file names are <filename>/dev/vtx</filename> and -<filename>/dev/vttuner</filename>, with device number 83, 0 and 83, 16 -respectively. A similar interface exists for the Philips SAA5249 -Teletext decoder [specification?] with character device file names -<filename>/dev/tlkN</filename>, device number 102, N.</para> +the German public television Teletext service.)</para> <para>Eventually the Teletext API was integrated into the V4L API with character device file names <filename>/dev/vtx0</filename> to <filename>/dev/vtx31</filename>, device major number 81, minor numbers -192 to 223. For reference the V4L Teletext API specification is -reproduced here in full: "Teletext interfaces talk the existing VTX -API." Teletext devices with major number 83 and 102 will be removed in -Linux 2.6.</para> +192 to 223.</para> - <para>There are no plans to replace the Teletext API or to integrate -it into V4L2. Please write to the linux-media mailing list: &v4l-ml; -when the need arises.</para> + <para>However, teletext decoders were quickly replaced by more +generic VBI demodulators and those dedicated teletext decoders no longer exist. +For many years the vtx devices were still around, even though nobody used +them. So the decision was made to finally remove support for the Teletext API in +kernel 2.6.37.</para> + + <para>Modern devices all use the <link linkend="raw-vbi">raw</link> or +<link linkend="sliced">sliced</link> VBI API.</para> <!-- Local Variables: diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml index 00f9690..b60fd37 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/func-ioctl.xml @@ -34,8 +34,7 @@ <varlistentry> <term><parameter>request</parameter></term> <listitem> - <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <link -linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file, for example + <para>V4L2 ioctl request code as defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file, for example VIDIOC_QUERYCAP.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -57,7 +56,7 @@ file descriptor. An ioctl <parameter>request</parameter> has encoded in it whether the argument is an input, output or read/write parameter, and the size of the argument <parameter>argp</parameter> in bytes. Macros and defines specifying V4L2 ioctl requests are located -in the <link linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file. +in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> header file. Applications should use their own copy, not include the version in the kernel sources on the system they compile on. All V4L2 ioctl requests, their respective function and parameters are specified in <xref diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml index 26e8792..4db272b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-packed-rgb.xml @@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ defined in error. Drivers may interpret them as in <xref <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666"> + <row><!-- id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666" --> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR666</constant></entry> <entry>'BGRH'</entry> <entry></entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7b27409 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + <refentry> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10 ('RG10'), + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10 ('BA10'), + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10 ('GB10'), + V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10 ('BG10'), + </refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10</constant></refname> + <refname id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR10"><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>10-bit Bayer formats expanded to 16 bits</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>The following four pixel formats are raw sRGB / Bayer formats with +10 bits per colour. Each colour component is stored in a 16-bit word, with 6 +unused high bits filled with zeros. Each n-pixel row contains n/2 green samples +and n/2 blue or red samples, with alternating red and blue rows. Bytes are +stored in memory in little endian order. They are conventionally described +as GRGR... BGBG..., RGRG... GBGB..., etc. Below is an example of one of these +formats</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte, high 6 bits in high bytes are 0. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="5" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>B<subscript>00low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>00high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>01low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>01high</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>02low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>02high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>03low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>03high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>10low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>10high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>11low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>11high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>12low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>12high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>13low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>13high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 16:</entry> + <entry>B<subscript>20low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>20high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>21low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>21high</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>22low</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>22high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>23low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>23high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 24:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>30low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>30high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>31low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>31high</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>32low</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>32high</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>33low</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>33high</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2570e3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + <refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB8"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8 ('RGGB')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Bayer RGB format</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is commonly the native format of digital cameras, +reflecting the arrangement of sensors on the CCD device. Only one red, +green or blue value is given for each pixel. Missing components must +be interpolated from neighbouring pixels. From left to right the first +row consists of a red and green value, the second row of a green and +blue value. This scheme repeats to the right and down for every two +columns and rows.</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="5" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>R<subscript>00</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>01</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>02</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>03</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 4:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>12</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>13</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>R<subscript>20</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>21</subscript></entry> + <entry>R<subscript>22</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>23</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 12:</entry> + <entry>G<subscript>30</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>31</subscript></entry> + <entry>G<subscript>32</subscript></entry> + <entry>B<subscript>33</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> + </refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d065043 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10 ('Y10 ')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Grey-scale image</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is a grey-scale image with a depth of 10 bits per pixel. Pixels +are stored in 16-bit words with unused high bits padded with 0. The least +significant byte is stored at lower memory addresses (little-endian).</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="9" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 16:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 24:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33high</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml index c4ad0a8..cfffc88 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ leftmost pixel of the second row from the top, and so on. The last row has just as many pad bytes after it as the other rows.</para> <para>In V4L2 each format has an identifier which looks like -<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <link -linkend="videodev">videodev.h</link> header file. These identifiers +<constant>PIX_FMT_XXX</constant>, defined in the <filename>videodev2.h</filename> +header file. These identifiers represent <link linkend="v4l2-fourcc">four character codes</link> which are also listed below, however they are not the same as those used in the Windows world.</para> @@ -566,7 +566,9 @@ access the palette, this must be done with ioctls of the Linux framebuffer API.< &sub-sbggr8; &sub-sgbrg8; &sub-sgrbg8; + &sub-srggb8; &sub-sbggr16; + &sub-srggb10; </section> <section id="yuv-formats"> @@ -589,6 +591,7 @@ information.</para> &sub-packed-yuv; &sub-grey; + &sub-y10; &sub-y16; &sub-yuyv; &sub-uyvy; @@ -685,6 +688,11 @@ http://www.ivtvdriver.org/</ulink></para><para>The format is documented in the kernel sources in the file <filename>Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/README.hm12</filename> </para></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CPIA1"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_CPIA1</constant></entry> + <entry>'CPIA'</entry> + <entry>YUV format used by the gspca cpia1 driver.</entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SPCA501"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SPCA501</constant></entry> <entry>'S501'</entry> @@ -705,11 +713,6 @@ kernel sources in the file <filename>Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/README.hm <entry>'S561'</entry> <entry>Compressed GBRG Bayer format used by the gspca driver.</entry> </row> - <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10"> - <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</constant></entry> - <entry>'DA10'</entry> - <entry>10 bit raw Bayer, expanded to 16 bits.</entry> - </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10DPCM8"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10DPCM8</constant></entry> <entry>'DB10'</entry> @@ -770,6 +773,11 @@ kernel sources in the file <filename>Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/README.hm <entry>'S920'</entry> <entry>YUV 4:2:0 format of the gspca sn9c20x driver.</entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C2028"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C2028</constant></entry> + <entry>'SONX'</entry> + <entry>Compressed GBRG bayer format of the gspca sn9c2028 driver.</entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-STV0680"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_STV0680</constant></entry> <entry>'S680'</entry> @@ -787,6 +795,20 @@ http://www.thedirks.org/winnov/</ulink></para></entry> <entry>'TM60'</entry> <entry><para>Used by Trident tm6000</para></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CIT-YYVYUY"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_CIT_YYVYUY</constant></entry> + <entry>'CITV'</entry> + <entry><para>Used by xirlink CIT, found at IBM webcams.</para> + <para>Uses one line of Y then 1 line of VYUY</para> + </entry> + </row> + <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-KONICA420"> + <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_KONICA420</constant></entry> + <entry>'KONI'</entry> + <entry><para>Used by Konica webcams.</para> + <para>YUV420 planar in blocks of 256 pixels.</para> + </entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-YYUV"> <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_YYUV</constant></entry> <entry>'YYUV'</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml index 7c3c098..839e93e 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml @@ -99,6 +99,7 @@ Remote Controller chapter.</contrib> <year>2007</year> <year>2008</year> <year>2009</year> + <year>2010</year> <holder>Bill Dirks, Michael H. Schimek, Hans Verkuil, Martin Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> </copyright> @@ -110,10 +111,17 @@ Rubli, Andy Walls, Muralidharan Karicheri, Mauro Carvalho Chehab</holder> <!-- Put document revisions here, newest first. --> <!-- API revisions (changes and additions of defines, enums, structs, ioctls) must be noted in more detail in the history chapter -(compat.sgml), along with the possible impact on existing drivers and +(compat.xml), along with the possible impact on existing drivers and applications. --> <revision> + <revnumber>2.6.37</revnumber> + <date>2010-08-06</date> + <authorinitials>hv</authorinitials> + <revremark>Removed obsolete vtx (videotext) API.</revremark> + </revision> + + <revision> <revnumber>2.6.33</revnumber> <date>2009-12-03</date> <authorinitials>mk</authorinitials> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml index 865b06d..325b23b 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml @@ -154,23 +154,13 @@ enum <link linkend="v4l2-buf-type">v4l2_buf_type</link> { V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VBI_OUTPUT = 5, V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SLICED_VBI_CAPTURE = 6, V4L2_BUF_TYPE_SLICED_VBI_OUTPUT = 7, -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 /* Experimental */ V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY = 8, #endif V4L2_BUF_TYPE_PRIVATE = 0x80, }; -enum <link linkend="v4l2-ctrl-type">v4l2_ctrl_type</link> { - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER = 1, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BOOLEAN = 2, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU = 3, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BUTTON = 4, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER64 = 5, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_CTRL_CLASS = 6, - V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_STRING = 7, -}; - enum <link linkend="v4l2-tuner-type">v4l2_tuner_type</link> { V4L2_TUNER_RADIO = 1, V4L2_TUNER_ANALOG_TV = 2, @@ -288,6 +278,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB565">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB565</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', 'P') /* 16 RGB-5-6-5 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB555X">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB555X</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', 'Q') /* 16 RGB-5-5-5 BE */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB565X">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB565X</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', 'R') /* 16 RGB-5-6-5 BE */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR666">V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR666</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', 'R', 'H') /* 18 BGR-6-6-6 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR24">V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR24</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', 'R', '3') /* 24 BGR-8-8-8 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-RGB24">V4L2_PIX_FMT_RGB24</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'B', '3') /* 24 RGB-8-8-8 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-BGR32">V4L2_PIX_FMT_BGR32</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', 'R', '4') /* 32 BGR-8-8-8-8 */ @@ -295,6 +286,9 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { /* Grey formats */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-GREY">V4L2_PIX_FMT_GREY</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'R', 'E', 'Y') /* 8 Greyscale */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y4">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y4</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '0', '4', ' ') /* 4 Greyscale */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y6">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y6</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '0', '6', ' ') /* 6 Greyscale */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y10</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '1', '0', ' ') /* 10 Greyscale */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y16">V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y16</link> v4l2_fourcc('Y', '1', '6', ' ') /* 16 Greyscale */ /* Palette formats */ @@ -330,7 +324,11 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR8</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'A', '8', '1') /* 8 BGBG.. GRGR.. */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG8</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'B', 'R', 'G') /* 8 GBGB.. RGRG.. */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG8</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'R', 'B', 'G') /* 8 GRGR.. BGBG.. */ -#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'A', '1', '0') /* 10bit raw bayer */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB8</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', 'G', 'B') /* 8 RGRG.. GBGB.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SBGGR10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SBGGR10</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'G', '1', '0') /* 10 BGBG.. GRGR.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGBRG10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGBRG10</link> v4l2_fourcc('G', 'B', '1', '0') /* 10 GBGB.. RGRG.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'A', '1', '0') /* 10 GRGR.. BGBG.. */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SRGGB10">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SRGGB10</link> v4l2_fourcc('R', 'G', '1', '0') /* 10 RGRG.. GBGB.. */ /* 10bit raw bayer DPCM compressed to 8 bits */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SGRBG10DPCM8">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SGRBG10DPCM8</link> v4l2_fourcc('B', 'D', '1', '0') /* @@ -346,6 +344,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-MPEG">V4L2_PIX_FMT_MPEG</link> v4l2_fourcc('M', 'P', 'E', 'G') /* MPEG-1/2/4 */ /* Vendor-specific formats */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CPIA1">V4L2_PIX_FMT_CPIA1</link> v4l2_fourcc('C', 'P', 'I', 'A') /* cpia1 YUV */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-WNVA">V4L2_PIX_FMT_WNVA</link> v4l2_fourcc('W', 'N', 'V', 'A') /* Winnov hw compress */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C10X">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C10X</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '9', '1', '0') /* SN9C10x compression */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C20X-I420">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C20X_I420</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '9', '2', '0') /* SN9C20x YUV 4:2:0 */ @@ -358,12 +357,15 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-pix-format">v4l2_pix_format</link> { #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SPCA561">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SPCA561</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '5', '6', '1') /* compressed GBRG bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-PAC207">V4L2_PIX_FMT_PAC207</link> v4l2_fourcc('P', '2', '0', '7') /* compressed BGGR bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-MR97310A">V4L2_PIX_FMT_MR97310A</link> v4l2_fourcc('M', '3', '1', '0') /* compressed BGGR bayer */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SN9C2028">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SN9C2028</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', 'O', 'N', 'X') /* compressed GBRG bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-SQ905C">V4L2_PIX_FMT_SQ905C</link> v4l2_fourcc('9', '0', '5', 'C') /* compressed RGGB bayer */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-PJPG">V4L2_PIX_FMT_PJPG</link> v4l2_fourcc('P', 'J', 'P', 'G') /* Pixart 73xx JPEG */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-OV511">V4L2_PIX_FMT_OV511</link> v4l2_fourcc('O', '5', '1', '1') /* ov511 JPEG */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-OV518">V4L2_PIX_FMT_OV518</link> v4l2_fourcc('O', '5', '1', '8') /* ov518 JPEG */ -#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-TM6000">V4L2_PIX_FMT_TM6000</link> v4l2_fourcc('T', 'M', '6', '0') /* tm5600/tm60x0 */ #define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-STV0680">V4L2_PIX_FMT_STV0680</link> v4l2_fourcc('S', '6', '8', '0') /* stv0680 bayer */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-TM6000">V4L2_PIX_FMT_TM6000</link> v4l2_fourcc('T', 'M', '6', '0') /* tm5600/tm60x0 */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-CIT-YYVYUY">V4L2_PIX_FMT_CIT_YYVYUY</link> v4l2_fourcc('C', 'I', 'T', 'V') /* one line of Y then 1 line of VYUY */ +#define <link linkend="V4L2-PIX-FMT-KONICA420">V4L2_PIX_FMT_KONICA420</link> v4l2_fourcc('K', 'O', 'N', 'I') /* YUV420 planar in blocks of 256 pixels */ /* * F O R M A T E N U M E R A T I O N @@ -380,7 +382,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-fmtdesc">v4l2_fmtdesc</link> { #define V4L2_FMT_FLAG_COMPRESSED 0x0001 #define V4L2_FMT_FLAG_EMULATED 0x0002 -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 /* Experimental Frame Size and frame rate enumeration */ /* * F R A M E S I Z E E N U M E R A T I O N @@ -544,6 +546,8 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-buffer">v4l2_buffer</link> { #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_KEYFRAME 0x0008 /* Image is a keyframe (I-frame) */ #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_PFRAME 0x0010 /* Image is a P-frame */ #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_BFRAME 0x0020 /* Image is a B-frame */ +/* Buffer is ready, but the data contained within is corrupted. */ +#define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR 0x0040 #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_TIMECODE 0x0100 /* timecode field is valid */ #define V4L2_BUF_FLAG_INPUT 0x0200 /* input field is valid */ @@ -934,6 +938,16 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link> { #define V4L2_CTRL_ID2CLASS(id) ((id) & 0x0fff0000UL) #define V4L2_CTRL_DRIVER_PRIV(id) (((id) & 0xffff) >= 0x1000) +enum <link linkend="v4l2-ctrl-type">v4l2_ctrl_type</link> { + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER = 1, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BOOLEAN = 2, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU = 3, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_BUTTON = 4, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER64 = 5, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_CTRL_CLASS = 6, + V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_STRING = 7, +}; + /* Used in the VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL ioctl for querying controls */ struct <link linkend="v4l2-queryctrl">v4l2_queryctrl</link> { __u32 id; @@ -1018,21 +1032,27 @@ enum <link linkend="v4l2-colorfx">v4l2_colorfx</link> { V4L2_COLORFX_NONE = 0, V4L2_COLORFX_BW = 1, V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA = 2, - V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE = 3, - V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS = 4, - V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH = 5, - V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE = 6, + V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE = 3, + V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS = 4, + V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH = 5, + V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE = 6, V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN = 7, V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN = 8, - V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID = 9. + V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID = 9, }; #define V4L2_CID_AUTOBRIGHTNESS (V4L2_CID_BASE+32) #define V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER (V4L2_CID_BASE+33) #define V4L2_CID_ROTATE (V4L2_CID_BASE+34) #define V4L2_CID_BG_COLOR (V4L2_CID_BASE+35) + +#define V4L2_CID_CHROMA_GAIN (V4L2_CID_BASE+36) + +#define V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_1 (V4L2_CID_BASE+37) +#define V4L2_CID_ILLUMINATORS_2 (V4L2_CID_BASE+38) + /* last CID + 1 */ -#define V4L2_CID_LASTP1 (V4L2_CID_BASE+36) +#define V4L2_CID_LASTP1 (V4L2_CID_BASE+39) /* MPEG-class control IDs defined by V4L2 */ #define V4L2_CID_MPEG_BASE (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_MPEG | 0x900) @@ -1349,6 +1369,8 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-modulator">v4l2_modulator</link> { #define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_SAP 0x0020 #define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_LANG1 0x0040 #define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS 0x0080 +#define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS_BLOCK_IO 0x0100 +#define V4L2_TUNER_CAP_RDS_CONTROLS 0x0200 /* Flags for the 'rxsubchans' field */ #define V4L2_TUNER_SUB_MONO 0x0001 @@ -1378,7 +1400,8 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-hw-freq-seek">v4l2_hw_freq_seek</link> { enum <link linkend="v4l2-tuner-type">v4l2_tuner_type</link> type; __u32 seek_upward; __u32 wrap_around; - __u32 reserved[8]; + __u32 spacing; + __u32 reserved[7]; }; /* @@ -1433,7 +1456,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-audioout">v4l2_audioout</link> { * * NOTE: EXPERIMENTAL API */ -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 #define V4L2_ENC_IDX_FRAME_I (0) #define V4L2_ENC_IDX_FRAME_P (1) #define V4L2_ENC_IDX_FRAME_B (2) @@ -1626,6 +1649,38 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-streamparm">v4l2_streamparm</link> { }; /* + * E V E N T S + */ + +#define V4L2_EVENT_ALL 0 +#define V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC 1 +#define V4L2_EVENT_EOS 2 +#define V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START 0x08000000 + +/* Payload for V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC */ +struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-vsync">v4l2_event_vsync</link> { + /* Can be V4L2_FIELD_ANY, _NONE, _TOP or _BOTTOM */ + __u8 field; +} __attribute__ ((packed)); + +struct <link linkend="v4l2-event">v4l2_event</link> { + __u32 type; + union { + struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-vsync">v4l2_event_vsync</link> vsync; + __u8 data[64]; + } u; + __u32 pending; + __u32 sequence; + struct timespec timestamp; + __u32 reserved[9]; +}; + +struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-subscription">v4l2_event_subscription</link> { + __u32 type; + __u32 reserved[7]; +}; + +/* * A D V A N C E D D E B U G G I N G * * NOTE: EXPERIMENTAL API, NEVER RELY ON THIS IN APPLICATIONS! @@ -1720,7 +1775,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-dbg-chip-ident">v4l2_dbg_chip_ident</link> { #define VIDIOC_G_EXT_CTRLS _IOWR('V', 71, struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link>) #define VIDIOC_S_EXT_CTRLS _IOWR('V', 72, struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link>) #define VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS _IOWR('V', 73, struct <link linkend="v4l2-ext-controls">v4l2_ext_controls</link>) -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 #define VIDIOC_ENUM_FRAMESIZES _IOWR('V', 74, struct <link linkend="v4l2-frmsizeenum">v4l2_frmsizeenum</link>) #define VIDIOC_ENUM_FRAMEINTERVALS _IOWR('V', 75, struct <link linkend="v4l2-frmivalenum">v4l2_frmivalenum</link>) #define VIDIOC_G_ENC_INDEX _IOR('V', 76, struct <link linkend="v4l2-enc-idx">v4l2_enc_idx</link>) @@ -1728,7 +1783,7 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-dbg-chip-ident">v4l2_dbg_chip_ident</link> { #define VIDIOC_TRY_ENCODER_CMD _IOWR('V', 78, struct <link linkend="v4l2-encoder-cmd">v4l2_encoder_cmd</link>) #endif -#if 1 /*KEEP*/ +#if 1 /* Experimental, meant for debugging, testing and internal use. Only implemented if CONFIG_VIDEO_ADV_DEBUG is defined. You must be root to use these ioctls. Never use these in applications! */ @@ -1747,6 +1802,9 @@ struct <link linkend="v4l2-dbg-chip-ident">v4l2_dbg_chip_ident</link> { #define VIDIOC_QUERY_DV_PRESET _IOR('V', 86, struct <link linkend="v4l2-dv-preset">v4l2_dv_preset</link>) #define VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS _IOWR('V', 87, struct <link linkend="v4l2-dv-timings">v4l2_dv_timings</link>) #define VIDIOC_G_DV_TIMINGS _IOWR('V', 88, struct <link linkend="v4l2-dv-timings">v4l2_dv_timings</link>) +#define VIDIOC_DQEVENT _IOR('V', 89, struct <link linkend="v4l2-event">v4l2_event</link>) +#define VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT _IOW('V', 90, struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-subscription">v4l2_event_subscription</link>) +#define VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT _IOW('V', 91, struct <link linkend="v4l2-event-subscription">v4l2_event_subscription</link>) /* Reminder: when adding new ioctls please add support for them to drivers/media/video/v4l2-compat-ioctl32.c as well! */ diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml index 3c6784e..d733721 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-preset.xml @@ -16,8 +16,7 @@ <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> - <paramdef>&v4l2-dv-preset; -*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_preset *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> </funcprototype> </funcsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml index ecc1957..d5ec6ab 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-dv-timings.xml @@ -16,8 +16,7 @@ <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> - <paramdef>&v4l2-dv-timings; -*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_timings *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> </funcprototype> </funcsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml index 402229e..d272f7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-query-dv-preset.xml @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ input</refpurpose> <funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef> <paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef> - <paramdef>&v4l2-dv-preset; *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> + <paramdef>struct v4l2_dv_preset *<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef> </funcprototype> </funcsynopsis> </refsynopsisdiv> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml index 6ab7e25..d499da9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-querycap.xml @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ data.</entry> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_CAPTURE</constant></entry> <entry>0x00000100</entry> - <entry>The device supports the <link linkend="rds">RDS</link> interface.</entry> + <entry>The device supports the <link linkend="rds">RDS</link> capture interface.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant></entry> @@ -206,6 +206,11 @@ driver capabilities.</para></footnote></entry> hardware frequency seeking.</entry> </row> <row> + <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_RDS_OUTPUT</constant></entry> + <entry>0x00000800</entry> + <entry>The device supports the <link linkend="rds">RDS</link> output interface.</entry> + </row> + <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CAP_TUNER</constant></entry> <entry>0x00010000</entry> <entry>The device has some sort of tuner to diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml index 8e0e055..0d5e828 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml @@ -103,8 +103,12 @@ structure. The driver fills the rest of the structure or returns an <structfield>index</structfield> is invalid. Menu items are enumerated by calling <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYMENU</constant> with successive <structfield>index</structfield> values from &v4l2-queryctrl; -<structfield>minimum</structfield> (0) to -<structfield>maximum</structfield>, inclusive.</para> +<structfield>minimum</structfield> to +<structfield>maximum</structfield>, inclusive. Note that it is possible +for <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYMENU</constant> to return an &EINVAL; for some +indices between <structfield>minimum</structfield> and <structfield>maximum</structfield>. +In that case that particular menu item is not supported by this driver. Also note that +the <structfield>minimum</structfield> value is not necessarily 0.</para> <para>See also the examples in <xref linkend="control" />.</para> @@ -139,7 +143,7 @@ string. This information is intended for the user.</entry> <entry><structfield>minimum</structfield></entry> <entry>Minimum value, inclusive. This field gives a lower bound for <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_INTEGER</constant> controls and the -lowest valid index (always 0) for <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU</constant> controls. +lowest valid index for <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU</constant> controls. For <constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_STRING</constant> controls the minimum value gives the minimum length of the string. This length <emphasis>does not include the terminating zero</emphasis>. It may not be valid for any other type of control, including @@ -279,7 +283,7 @@ values which are actually different on the hardware.</entry> </row> <row> <entry><constant>V4L2_CTRL_TYPE_MENU</constant></entry> - <entry>0</entry> + <entry>≥ 0</entry> <entry>1</entry> <entry>N-1</entry> <entry>The control has a menu of N choices. The names of @@ -405,8 +409,10 @@ writing a value will cause the device to carry out a given action <term><errorcode>EINVAL</errorcode></term> <listitem> <para>The &v4l2-queryctrl; <structfield>id</structfield> -is invalid. The &v4l2-querymenu; <structfield>id</structfield> or -<structfield>index</structfield> is invalid.</para> +is invalid. The &v4l2-querymenu; <structfield>id</structfield> is +invalid or <structfield>index</structfield> is out of range (less than +<structfield>minimum</structfield> or greater than <structfield>maximum</structfield>) +or this particular menu item is not supported by the driver.</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml index 14b3ec7..c30dcc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml @@ -51,7 +51,8 @@ <para>Start a hardware frequency seek from the current frequency. To do this applications initialize the <structfield>tuner</structfield>, -<structfield>type</structfield>, <structfield>seek_upward</structfield> and +<structfield>type</structfield>, <structfield>seek_upward</structfield>, +<structfield>spacing</structfield> and <structfield>wrap_around</structfield> fields, and zero out the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array of a &v4l2-hw-freq-seek; and call the <constant>VIDIOC_S_HW_FREQ_SEEK</constant> ioctl with a pointer @@ -89,7 +90,12 @@ field and the &v4l2-tuner; <structfield>index</structfield> field.</entry> </row> <row> <entry>__u32</entry> - <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[8]</entry> + <entry><structfield>spacing</structfield></entry> + <entry>If non-zero, defines the hardware seek resolution in Hz. The driver selects the nearest value that is supported by the device. If spacing is zero a reasonable default value is used.</entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>__u32</entry> + <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[7]</entry> <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications must set the array to zero.</entry> </row> diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile index 6fc7ea1..9b4bc5c 100644 --- a/Documentation/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/Makefile @@ -1,3 +1,3 @@ obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \ filesystems/ filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \ - pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/ + pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ vm/ watchdog/src/ diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt index 790d1a8..0c134f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/checklist.txt @@ -218,13 +218,22 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! include: a. Keeping a count of the number of data-structure elements - used by the RCU-protected data structure, including those - waiting for a grace period to elapse. Enforce a limit - on this number, stalling updates as needed to allow - previously deferred frees to complete. - - Alternatively, limit only the number awaiting deferred - free rather than the total number of elements. + used by the RCU-protected data structure, including + those waiting for a grace period to elapse. Enforce a + limit on this number, stalling updates as needed to allow + previously deferred frees to complete. Alternatively, + limit only the number awaiting deferred free rather than + the total number of elements. + + One way to stall the updates is to acquire the update-side + mutex. (Don't try this with a spinlock -- other CPUs + spinning on the lock could prevent the grace period + from ever ending.) Another way to stall the updates + is for the updates to use a wrapper function around + the memory allocator, so that this wrapper function + simulates OOM when there is too much memory awaiting an + RCU grace period. There are of course many other + variations on this theme. b. Limiting update rate. For example, if updates occur only once per hour, then no explicit rate limiting is required, @@ -365,3 +374,26 @@ over a rather long period of time, but improvements are always welcome! and the compiler to freely reorder code into and out of RCU read-side critical sections. It is the responsibility of the RCU update-side primitives to deal with this. + +17. Use CONFIG_PROVE_RCU, CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD, and + the __rcu sparse checks to validate your RCU code. These + can help find problems as follows: + + CONFIG_PROVE_RCU: check that accesses to RCU-protected data + structures are carried out under the proper RCU + read-side critical section, while holding the right + combination of locks, or whatever other conditions + are appropriate. + + CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD: check that you don't pass the + same object to call_rcu() (or friends) before an RCU + grace period has elapsed since the last time that you + passed that same object to call_rcu() (or friends). + + __rcu sparse checks: tag the pointer to the RCU-protected data + structure with __rcu, and sparse will warn you if you + access that pointer without the services of one of the + variants of rcu_dereference(). + + These debugging aids can help you find problems that are + otherwise extremely difficult to spot. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index 44c6dcc..862c08e 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -80,6 +80,24 @@ o A CPU looping with bottom halves disabled. This condition can o For !CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels, a CPU looping anywhere in the kernel without invoking schedule(). +o A CPU-bound real-time task in a CONFIG_PREEMPT kernel, which might + happen to preempt a low-priority task in the middle of an RCU + read-side critical section. This is especially damaging if + that low-priority task is not permitted to run on any other CPU, + in which case the next RCU grace period can never complete, which + will eventually cause the system to run out of memory and hang. + While the system is in the process of running itself out of + memory, you might see stall-warning messages. + +o A CPU-bound real-time task in a CONFIG_PREEMPT_RT kernel that + is running at a higher priority than the RCU softirq threads. + This will prevent RCU callbacks from ever being invoked, + and in a CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernel will further prevent + RCU grace periods from ever completing. Either way, the + system will eventually run out of memory and hang. In the + CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU case, you might see stall-warning + messages. + o A bug in the RCU implementation. o A hardware failure. This is quite unlikely, but has occurred diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index efd8cc9..6a8c73f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -1,18 +1,22 @@ CONFIG_RCU_TRACE debugfs Files and Formats -The rcutree implementation of RCU provides debugfs trace output that -summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for debugging -RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU. -The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats. +The rcutree and rcutiny implementations of RCU provide debugfs trace +output that summarizes counters and state. This information is useful for +debugging RCU itself, and can sometimes also help to debug abuses of RCU. +The following sections describe the debugfs files and formats, first +for rcutree and next for rcutiny. -Hierarchical RCU debugfs Files and Formats +CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats -This implementation of RCU provides three debugfs files under the +These implementations of RCU provides five debugfs files under the top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct -rcu_data), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), and -rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy). +rcu_data), rcu/rcudata.csv (which is a .csv spreadsheet version of +rcu/rcudata), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), +rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy), and +rcu/rcu_pending (which displays counts of the reasons that the +rcu_pending() function decided that there was core RCU work to do). The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: @@ -125,6 +129,18 @@ o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will be deferred. +o "ci" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been invoked for + this CPU. Note that ci+ql is the number of callbacks that have + been registered in absence of CPU-hotplug activity. + +o "co" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been orphaned due to + this CPU going offline. These orphaned callbacks have been moved + to an arbitrarily chosen online CPU. + +o "ca" is the number of RCU callbacks that have been adopted due to + other CPUs going offline. Note that ci+co-ca+ql is the number of + RCU callbacks registered on this CPU. + There is also an rcu/rcudata.csv file with the same information in comma-separated-variable spreadsheet format. @@ -157,12 +173,12 @@ o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines: -c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 oqlen=0 +c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 1/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 3/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 3/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 2/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 rcu_bh: -c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 oqlen=0 +c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 0/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 0/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 0/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 0/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 @@ -180,7 +196,7 @@ o "s" is the "signaled" state that drives force_quiescent_state()'s o "jfq" is the number of jiffies remaining for this grace period before force_quiescent_state() is invoked to help push things - along. Note that CPUs in dyntick-idle mode thoughout the grace + along. Note that CPUs in dyntick-idle mode throughout the grace period will not report on their own, but rather must be check by some other CPU via force_quiescent_state(). @@ -201,11 +217,6 @@ o "fqlh" is the number of calls to force_quiescent_state() that exited immediately (without even being counted in nfqs above) due to contention on ->fqslock. -o "oqlen" is the number of callbacks on the "orphan" callback - list. RCU callbacks are placed on this list by CPUs going - offline, and are "adopted" either by the CPU helping the outgoing - CPU or by the next rcu_barrier*() call, whichever comes first. - o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct rcu_node. Each line represents one level of the hierarchy, from root to leaves. It is best to think of the rcu_data structures @@ -315,3 +326,115 @@ o "nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing. Alert readers will note that the rcu "nn" number for a given CPU very closely matches the rcu_bh "np" number for that same CPU. This is due to short-circuit evaluation in rcu_pending(). + + +CONFIG_TINY_RCU and CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats + +These implementations of RCU provides a single debugfs file under the +top-level directory RCU, namely rcu/rcudata, which displays fields in +rcu_bh_ctrlblk, rcu_sched_ctrlblk and, for CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU, +rcu_preempt_ctrlblk. + +The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" is as follows: + +rcu_preempt: qlen=24 gp=1097669 g197/p197/c197 tasks=... + ttb=. btg=no ntb=184 neb=0 nnb=183 j=01f7 bt=0274 + normal balk: nt=1097669 gt=0 bt=371 b=0 ny=25073378 nos=0 + exp balk: bt=0 nos=0 +rcu_sched: qlen: 0 +rcu_bh: qlen: 0 + +This is split into rcu_preempt, rcu_sched, and rcu_bh sections, with the +rcu_preempt section appearing only in CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU builds. +The last three lines of the rcu_preempt section appear only in +CONFIG_RCU_BOOST kernel builds. The fields are as follows: + +o "qlen" is the number of RCU callbacks currently waiting either + for an RCU grace period or waiting to be invoked. This is the + only field present for rcu_sched and rcu_bh, due to the + short-circuiting of grace period in those two cases. + +o "gp" is the number of grace periods that have completed. + +o "g197/p197/c197" displays the grace-period state, with the + "g" number being the number of grace periods that have started + (mod 256), the "p" number being the number of grace periods + that the CPU has responded to (also mod 256), and the "c" + number being the number of grace periods that have completed + (once again mode 256). + + Why have both "gp" and "g"? Because the data flowing into + "gp" is only present in a CONFIG_RCU_TRACE kernel. + +o "tasks" is a set of bits. The first bit is "T" if there are + currently tasks that have recently blocked within an RCU + read-side critical section, the second bit is "N" if any of the + aforementioned tasks are blocking the current RCU grace period, + and the third bit is "E" if any of the aforementioned tasks are + blocking the current expedited grace period. Each bit is "." + if the corresponding condition does not hold. + +o "ttb" is a single bit. It is "B" if any of the blocked tasks + need to be priority boosted and "." otherwise. + +o "btg" indicates whether boosting has been carried out during + the current grace period, with "exp" indicating that boosting + is in progress for an expedited grace period, "no" indicating + that boosting has not yet started for a normal grace period, + "begun" indicating that boosting has bebug for a normal grace + period, and "done" indicating that boosting has completed for + a normal grace period. + +o "ntb" is the total number of tasks subjected to RCU priority boosting + periods since boot. + +o "neb" is the number of expedited grace periods that have had + to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. + +o "nnb" is the number of normal grace periods that have had + to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. + +o "j" is the low-order 12 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal. + +o "bt" is the low-order 12 bits of the value that the jiffies counter + will have at the next time that boosting is scheduled to begin. + +o In the line beginning with "normal balk", the fields are as follows: + + o "nt" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost. + Note that the system will balk from boosting even if the + grace period is overdue when the currently running task + is looping within an RCU read-side critical section. + There is no point in boosting in this case, because + boosting a running task won't make it run any faster. + + o "gt" is the number of times that the system balked + from boosting because, although there were blocked tasks, + none of them were preventing the current grace period + from completing. + + o "bt" is the number of times that the system balked + from boosting because boosting was already in progress. + + o "b" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because boosting had already completed for + the grace period in question. + + o "ny" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because it was not yet time to start boosting + the grace period in question. + + o "nos" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified") + reasons. This can actually happen due to races involving + increments of the jiffies counter. + +o In the line beginning with "exp balk", the fields are as follows: + + o "bt" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting because there were no blocked tasks to boost. + + o "nos" is the number of times that the system balked from + boosting for inexplicable ("not otherwise specified") + reasons. diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c index 6e25c26..e9c7778 100644 --- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c +++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c @@ -21,6 +21,7 @@ #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/stat.h> #include <sys/socket.h> +#include <sys/wait.h> #include <signal.h> #include <linux/genetlink.h> @@ -266,11 +267,13 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) int containerset = 0; char containerpath[1024]; int cfd = 0; + int forking = 0; + sigset_t sigset; struct msgtemplate msg; - while (1) { - c = getopt(argc, argv, "qdiw:r:m:t:p:vlC:"); + while (!forking) { + c = getopt(argc, argv, "qdiw:r:m:t:p:vlC:c:"); if (c < 0) break; @@ -319,6 +322,28 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) err(1, "Invalid pid\n"); cmd_type = TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_PID; break; + case 'c': + + /* Block SIGCHLD for sigwait() later */ + if (sigemptyset(&sigset) == -1) + err(1, "Failed to empty sigset"); + if (sigaddset(&sigset, SIGCHLD)) + err(1, "Failed to set sigchld in sigset"); + sigprocmask(SIG_BLOCK, &sigset, NULL); + + /* fork/exec a child */ + tid = fork(); + if (tid < 0) + err(1, "Fork failed\n"); + if (tid == 0) + if (execvp(argv[optind - 1], + &argv[optind - 1]) < 0) + exit(-1); + + /* Set the command type and avoid further processing */ + cmd_type = TASKSTATS_CMD_ATTR_PID; + forking = 1; + break; case 'v': printf("debug on\n"); dbg = 1; @@ -370,6 +395,15 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) goto err; } + /* + * If we forked a child, wait for it to exit. Cannot use waitpid() + * as all the delicious data would be reaped as part of the wait + */ + if (tid && forking) { + int sig_received; + sigwait(&sigset, &sig_received); + } + if (tid) { rc = send_cmd(nl_sd, id, mypid, TASKSTATS_CMD_GET, cmd_type, &tid, sizeof(__u32)); @@ -482,6 +516,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) default: fprintf(stderr, "Unknown nla_type %d\n", na->nla_type); + case TASKSTATS_TYPE_NULL: break; } na = (struct nlattr *) (GENLMSG_DATA(&msg) + len); diff --git a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX index 7f5fc3b..91c24a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/arm/00-INDEX @@ -6,6 +6,8 @@ Interrupts - ARM Interrupt subsystem documentation IXP2000 - Release Notes for Linux on Intel's IXP2000 Network Processor +msm + - MSM specific documentation Netwinder - Netwinder specific documentation Porting @@ -32,3 +34,5 @@ memory.txt - description of the virtual memory layout nwfpe/ - NWFPE floating point emulator documentation +swp_emulation + - SWP/SWPB emulation handler/logging description diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS index 0af0e9e..888ae7b 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS +++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS @@ -255,9 +255,10 @@ framebuffer parameters. Kernel boot arguments --------------------- -vram=<size> - - Amount of total VRAM to preallocate. For example, "10M". omapfb - allocates memory for framebuffers from VRAM. +vram=<size>[,<physaddr>] + - Amount of total VRAM to preallocate and optionally a physical start + memory address. For example, "10M". omapfb allocates memory for + framebuffers from VRAM. omapfb.mode=<display>:<mode>[,...] - Default video mode for specified displays. For example, diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm index 5389440..9012bb0 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm +++ b/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm @@ -127,3 +127,28 @@ implementation needs: 10. (*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f) 11. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void) + +Customizing OPP for platform +============================ +Defining CONFIG_PM should enable OPP layer for the silicon +and the registration of OPP table should take place automatically. +However, in special cases, the default OPP table may need to be +tweaked, for e.g.: + * enable default OPPs which are disabled by default, but which + could be enabled on a platform + * Disable an unsupported OPP on the platform + * Define and add a custom opp table entry +in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows: +arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c + #include "pm.h" + .... + static void __init omap_xyz_init_irq(void) + { + .... + /* Initialize the default table */ + omapx_opp_init(); + /* Do customization to the defaults */ + .... + } +NOTE: omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required +based on the omap family. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird index fb23b77..ab91936 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird +++ b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ -Freebird-1.1 is produced by Legned(C) ,Inc. +Freebird-1.1 is produced by Legend(C), Inc. http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.legend.com.cn -and software/linux mainatined by Coventive(C),Inc. +and software/linux maintained by Coventive(C), Inc. (http://www.coventive.com) Based on the Nicolas's strongarm kernel tree. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/msm/gpiomux.txt b/Documentation/arm/msm/gpiomux.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..67a8162 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/msm/gpiomux.txt @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +This document provides an overview of the msm_gpiomux interface, which +is used to provide gpio pin multiplexing and configuration on mach-msm +targets. + +History +======= + +The first-generation API for gpio configuration & multiplexing on msm +is the function gpio_tlmm_config(). This function has a few notable +shortcomings, which led to its deprecation and replacement by gpiomux: + +The 'disable' parameter: Setting the second parameter to +gpio_tlmm_config to GPIO_CFG_DISABLE tells the peripheral +processor in charge of the subsystem to perform a look-up into a +low-power table and apply the low-power/sleep setting for the pin. +As the msm family evolved this became problematic. Not all pins +have sleep settings, not all peripheral processors will accept requests +to apply said sleep settings, and not all msm targets have their gpio +subsystems managed by a peripheral processor. In order to get consistent +behavior on all targets, drivers are forced to ignore this parameter, +rendering it useless. + +The 'direction' flag: for all mux-settings other than raw-gpio (0), +the output-enable bit of a gpio is hard-wired to a known +input (usually VDD or ground). For those settings, the direction flag +is meaningless at best, and deceptive at worst. In addition, using the +direction flag to change output-enable (OE) directly can cause trouble in +gpiolib, which has no visibility into gpio direction changes made +in this way. Direction control in gpio mode should be made through gpiolib. + +Key Features of gpiomux +======================= + +- A consistent interface across all generations of msm. Drivers can expect +the same results on every target. +- gpiomux plays nicely with gpiolib. Functions that should belong to gpiolib +are left to gpiolib and not duplicated here. gpiomux is written with the +intent that gpio_chips will call gpiomux reference-counting methods +from their request() and free() hooks, providing full integration. +- Tabular configuration. Instead of having to call gpio_tlmm_config +hundreds of times, gpio configuration is placed in a single table. +- Per-gpio sleep. Each gpio is individually reference counted, allowing only +those lines which are in use to be put in high-power states. +- 0 means 'do nothing': all flags are designed so that the default memset-zero +equates to a sensible default of 'no configuration', preventing users +from having to provide hundreds of 'no-op' configs for unused or +unwanted lines. + +Usage +===== + +To use gpiomux, provide configuration information for relevant gpio lines +in the msm_gpiomux_configs table. Since a 0 equates to "unconfigured", +only those lines to be managed by gpiomux need to be specified. Here +is a completely fictional example: + +struct msm_gpiomux_config msm_gpiomux_configs[GPIOMUX_NGPIOS] = { + [12] = { + .active = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_DRV_8MA | GPIOMUX_FUNC_1, + .suspended = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_PULL_DOWN, + }, + [34] = { + .suspended = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_PULL_DOWN, + }, +}; + +To indicate that a gpio is in use, call msm_gpiomux_get() to increase +its reference count. To decrease the reference count, call msm_gpiomux_put(). + +The effect of this configuration is as follows: + +When the system boots, gpios 12 and 34 will be initialized with their +'suspended' configurations. All other gpios, which were left unconfigured, +will not be touched. + +When msm_gpiomux_get() is called on gpio 12 to raise its reference count +above 0, its active configuration will be applied. Since no other gpio +line has a valid active configuration, msm_gpiomux_get() will have no +effect on any other line. + +When msm_gpiomux_put() is called on gpio 12 or 34 to drop their reference +count to 0, their suspended configurations will be applied. +Since no other gpio line has a valid suspended configuration, no other +gpio line will be effected by msm_gpiomux_put(). Since gpio 34 has no valid +active configuration, this is effectively a no-op for gpio 34 as well, +with one small caveat, see the section "About Output-Enable Settings". + +All of the GPIOMUX_VALID flags may seem like unnecessary overhead, but +they address some important issues. As unused entries (all those +except 12 and 34) are zero-filled, gpiomux needs a way to distinguish +the used fields from the unused. In addition, the all-zero pattern +is a valid configuration! Therefore, gpiomux defines an additional bit +which is used to indicate when a field is used. This has the pleasant +side-effect of allowing calls to msm_gpiomux_write to use '0' to indicate +that a value should not be changed: + + msm_gpiomux_write(0, GPIOMUX_VALID, 0); + +replaces the active configuration of gpio 0 with an all-zero configuration, +but leaves the suspended configuration as it was. + +Static Configurations +===================== + +To install a static configuration, which is applied at boot and does +not change after that, install a configuration with a suspended component +but no active component, as in the previous example: + + [34] = { + .suspended = GPIOMUX_VALID | GPIOMUX_PULL_DOWN, + }, + +The suspended setting is applied during boot, and the lack of any valid +active setting prevents any other setting from being applied at runtime. +If other subsystems attempting to access the line is a concern, one could +*really* anchor the configuration down by calling msm_gpiomux_get on the +line at initialization to move the line into active mode. With the line +held, it will never be re-suspended, and with no valid active configuration, +no new configurations will be applied. + +But then, if having other subsystems grabbing for the line is truly a concern, +it should be reserved with gpio_request instead, which carries an implicit +msm_gpiomux_get. + +gpiomux and gpiolib +=================== + +It is expected that msm gpio_chips will call msm_gpiomux_get() and +msm_gpiomux_put() from their request and free hooks, like this fictional +example: + +static int request(struct gpio_chip *chip, unsigned offset) +{ + return msm_gpiomux_get(chip->base + offset); +} + +static void free(struct gpio_chip *chip, unsigned offset) +{ + msm_gpiomux_put(chip->base + offset); +} + + ...somewhere in a gpio_chip declaration... + .request = request, + .free = free, + +This provides important functionality: +- It guarantees that a gpio line will have its 'active' config applied + when the line is requested, and will not be suspended while the line + remains requested; and +- It guarantees that gpio-direction settings from gpiolib behave sensibly. + See "About Output-Enable Settings." + +This mechanism allows for "auto-request" of gpiomux lines via gpiolib +when it is suitable. Drivers wishing more exact control are, of course, +free to also use msm_gpiomux_set and msm_gpiomux_get. + +About Output-Enable Settings +============================ + +Some msm targets do not have the ability to query the current gpio +configuration setting. This means that changes made to the output-enable +(OE) bit by gpiolib cannot be consistently detected and preserved by gpiomux. +Therefore, when gpiomux applies a configuration setting, any direction +settings which may have been applied by gpiolib are lost and the default +input settings are re-applied. + +For this reason, drivers should not assume that gpio direction settings +continue to hold if they free and then re-request a gpio. This seems like +common sense - after all, anybody could have obtained the line in the +meantime - but it needs saying. + +This also means that calls to msm_gpiomux_write will reset the OE bit, +which means that if the gpio line is held by a client of gpiolib and +msm_gpiomux_write is called, the direction setting has been lost and +gpiolib's internal state has been broken. +Release gpio lines before reconfiguring them. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation new file mode 100644 index 0000000..af903d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +Software emulation of deprecated SWP instruction (CONFIG_SWP_EMULATE) +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +ARMv6 architecture deprecates use of the SWP/SWPB instructions, and recommeds +moving to the load-locked/store-conditional instructions LDREX and STREX. + +ARMv7 multiprocessing extensions introduce the ability to disable these +instructions, triggering an undefined instruction exception when executed. +Trapped instructions are emulated using an LDREX/STREX or LDREXB/STREXB +sequence. If a memory access fault (an abort) occurs, a segmentation fault is +signalled to the triggering process. + +/proc/cpu/swp_emulation holds some statistics/information, including the PID of +the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example: +--- +Emulated SWP: 12 +Emulated SWPB: 0 +Aborted SWP{B}: 1 +Last process: 314 +--- + +NOTE: when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external +transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update +atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can +cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as +the STREX operation will always fail. + diff --git a/Documentation/block/00-INDEX b/Documentation/block/00-INDEX index a406286..d111e3b 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/block/00-INDEX @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ 00-INDEX - This file -barrier.txt - - I/O Barriers biodoc.txt - Notes on the Generic Block Layer Rewrite in Linux 2.5 capability.txt @@ -16,3 +14,5 @@ stat.txt - Block layer statistics in /sys/block/<dev>/stat switching-sched.txt - Switching I/O schedulers at runtime +writeback_cache_control.txt + - Control of volatile write back caches diff --git a/Documentation/block/barrier.txt b/Documentation/block/barrier.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 2c2f24f..0000000 --- a/Documentation/block/barrier.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,261 +0,0 @@ -I/O Barriers -============ -Tejun Heo <htejun@gmail.com>, July 22 2005 - -I/O barrier requests are used to guarantee ordering around the barrier -requests. Unless you're crazy enough to use disk drives for -implementing synchronization constructs (wow, sounds interesting...), -the ordering is meaningful only for write requests for things like -journal checkpoints. All requests queued before a barrier request -must be finished (made it to the physical medium) before the barrier -request is started, and all requests queued after the barrier request -must be started only after the barrier request is finished (again, -made it to the physical medium). - -In other words, I/O barrier requests have the following two properties. - -1. Request ordering - -Requests cannot pass the barrier request. Preceding requests are -processed before the barrier and following requests after. - -Depending on what features a drive supports, this can be done in one -of the following three ways. - -i. For devices which have queue depth greater than 1 (TCQ devices) and -support ordered tags, block layer can just issue the barrier as an -ordered request and the lower level driver, controller and drive -itself are responsible for making sure that the ordering constraint is -met. Most modern SCSI controllers/drives should support this. - -NOTE: SCSI ordered tag isn't currently used due to limitation in the - SCSI midlayer, see the following random notes section. - -ii. For devices which have queue depth greater than 1 but don't -support ordered tags, block layer ensures that the requests preceding -a barrier request finishes before issuing the barrier request. Also, -it defers requests following the barrier until the barrier request is -finished. Older SCSI controllers/drives and SATA drives fall in this -category. - -iii. Devices which have queue depth of 1. This is a degenerate case -of ii. Just keeping issue order suffices. Ancient SCSI -controllers/drives and IDE drives are in this category. - -2. Forced flushing to physical medium - -Again, if you're not gonna do synchronization with disk drives (dang, -it sounds even more appealing now!), the reason you use I/O barriers -is mainly to protect filesystem integrity when power failure or some -other events abruptly stop the drive from operating and possibly make -the drive lose data in its cache. So, I/O barriers need to guarantee -that requests actually get written to non-volatile medium in order. - -There are four cases, - -i. No write-back cache. Keeping requests ordered is enough. - -ii. Write-back cache but no flush operation. There's no way to -guarantee physical-medium commit order. This kind of devices can't to -I/O barriers. - -iii. Write-back cache and flush operation but no FUA (forced unit -access). We need two cache flushes - before and after the barrier -request. - -iv. Write-back cache, flush operation and FUA. We still need one -flush to make sure requests preceding a barrier are written to medium, -but post-barrier flush can be avoided by using FUA write on the -barrier itself. - - -How to support barrier requests in drivers ------------------------------------------- - -All barrier handling is done inside block layer proper. All low level -drivers have to are implementing its prepare_flush_fn and using one -the following two functions to indicate what barrier type it supports -and how to prepare flush requests. Note that the term 'ordered' is -used to indicate the whole sequence of performing barrier requests -including draining and flushing. - -typedef void (prepare_flush_fn)(struct request_queue *q, struct request *rq); - -int blk_queue_ordered(struct request_queue *q, unsigned ordered, - prepare_flush_fn *prepare_flush_fn); - -@q : the queue in question -@ordered : the ordered mode the driver/device supports -@prepare_flush_fn : this function should prepare @rq such that it - flushes cache to physical medium when executed - -For example, SCSI disk driver's prepare_flush_fn looks like the -following. - -static void sd_prepare_flush(struct request_queue *q, struct request *rq) -{ - memset(rq->cmd, 0, sizeof(rq->cmd)); - rq->cmd_type = REQ_TYPE_BLOCK_PC; - rq->timeout = SD_TIMEOUT; - rq->cmd[0] = SYNCHRONIZE_CACHE; - rq->cmd_len = 10; -} - -The following seven ordered modes are supported. The following table -shows which mode should be used depending on what features a -device/driver supports. In the leftmost column of table, -QUEUE_ORDERED_ prefix is omitted from the mode names to save space. - -The table is followed by description of each mode. Note that in the -descriptions of QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN*, '=>' is used whereas '->' is -used for QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG* descriptions. '=>' indicates that the -preceding step must be complete before proceeding to the next step. -'->' indicates that the next step can start as soon as the previous -step is issued. - - write-back cache ordered tag flush FUA ------------------------------------------------------------------------ -NONE yes/no N/A no N/A -DRAIN no no N/A N/A -DRAIN_FLUSH yes no yes no -DRAIN_FUA yes no yes yes -TAG no yes N/A N/A -TAG_FLUSH yes yes yes no -TAG_FUA yes yes yes yes - - -QUEUE_ORDERED_NONE - I/O barriers are not needed and/or supported. - - Sequence: N/A - -QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN - Requests are ordered by draining the request queue and cache - flushing isn't needed. - - Sequence: drain => barrier - -QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN_FLUSH - Requests are ordered by draining the request queue and both - pre-barrier and post-barrier cache flushings are needed. - - Sequence: drain => preflush => barrier => postflush - -QUEUE_ORDERED_DRAIN_FUA - Requests are ordered by draining the request queue and - pre-barrier cache flushing is needed. By using FUA on barrier - request, post-barrier flushing can be skipped. - - Sequence: drain => preflush => barrier - -QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG - Requests are ordered by ordered tag and cache flushing isn't - needed. - - Sequence: barrier - -QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG_FLUSH - Requests are ordered by ordered tag and both pre-barrier and - post-barrier cache flushings are needed. - - Sequence: preflush -> barrier -> postflush - -QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG_FUA - Requests are ordered by ordered tag and pre-barrier cache - flushing is needed. By using FUA on barrier request, - post-barrier flushing can be skipped. - - Sequence: preflush -> barrier - - -Random notes/caveats --------------------- - -* SCSI layer currently can't use TAG ordering even if the drive, -controller and driver support it. The problem is that SCSI midlayer -request dispatch function is not atomic. It releases queue lock and -switch to SCSI host lock during issue and it's possible and likely to -happen in time that requests change their relative positions. Once -this problem is solved, TAG ordering can be enabled. - -* Currently, no matter which ordered mode is used, there can be only -one barrier request in progress. All I/O barriers are held off by -block layer until the previous I/O barrier is complete. This doesn't -make any difference for DRAIN ordered devices, but, for TAG ordered -devices with very high command latency, passing multiple I/O barriers -to low level *might* be helpful if they are very frequent. Well, this -certainly is a non-issue. I'm writing this just to make clear that no -two I/O barrier is ever passed to low-level driver. - -* Completion order. Requests in ordered sequence are issued in order -but not required to finish in order. Barrier implementation can -handle out-of-order completion of ordered sequence. IOW, the requests -MUST be processed in order but the hardware/software completion paths -are allowed to reorder completion notifications - eg. current SCSI -midlayer doesn't preserve completion order during error handling. - -* Requeueing order. Low-level drivers are free to requeue any request -after they removed it from the request queue with -blkdev_dequeue_request(). As barrier sequence should be kept in order -when requeued, generic elevator code takes care of putting requests in -order around barrier. See blk_ordered_req_seq() and -ELEVATOR_INSERT_REQUEUE handling in __elv_add_request() for details. - -Note that block drivers must not requeue preceding requests while -completing latter requests in an ordered sequence. Currently, no -error checking is done against this. - -* Error handling. Currently, block layer will report error to upper -layer if any of requests in an ordered sequence fails. Unfortunately, -this doesn't seem to be enough. Look at the following request flow. -QUEUE_ORDERED_TAG_FLUSH is in use. - - [0] [1] [2] [3] [pre] [barrier] [post] < [4] [5] [6] ... > - still in elevator - -Let's say request [2], [3] are write requests to update file system -metadata (journal or whatever) and [barrier] is used to mark that -those updates are valid. Consider the following sequence. - - i. Requests [0] ~ [post] leaves the request queue and enters - low-level driver. - ii. After a while, unfortunately, something goes wrong and the - drive fails [2]. Note that any of [0], [1] and [3] could have - completed by this time, but [pre] couldn't have been finished - as the drive must process it in order and it failed before - processing that command. - iii. Error handling kicks in and determines that the error is - unrecoverable and fails [2], and resumes operation. - iv. [pre] [barrier] [post] gets processed. - v. *BOOM* power fails - -The problem here is that the barrier request is *supposed* to indicate -that filesystem update requests [2] and [3] made it safely to the -physical medium and, if the machine crashes after the barrier is -written, filesystem recovery code can depend on that. Sadly, that -isn't true in this case anymore. IOW, the success of a I/O barrier -should also be dependent on success of some of the preceding requests, -where only upper layer (filesystem) knows what 'some' is. - -This can be solved by implementing a way to tell the block layer which -requests affect the success of the following barrier request and -making lower lever drivers to resume operation on error only after -block layer tells it to do so. - -As the probability of this happening is very low and the drive should -be faulty, implementing the fix is probably an overkill. But, still, -it's there. - -* In previous drafts of barrier implementation, there was fallback -mechanism such that, if FUA or ordered TAG fails, less fancy ordered -mode can be selected and the failed barrier request is retried -automatically. The rationale for this feature was that as FUA is -pretty new in ATA world and ordered tag was never used widely, there -could be devices which report to support those features but choke when -actually given such requests. - - This was removed for two reasons 1. it's an overkill 2. it's -impossible to implement properly when TAG ordering is used as low -level drivers resume after an error automatically. If it's ever -needed adding it back and modifying low level drivers accordingly -shouldn't be difficult. diff --git a/Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt b/Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e578fee --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/block/cfq-iosched.txt @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +CFQ ioscheduler tunables +======================== + +slice_idle +---------- +This specifies how long CFQ should idle for next request on certain cfq queues +(for sequential workloads) and service trees (for random workloads) before +queue is expired and CFQ selects next queue to dispatch from. + +By default slice_idle is a non-zero value. That means by default we idle on +queues/service trees. This can be very helpful on highly seeky media like +single spindle SATA/SAS disks where we can cut down on overall number of +seeks and see improved throughput. + +Setting slice_idle to 0 will remove all the idling on queues/service tree +level and one should see an overall improved throughput on faster storage +devices like multiple SATA/SAS disks in hardware RAID configuration. The down +side is that isolation provided from WRITES also goes down and notion of +IO priority becomes weaker. + +So depending on storage and workload, it might be useful to set slice_idle=0. +In general I think for SATA/SAS disks and software RAID of SATA/SAS disks +keeping slice_idle enabled should be useful. For any configurations where +there are multiple spindles behind single LUN (Host based hardware RAID +controller or for storage arrays), setting slice_idle=0 might end up in better +throughput and acceptable latencies. + +CFQ IOPS Mode for group scheduling +=================================== +Basic CFQ design is to provide priority based time slices. Higher priority +process gets bigger time slice and lower priority process gets smaller time +slice. Measuring time becomes harder if storage is fast and supports NCQ and +it would be better to dispatch multiple requests from multiple cfq queues in +request queue at a time. In such scenario, it is not possible to measure time +consumed by single queue accurately. + +What is possible though is to measure number of requests dispatched from a +single queue and also allow dispatch from multiple cfq queue at the same time. +This effectively becomes the fairness in terms of IOPS (IO operations per +second). + +If one sets slice_idle=0 and if storage supports NCQ, CFQ internally switches +to IOPS mode and starts providing fairness in terms of number of requests +dispatched. Note that this mode switching takes effect only for group +scheduling. For non-cgroup users nothing should change. diff --git a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt index d5af3f6..71cfbdc 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/switching-sched.txt @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ you can do so by typing: As of the Linux 2.6.10 kernel, it is now possible to change the IO scheduler for a given block device on the fly (thus making it possible, for instance, to set the CFQ scheduler for the system default, but -set a specific device to use the anticipatory or noop schedulers - which +set a specific device to use the deadline or noop schedulers - which can improve that device's throughput). To set a specific scheduler, simply do this: @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ a "cat /sys/block/DEV/queue/scheduler" - the list of valid names will be displayed, with the currently selected scheduler in brackets: # cat /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler -noop anticipatory deadline [cfq] -# echo anticipatory > /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler +noop deadline [cfq] +# echo deadline > /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler # cat /sys/block/hda/queue/scheduler -noop [anticipatory] deadline cfq +noop [deadline] cfq diff --git a/Documentation/block/writeback_cache_control.txt b/Documentation/block/writeback_cache_control.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83407d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/block/writeback_cache_control.txt @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + +Explicit volatile write back cache control +===================================== + +Introduction +------------ + +Many storage devices, especially in the consumer market, come with volatile +write back caches. That means the devices signal I/O completion to the +operating system before data actually has hit the non-volatile storage. This +behavior obviously speeds up various workloads, but it means the operating +system needs to force data out to the non-volatile storage when it performs +a data integrity operation like fsync, sync or an unmount. + +The Linux block layer provides two simple mechanisms that let filesystems +control the caching behavior of the storage device. These mechanisms are +a forced cache flush, and the Force Unit Access (FUA) flag for requests. + + +Explicit cache flushes +---------------------- + +The REQ_FLUSH flag can be OR ed into the r/w flags of a bio submitted from +the filesystem and will make sure the volatile cache of the storage device +has been flushed before the actual I/O operation is started. This explicitly +guarantees that previously completed write requests are on non-volatile +storage before the flagged bio starts. In addition the REQ_FLUSH flag can be +set on an otherwise empty bio structure, which causes only an explicit cache +flush without any dependent I/O. It is recommend to use +the blkdev_issue_flush() helper for a pure cache flush. + + +Forced Unit Access +----------------- + +The REQ_FUA flag can be OR ed into the r/w flags of a bio submitted from the +filesystem and will make sure that I/O completion for this request is only +signaled after the data has been committed to non-volatile storage. + + +Implementation details for filesystems +-------------------------------------- + +Filesystems can simply set the REQ_FLUSH and REQ_FUA bits and do not have to +worry if the underlying devices need any explicit cache flushing and how +the Forced Unit Access is implemented. The REQ_FLUSH and REQ_FUA flags +may both be set on a single bio. + + +Implementation details for make_request_fn based block drivers +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +These drivers will always see the REQ_FLUSH and REQ_FUA bits as they sit +directly below the submit_bio interface. For remapping drivers the REQ_FUA +bits need to be propagated to underlying devices, and a global flush needs +to be implemented for bios with the REQ_FLUSH bit set. For real device +drivers that do not have a volatile cache the REQ_FLUSH and REQ_FUA bits +on non-empty bios can simply be ignored, and REQ_FLUSH requests without +data can be completed successfully without doing any work. Drivers for +devices with volatile caches need to implement the support for these +flags themselves without any help from the block layer. + + +Implementation details for request_fn based block drivers +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +For devices that do not support volatile write caches there is no driver +support required, the block layer completes empty REQ_FLUSH requests before +entering the driver and strips off the REQ_FLUSH and REQ_FUA bits from +requests that have a payload. For devices with volatile write caches the +driver needs to tell the block layer that it supports flushing caches by +doing: + + blk_queue_flush(sdkp->disk->queue, REQ_FLUSH); + +and handle empty REQ_FLUSH requests in its prep_fn/request_fn. Note that +REQ_FLUSH requests with a payload are automatically turned into a sequence +of an empty REQ_FLUSH request followed by the actual write by the block +layer. For devices that also support the FUA bit the block layer needs +to be told to pass through the REQ_FUA bit using: + + blk_queue_flush(sdkp->disk->queue, REQ_FLUSH | REQ_FUA); + +and the driver must handle write requests that have the REQ_FUA bit set +in prep_fn/request_fn. If the FUA bit is not natively supported the block +layer turns it into an empty REQ_FLUSH request after the actual write. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt index 48e0b21..d6da611 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt @@ -8,12 +8,17 @@ both at leaf nodes as well as at intermediate nodes in a storage hierarchy. Plan is to use the same cgroup based management interface for blkio controller and based on user options switch IO policies in the background. -In the first phase, this patchset implements proportional weight time based -division of disk policy. It is implemented in CFQ. Hence this policy takes -effect only on leaf nodes when CFQ is being used. +Currently two IO control policies are implemented. First one is proportional +weight time based division of disk policy. It is implemented in CFQ. Hence +this policy takes effect only on leaf nodes when CFQ is being used. The second +one is throttling policy which can be used to specify upper IO rate limits +on devices. This policy is implemented in generic block layer and can be +used on leaf nodes as well as higher level logical devices like device mapper. HOWTO ===== +Proportional Weight division of bandwidth +----------------------------------------- You can do a very simple testing of running two dd threads in two different cgroups. Here is what you can do. @@ -55,6 +60,35 @@ cgroups. Here is what you can do. group dispatched to the disk. We provide fairness in terms of disk time, so ideally io.disk_time of cgroups should be in proportion to the weight. +Throttling/Upper Limit policy +----------------------------- +- Enable Block IO controller + CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP=y + +- Enable throttling in block layer + CONFIG_BLK_DEV_THROTTLING=y + +- Mount blkio controller + mount -t cgroup -o blkio none /cgroup/blkio + +- Specify a bandwidth rate on particular device for root group. The format + for policy is "<major>:<minor> <byes_per_second>". + + echo "8:16 1048576" > /cgroup/blkio/blkio.read_bps_device + + Above will put a limit of 1MB/second on reads happening for root group + on device having major/minor number 8:16. + +- Run dd to read a file and see if rate is throttled to 1MB/s or not. + + # dd if=/mnt/common/zerofile of=/dev/null bs=4K count=1024 + # iflag=direct + 1024+0 records in + 1024+0 records out + 4194304 bytes (4.2 MB) copied, 4.0001 s, 1.0 MB/s + + Limits for writes can be put using blkio.write_bps_device file. + Various user visible config options =================================== CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP @@ -68,8 +102,13 @@ CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED - Enables group scheduling in CFQ. Currently only 1 level of group creation is allowed. +CONFIG_BLK_DEV_THROTTLING + - Enable block device throttling support in block layer. + Details of cgroup files ======================= +Proportional weight policy files +-------------------------------- - blkio.weight - Specifies per cgroup weight. This is default weight of the group on all the devices until and unless overridden by per device rule. @@ -210,6 +249,67 @@ Details of cgroup files and minor number of the device and third field specifies the number of times a group was dequeued from a particular device. +Throttling/Upper limit policy files +----------------------------------- +- blkio.throttle.read_bps_device + - Specifies upper limit on READ rate from the device. IO rate is + specified in bytes per second. Rules are per deivce. Following is + the format. + + echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_bytes_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.read_bps_device + +- blkio.throttle.write_bps_device + - Specifies upper limit on WRITE rate to the device. IO rate is + specified in bytes per second. Rules are per deivce. Following is + the format. + + echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_bytes_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.write_bps_device + +- blkio.throttle.read_iops_device + - Specifies upper limit on READ rate from the device. IO rate is + specified in IO per second. Rules are per deivce. Following is + the format. + + echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_io_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.read_iops_device + +- blkio.throttle.write_iops_device + - Specifies upper limit on WRITE rate to the device. IO rate is + specified in io per second. Rules are per deivce. Following is + the format. + + echo "<major>:<minor> <rate_io_per_second>" > /cgrp/blkio.write_iops_device + +Note: If both BW and IOPS rules are specified for a device, then IO is + subjectd to both the constraints. + +- blkio.throttle.io_serviced + - Number of IOs (bio) completed to/from the disk by the group (as + seen by throttling policy). These are further divided by the type + of operation - read or write, sync or async. First two fields specify + the major and minor number of the device, third field specifies the + operation type and the fourth field specifies the number of IOs. + + blkio.io_serviced does accounting as seen by CFQ and counts are in + number of requests (struct request). On the other hand, + blkio.throttle.io_serviced counts number of IO in terms of number + of bios as seen by throttling policy. These bios can later be + merged by elevator and total number of requests completed can be + lesser. + +- blkio.throttle.io_service_bytes + - Number of bytes transferred to/from the disk by the group. These + are further divided by the type of operation - read or write, sync + or async. First two fields specify the major and minor number of the + device, third field specifies the operation type and the fourth field + specifies the number of bytes. + + These numbers should roughly be same as blkio.io_service_bytes as + updated by CFQ. The difference between two is that + blkio.io_service_bytes will not be updated if CFQ is not operating + on request queue. + +Common files among various policies +----------------------------------- - blkio.reset_stats - Writing an int to this file will result in resetting all the stats for that cgroup. @@ -217,6 +317,7 @@ Details of cgroup files CFQ sysfs tunable ================= /sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/group_isolation +----------------------------------------------- If group_isolation=1, it provides stronger isolation between groups at the expense of throughput. By default group_isolation is 0. In general that @@ -243,6 +344,33 @@ By default one should run with group_isolation=0. If that is not sufficient and one wants stronger isolation between groups, then set group_isolation=1 but this will come at cost of reduced throughput. +/sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/slice_idle +------------------------------------------ +On a faster hardware CFQ can be slow, especially with sequential workload. +This happens because CFQ idles on a single queue and single queue might not +drive deeper request queue depths to keep the storage busy. In such scenarios +one can try setting slice_idle=0 and that would switch CFQ to IOPS +(IO operations per second) mode on NCQ supporting hardware. + +That means CFQ will not idle between cfq queues of a cfq group and hence be +able to driver higher queue depth and achieve better throughput. That also +means that cfq provides fairness among groups in terms of IOPS and not in +terms of disk time. + +/sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/group_idle +------------------------------------------ +If one disables idling on individual cfq queues and cfq service trees by +setting slice_idle=0, group_idle kicks in. That means CFQ will still idle +on the group in an attempt to provide fairness among groups. + +By default group_idle is same as slice_idle and does not do anything if +slice_idle is enabled. + +One can experience an overall throughput drop if you have created multiple +groups and put applications in that group which are not driving enough +IO to keep disk busy. In that case set group_idle=0, and CFQ will not idle +on individual groups and throughput should improve. + What works ========== - Currently only sync IO queues are support. All the buffered writes are diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index b34823f..190018b 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ CONTENTS: 1.2 Why are cgroups needed ? 1.3 How are cgroups implemented ? 1.4 What does notify_on_release do ? - 1.5 How do I use cgroups ? + 1.5 What does clone_children do ? + 1.6 How do I use cgroups ? 2. Usage Examples and Syntax 2.1 Basic Usage 2.2 Attaching processes @@ -293,7 +294,16 @@ notify_on_release in the root cgroup at system boot is disabled value of their parents notify_on_release setting. The default value of a cgroup hierarchy's release_agent path is empty. -1.5 How do I use cgroups ? +1.5 What does clone_children do ? +--------------------------------- + +If the clone_children flag is enabled (1) in a cgroup, then all +cgroups created beneath will call the post_clone callbacks for each +subsystem of the newly created cgroup. Usually when this callback is +implemented for a subsystem, it copies the values of the parent +subsystem, this is the case for the cpuset. + +1.6 How do I use cgroups ? -------------------------- To start a new job that is to be contained within a cgroup, using diff --git a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt index cd2b028..4a276ea 100644 --- a/Documentation/coccinelle.txt +++ b/Documentation/coccinelle.txt @@ -24,6 +24,9 @@ of many distributions, e.g. : You can get the latest version released from the Coccinelle homepage at http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/ +Information and tips about Coccinelle are also provided on the wiki +pages at http://cocci.ekstranet.diku.dk/wiki/doku.php + Once you have it, run the following command: ./configure @@ -41,20 +44,22 @@ A Coccinelle-specific target is defined in the top level Makefile. This target is named 'coccicheck' and calls the 'coccicheck' front-end in the 'scripts' directory. -Four modes are defined: report, patch, context, and org. The mode to +Four modes are defined: patch, report, context, and org. The mode to use is specified by setting the MODE variable with 'MODE=<mode>'. +'patch' proposes a fix, when possible. + 'report' generates a list in the following format: file:line:column-column: message -'patch' proposes a fix, when possible. - 'context' highlights lines of interest and their context in a diff-like style.Lines of interest are indicated with '-'. 'org' generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs. -Note that not all semantic patches implement all modes. +Note that not all semantic patches implement all modes. For easy use +of Coccinelle, the default mode is "chain" which tries the previous +modes in the order above until one succeeds. To make a report for every semantic patch, run the following command: @@ -68,9 +73,9 @@ To produce patches, run: The coccicheck target applies every semantic patch available in the -subdirectories of 'scripts/coccinelle' to the entire Linux kernel. +sub-directories of 'scripts/coccinelle' to the entire Linux kernel. -For each semantic patch, a changelog message is proposed. It gives a +For each semantic patch, a commit message is proposed. It gives a description of the problem being checked by the semantic patch, and includes a reference to Coccinelle. @@ -93,12 +98,35 @@ or make coccicheck COCCI=<my_SP.cocci> MODE=report + Using Coccinelle on (modified) files +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +To apply Coccinelle on a file basis, instead of a directory basis, the +following command may be used: + + make C=1 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck" + +To check only newly edited code, use the value 2 for the C flag, i.e. + + make C=2 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck" + +This runs every semantic patch in scripts/coccinelle by default. The +COCCI variable may additionally be used to only apply a single +semantic patch as shown in the previous section. + +The "chain" mode is the default. You can select another one with the +MODE variable explained above. + +In this mode, there is no information about semantic patches +displayed, and no commit message proposed. + + Proposing new semantic patches ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ New semantic patches can be proposed and submitted by kernel developers. For sake of clarity, they should be organized in the -subdirectories of 'scripts/coccinelle/'. +sub-directories of 'scripts/coccinelle/'. Detailed description of the 'report' mode @@ -111,7 +139,7 @@ Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=report COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=report COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. @@ -149,7 +177,7 @@ identified. Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=patch COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=patch COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. @@ -193,7 +221,7 @@ NOTE: The diff-like output generated is NOT an applicable patch. The Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=context COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=context COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. @@ -228,7 +256,7 @@ diff -u -p /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c /tmp/nothing Example: Running - make coccicheck MODE=org COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/err_cast.cocci + make coccicheck MODE=org COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci will execute the following part of the SmPL script. diff --git a/Documentation/cputopology.txt b/Documentation/cputopology.txt index f1c5c4b..902d315 100644 --- a/Documentation/cputopology.txt +++ b/Documentation/cputopology.txt @@ -14,25 +14,39 @@ to /proc/cpuinfo. identifier (rather than the kernel's). The actual value is architecture and platform dependent. -3) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/thread_siblings: +3) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/book_id: + + the book ID of cpuX. Typically it is the hardware platform's + identifier (rather than the kernel's). The actual value is + architecture and platform dependent. + +4) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/thread_siblings: internel kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same core as cpuX -4) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/core_siblings: +5) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/core_siblings: internal kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same physical_package_id. +6) /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/topology/book_siblings: + + internal kernel map of cpuX's hardware threads within the same + book_id. + To implement it in an architecture-neutral way, a new source file, -drivers/base/topology.c, is to export the 4 attributes. +drivers/base/topology.c, is to export the 4 or 6 attributes. The two book +related sysfs files will only be created if CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK is selected. For an architecture to support this feature, it must define some of these macros in include/asm-XXX/topology.h: #define topology_physical_package_id(cpu) #define topology_core_id(cpu) +#define topology_book_id(cpu) #define topology_thread_cpumask(cpu) #define topology_core_cpumask(cpu) +#define topology_book_cpumask(cpu) The type of **_id is int. The type of siblings is (const) struct cpumask *. @@ -45,6 +59,9 @@ not defined by include/asm-XXX/topology.h: 3) thread_siblings: just the given CPU 4) core_siblings: just the given CPU +For architectures that don't support books (CONFIG_SCHED_BOOK) there are no +default definitions for topology_book_id() and topology_book_cpumask(). + Additionally, CPU topology information is provided under /sys/devices/system/cpu and includes these files. The internal source for the output is in brackets ("[]"). diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process index 97726eb..911a451 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process +++ b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ The stages that a patch goes through are, generally: inclusion, it should be accepted by a relevant subsystem maintainer - though this acceptance is not a guarantee that the patch will make it all the way to the mainline. The patch will show up in the maintainer's - subsystem tree and into the staging trees (described below). When the + subsystem tree and into the -next trees (described below). When the process works, this step leads to more extensive review of the patch and the discovery of any problems resulting from the integration of this patch with work being done by others. @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ finding the right maintainer. Sending patches directly to Linus is not normally the right way to go. -2.4: STAGING TREES +2.4: NEXT TREES The chain of subsystem trees guides the flow of patches into the kernel, but it also raises an interesting question: what if somebody wants to look @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ changes land in the mainline kernel. One could pull changes from all of the interesting subsystem trees, but that would be a big and error-prone job. -The answer comes in the form of staging trees, where subsystem trees are +The answer comes in the form of -next trees, where subsystem trees are collected for testing and review. The older of these trees, maintained by Andrew Morton, is called "-mm" (for memory management, which is how it got started). The -mm tree integrates patches from a long list of subsystem @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ directory at: Use of the MMOTM tree is likely to be a frustrating experience, though; there is a definite chance that it will not even compile. -The other staging tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by +The other -next tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by Stephen Rothwell. The linux-next tree is, by design, a snapshot of what the mainline is expected to look like after the next merge window closes. Linux-next trees are announced on the linux-kernel and linux-next mailing @@ -303,12 +303,25 @@ volatility of linux-next tends to make it a difficult development target. See http://lwn.net/Articles/289013/ for more information on this topic, and stay tuned; much is still in flux where linux-next is involved. -Besides the mmotm and linux-next trees, the kernel source tree now contains -the drivers/staging/ directory and many sub-directories for drivers or -filesystems that are on their way to being added to the kernel tree -proper, but they remain in drivers/staging/ while they still need more -work. - +2.4.1: STAGING TREES + +The kernel source tree now contains the drivers/staging/ directory, where +many sub-directories for drivers or filesystems that are on their way to +being added to the kernel tree live. They remain in drivers/staging while +they still need more work; once complete, they can be moved into the +kernel proper. This is a way to keep track of drivers that aren't +up to Linux kernel coding or quality standards, but people may want to use +them and track development. + +Greg Kroah-Hartman currently (as of 2.6.36) maintains the staging tree. +Drivers that still need work are sent to him, with each driver having +its own subdirectory in drivers/staging/. Along with the driver source +files, a TODO file should be present in the directory as well. The TODO +file lists the pending work that the driver needs for acceptance into +the kernel proper, as well as a list of people that should be Cc'd for any +patches to the driver. Staging drivers that don't currently build should +have their config entries depend upon CONFIG_BROKEN. Once they can +be successfully built without outside patches, CONFIG_BROKEN can be removed. 2.5: TOOLS diff --git a/Documentation/devices.txt b/Documentation/devices.txt index d0d1df6..eccffe7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/devices.txt @@ -239,6 +239,7 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 0 = /dev/tty Current TTY device 1 = /dev/console System console 2 = /dev/ptmx PTY master multiplex + 3 = /dev/ttyprintk User messages via printk TTY device 64 = /dev/cua0 Callout device for ttyS0 ... 255 = /dev/cua191 Callout device for ttyS191 @@ -1495,9 +1496,6 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 64 = /dev/radio0 Radio device ... 127 = /dev/radio63 Radio device - 192 = /dev/vtx0 Teletext device - ... - 223 = /dev/vtx31 Teletext device 224 = /dev/vbi0 Vertical blank interrupt ... 255 = /dev/vbi31 Vertical blank interrupt @@ -2519,6 +2517,12 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 8 = /dev/mmcblk1 Second SD/MMC card ... + The start of next SD/MMC card can be configured with + CONFIG_MMC_BLOCK_MINORS, or overridden at boot/modprobe + time using the mmcblk.perdev_minors option. That would + bump the offset between each card to be the configured + value instead of the default 8. + 179 char CCube DVXChip-based PCI products 0 = /dev/dvxirq0 First DVX device 1 = /dev/dvxirq1 Second DVX device @@ -2553,7 +2557,10 @@ Your cooperation is appreciated. 175 = /dev/usb/legousbtower15 16th USB Legotower device 176 = /dev/usb/usbtmc1 First USB TMC device ... - 192 = /dev/usb/usbtmc16 16th USB TMC device + 191 = /dev/usb/usbtmc16 16th USB TMC device + 192 = /dev/usb/yurex1 First USB Yurex device + ... + 209 = /dev/usb/yurex16 16th USB Yurex device 240 = /dev/usb/dabusb0 First daubusb device ... 243 = /dev/usb/dabusb3 Fourth dabusb device diff --git a/Documentation/dontdiff b/Documentation/dontdiff index d9bcffd..470d3db 100644 --- a/Documentation/dontdiff +++ b/Documentation/dontdiff @@ -62,6 +62,10 @@ aic7*reg_print.c* aic7*seq.h* aicasm aicdb.h* +altivec1.c +altivec2.c +altivec4.c +altivec8.c asm-offsets.h asm_offsets.h autoconf.h* @@ -76,6 +80,7 @@ btfixupprep build bvmlinux bzImage* +capflags.c classlist.h* comp*.log compile.h* @@ -94,6 +99,7 @@ devlist.h* docproc elf2ecoff elfconfig.h* +evergreen_reg_safe.h fixdep flask.h fore200e_mkfirm @@ -108,9 +114,16 @@ genksyms *_gray256.c ihex2fw ikconfig.h* +inat-tables.c initramfs_data.cpio initramfs_data.cpio.gz initramfs_list +int16.c +int1.c +int2.c +int32.c +int4.c +int8.c kallsyms kconfig keywords.c @@ -140,6 +153,7 @@ mkprep mktables mktree modpost +modules.builtin modules.order modversions.h* ncscope.* @@ -153,14 +167,23 @@ pca200e.bin pca200e_ecd.bin2 piggy.gz piggyback +piggy.S pnmtologo ppc_defs.h* pss_boot.h qconf +r100_reg_safe.h +r200_reg_safe.h +r300_reg_safe.h +r420_reg_safe.h +r600_reg_safe.h raid6altivec*.c raid6int*.c raid6tables.c relocs +rn50_reg_safe.h +rs600_reg_safe.h +rv515_reg_safe.h series setup setup.bin @@ -169,6 +192,7 @@ sImage sm_tbl* split-include syscalltab.h +tables.c tags tftpboot.img timeconst.h @@ -190,6 +214,7 @@ vmlinux vmlinux-* vmlinux.aout vmlinux.lds +voffset.h vsyscall.lds vsyscall_32.lds wanxlfw.inc @@ -200,3 +225,4 @@ wakeup.elf wakeup.lds zImage* zconf.hash.c +zoffset.h diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/interface.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/interface.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c66912b..0000000 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/interface.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ - -Device Interfaces - -Introduction -~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -Device interfaces are the logical interfaces of device classes that correlate -directly to userspace interfaces, like device nodes. - -Each device class may have multiple interfaces through which you can -access the same device. An input device may support the mouse interface, -the 'evdev' interface, and the touchscreen interface. A SCSI disk would -support the disk interface, the SCSI generic interface, and possibly a raw -device interface. - -Device interfaces are registered with the class they belong to. As devices -are added to the class, they are added to each interface registered with -the class. The interface is responsible for determining whether the device -supports the interface or not. - - -Programming Interface -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - -struct device_interface { - char * name; - rwlock_t lock; - u32 devnum; - struct device_class * devclass; - - struct list_head node; - struct driver_dir_entry dir; - - int (*add_device)(struct device *); - int (*add_device)(struct intf_data *); -}; - -int interface_register(struct device_interface *); -void interface_unregister(struct device_interface *); - - -An interface must specify the device class it belongs to. It is added -to that class's list of interfaces on registration. - - -Interfaces can be added to a device class at any time. Whenever it is -added, each device in the class is passed to the interface's -add_device callback. When an interface is removed, each device is -removed from the interface. - - -Devices -~~~~~~~ -Once a device is added to a device class, it is added to each -interface that is registered with the device class. The class -is expected to place a class-specific data structure in -struct device::class_data. The interface can use that (along with -other fields of struct device) to determine whether or not the driver -and/or device support that particular interface. - - -Data -~~~~ - -struct intf_data { - struct list_head node; - struct device_interface * intf; - struct device * dev; - u32 intf_num; -}; - -int interface_add_data(struct interface_data *); - -The interface is responsible for allocating and initializing a struct -intf_data and calling interface_add_data() to add it to the device's list -of interfaces it belongs to. This list will be iterated over when the device -is removed from the class (instead of all possible interfaces for a class). -This structure should probably be embedded in whatever per-device data -structure the interface is allocating anyway. - -Devices are enumerated within the interface. This happens in interface_add_data() -and the enumerated value is stored in the struct intf_data for that device. - -sysfs -~~~~~ -Each interface is given a directory in the directory of the device -class it belongs to: - -Interfaces get a directory in the class's directory as well: - - class/ - `-- input - |-- devices - |-- drivers - |-- mouse - `-- evdev - -When a device is added to the interface, a symlink is created that points -to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy: - - class/ - `-- input - |-- devices - | `-- 1 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:1f.0/usb_bus/00:1f.2-1:0/ - |-- drivers - | `-- usb:usb_mouse -> ../../../bus/drivers/usb_mouse/ - |-- mouse - | `-- 1 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:1f.0/usb_bus/00:1f.2-1:0/ - `-- evdev - `-- 1 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:1f.0/usb_bus/00:1f.2-1:0/ - - -Future Plans -~~~~~~~~~~~~ -A device interface is correlated directly with a userspace interface -for a device, specifically a device node. For instance, a SCSI disk -exposes at least two interfaces to userspace: the standard SCSI disk -interface and the SCSI generic interface. It might also export a raw -device interface. - -Many interfaces have a major number associated with them and each -device gets a minor number. Or, multiple interfaces might share one -major number, and each will receive a range of minor numbers (like in -the case of input devices). - -These major and minor numbers could be stored in the interface -structure. Major and minor allocations could happen when the interface -is registered with the class, or via a helper function. - diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware index 350959f..59690de 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware +++ b/Documentation/dvb/get_dvb_firmware @@ -26,7 +26,8 @@ use IO::Handle; "dec3000s", "vp7041", "dibusb", "nxt2002", "nxt2004", "or51211", "or51132_qam", "or51132_vsb", "bluebird", "opera1", "cx231xx", "cx18", "cx23885", "pvrusb2", "mpc718", - "af9015", "ngene", "az6027"); + "af9015", "ngene", "az6027", "lme2510_lg", "lme2510c_s7395", + "lme2510c_s7395_old"); # Check args syntax() if (scalar(@ARGV) != 1); @@ -584,6 +585,49 @@ sub az6027{ $firmware; } + +sub lme2510_lg { + my $sourcefile = "LMEBDA_DVBS.sys"; + my $hash = "fc6017ad01e79890a97ec53bea157ed2"; + my $outfile = "dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw"; + my $hasho = "caa065d5fdbd2c09ad57b399bbf55cad"; + + checkstandard(); + + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + extract($sourcefile, 4168, 3841, $outfile); + verify($outfile, $hasho); + $outfile; +} + +sub lme2510c_s7395 { + my $sourcefile = "US2A0D.sys"; + my $hash = "b0155a8083fb822a3bd47bc360e74601"; + my $outfile = "dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw"; + my $hasho = "3a3cf1aeebd17b6ddc04cebe131e94cf"; + + checkstandard(); + + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + extract($sourcefile, 37248, 3720, $outfile); + verify($outfile, $hasho); + $outfile; +} + +sub lme2510c_s7395_old { + my $sourcefile = "LMEBDA_DVBS7395C.sys"; + my $hash = "7572ae0eb9cdf91baabd7c0ba9e09b31"; + my $outfile = "dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw"; + my $hasho = "90430c5b435eb5c6f88fd44a9d950674"; + + checkstandard(); + + verify($sourcefile, $hash); + extract($sourcefile, 4208, 3881, $outfile); + verify($outfile, $hasho); + $outfile; +} + # --------------------------------------------------------------- # Utilities diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6418865 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dvb/lmedm04.txt @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +To extract firmware for the DM04/QQBOX you need to copy the +following file(s) to this directory. + +for DM04+/QQBOX LME2510C (Sharp 7395 Tuner) +------------------------------------------- + +The Sharp 7395 driver can be found in windows/system32/driver + +US2A0D.sys (dated 17 Mar 2009) + + +and run +./get_dvb_firmware lme2510c_s7395 + + will produce + dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw + +An alternative but older firmware can be found on the driver +disk DVB-S_EN_3.5A in BDADriver/driver + +LMEBDA_DVBS7395C.sys (dated 18 Jan 2008) + +and run +./get_dvb_firmware lme2510c_s7395_old + + will produce + dvb-usb-lme2510c-s7395.fw + +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +The LG firmware can be found on the driver +disk DM04+_5.1A[LG] in BDADriver/driver + +for DM04 LME2510 (LG Tuner) +--------------------------- + +LMEBDA_DVBS.sys (dated 13 Nov 2007) + +and run +./get_dvb_firmware lme2510_lg + + will produce + dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw + + +Other LG firmware can be extracted manually from US280D.sys +only found in windows/system32/driver. + +dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=42360 count=3924 of=dvb-usb-lme2510-lg.fw + +for DM04 LME2510C (LG Tuner) +--------------------------- + +dd if=US280D.sys ibs=1 skip=35200 count=3850 of=dvb-usb-lme2510c-lg.fw + +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Copy the firmware file(s) to /lib/firmware diff --git a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt index 674c566..58ea64a 100644 --- a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ Dynamic debug has even more useful features: read to display the complete list of known debug statements, to help guide you Controlling dynamic debug Behaviour -=============================== +=================================== The behaviour of pr_debug()/dev_debug()s are controlled via writing to a control file in the 'debugfs' filesystem. Thus, you must first mount the debugfs @@ -212,6 +212,26 @@ Note the regexp ^[-+=][scp]+$ matches a flags specification. Note also that there is no convenient syntax to remove all the flags at once, you need to use "-psc". + +Debug messages during boot process +================================== + +To be able to activate debug messages during the boot process, +even before userspace and debugfs exists, use the boot parameter: +ddebug_query="QUERY" + +QUERY follows the syntax described above, but must not exceed 1023 +characters. The enablement of debug messages is done as an arch_initcall. +Thus you can enable debug messages in all code processed after this +arch_initcall via this boot parameter. +On an x86 system for example ACPI enablement is a subsys_initcall and +ddebug_query="file ec.c +p" +will show early Embedded Controller transactions during ACPI setup if +your machine (typically a laptop) has an Embedded Controller. +PCI (or other devices) initialization also is a hot candidate for using +this boot parameter for debugging purposes. + + Examples ======== diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index 0b875e8..9ee774d 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ csrow3. The representation of the above is reflected in the directory tree in EDAC's sysfs interface. Starting in directory /sys/devices/system/edac/mc each memory controller will be represented -by its own 'mcX' directory, where 'X" is the index of the MC. +by its own 'mcX' directory, where 'X' is the index of the MC. ..../edac/mc/ @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ by its own 'mcX' directory, where 'X" is the index of the MC. .... Under each 'mcX' directory each 'csrowX' is again represented by a -'csrowX', where 'X" is the csrow index: +'csrowX', where 'X' is the csrow index: .../mc/mc0/ @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ EDAC control and attribute files. In 'mcX' directories are EDAC control and attribute files for -this 'X" instance of the memory controllers: +this 'X' instance of the memory controllers: Counter reset control file: @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Sdram memory scrubbing rate: 'csrowX' DIRECTORIES In the 'csrowX' directories are EDAC control and attribute files for -this 'X" instance of csrow: +this 'X' instance of csrow: Total Uncorrectable Errors count attribute file: diff --git a/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX b/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX index a618fd9..30a7054 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/fb/00-INDEX @@ -4,33 +4,41 @@ please mail me. Geert Uytterhoeven <geert@linux-m68k.org> 00-INDEX - - this file + - this file. arkfb.txt - info on the fbdev driver for ARK Logic chips. aty128fb.txt - info on the ATI Rage128 frame buffer driver. cirrusfb.txt - info on the driver for Cirrus Logic chipsets. +cmap_xfbdev.txt + - an introduction to fbdev's cmap structures. deferred_io.txt - an introduction to deferred IO. +efifb.txt + - info on the EFI platform driver for Intel based Apple computers. +ep93xx-fb.txt + - info on the driver for EP93xx LCD controller. fbcon.txt - intro to and usage guide for the framebuffer console (fbcon). framebuffer.txt - introduction to frame buffer devices. -imacfb.txt - - info on the generic EFI platform driver for Intel based Macs. +gxfb.txt + - info on the framebuffer driver for AMD Geode GX2 based processors. intel810.txt - documentation for the Intel 810/815 framebuffer driver. intelfb.txt - docs for Intel 830M/845G/852GM/855GM/865G/915G/945G fb driver. internals.txt - quick overview of frame buffer device internals. +lxfb.txt + - info on the framebuffer driver for AMD Geode LX based processors. matroxfb.txt - info on the Matrox framebuffer driver for Alpha, Intel and PPC. +metronomefb.txt + - info on the driver for the Metronome display controller. modedb.txt - info on the video mode database. -matroxfb.txt - - info on the Matrox frame buffer driver. pvr2fb.txt - info on the PowerVR 2 frame buffer driver. pxafb.txt @@ -39,13 +47,23 @@ s3fb.txt - info on the fbdev driver for S3 Trio/Virge chips. sa1100fb.txt - information about the driver for the SA-1100 LCD controller. +sh7760fb.txt + - info on the SH7760/SH7763 integrated LCDC Framebuffer driver. sisfb.txt - info on the framebuffer device driver for various SiS chips. sstfb.txt - info on the frame buffer driver for 3dfx' Voodoo Graphics boards. tgafb.txt - - info on the TGA (DECChip 21030) frame buffer driver + - info on the TGA (DECChip 21030) frame buffer driver. +tridentfb.txt + info on the framebuffer driver for some Trident chip based cards. +uvesafb.txt + - info on the userspace VESA (VBE2+ compliant) frame buffer device. vesafb.txt - - info on the VESA frame buffer device + - info on the VESA frame buffer device. +viafb.modes + - list of modes for VIA Integration Graphic Chip. +viafb.txt + - info on the VIA Integration Graphic Chip console framebuffer driver. vt8623fb.txt - info on the fb driver for the graphics core in VIA VT8623 chipsets. diff --git a/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fdde2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/fb/udlfb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + +What is udlfb? +=============== + +This is a driver for DisplayLink USB 2.0 era graphics chips. + +DisplayLink chips provide simple hline/blit operations with some compression, +pairing that with a hardware framebuffer (16MB) on the other end of the +USB wire. That hardware framebuffer is able to drive the VGA, DVI, or HDMI +monitor with no CPU involvement until a pixel has to change. + +The CPU or other local resource does all the rendering; optinally compares the +result with a local shadow of the remote hardware framebuffer to identify +the minimal set of pixels that have changed; and compresses and sends those +pixels line-by-line via USB bulk transfers. + +Because of the efficiency of bulk transfers and a protocol on top that +does not require any acks - the effect is very low latency that +can support surprisingly high resolutions with good performance for +non-gaming and non-video applications. + +Mode setting, EDID read, etc are other bulk or control transfers. Mode +setting is very flexible - able to set nearly arbitrary modes from any timing. + +Advantages of USB graphics in general: + + * Ability to add a nearly arbitrary number of displays to any USB 2.0 + capable system. On Linux, number of displays is limited by fbdev interface + (FB_MAX is currently 32). Of course, all USB devices on the same + host controller share the same 480Mbs USB 2.0 interface. + +Advantages of supporting DisplayLink chips with kernel framebuffer interface: + + * The actual hardware functionality of DisplayLink chips matches nearly + one-to-one with the fbdev interface, making the driver quite small and + tight relative to the functionality it provides. + * X servers and other applications can use the standard fbdev interface + from user mode to talk to the device, without needing to know anything + about USB or DisplayLink's protocol at all. A "displaylink" X driver + and a slightly modified "fbdev" X driver are among those that already do. + +Disadvantages: + + * Fbdev's mmap interface assumes a real hardware framebuffer is mapped. + In the case of USB graphics, it is just an allocated (virtual) buffer. + Writes need to be detected and encoded into USB bulk transfers by the CPU. + Accurate damage/changed area notifications work around this problem. + In the future, hopefully fbdev will be enhanced with an small standard + interface to allow mmap clients to report damage, for the benefit + of virtual or remote framebuffers. + * Fbdev does not arbitrate client ownership of the framebuffer well. + * Fbcon assumes the first framebuffer it finds should be consumed for console. + * It's not clear what the future of fbdev is, given the rise of KMS/DRM. + +How to use it? +============== + +Udlfb, when loaded as a module, will match against all USB 2.0 generation +DisplayLink chips (Alex and Ollie family). It will then attempt to read the EDID +of the monitor, and set the best common mode between the DisplayLink device +and the monitor's capabilities. + +If the DisplayLink device is successful, it will paint a "green screen" which +means that from a hardware and fbdev software perspective, everything is good. + +At that point, a /dev/fb? interface will be present for user-mode applications +to open and begin writing to the framebuffer of the DisplayLink device using +standard fbdev calls. Note that if mmap() is used, by default the user mode +application must send down damage notifcations to trigger repaints of the +changed regions. Alternatively, udlfb can be recompiled with experimental +defio support enabled, to support a page-fault based detection mechanism +that can work without explicit notifcation. + +The most common client of udlfb is xf86-video-displaylink or a modified +xf86-video-fbdev X server. These servers have no real DisplayLink specific +code. They write to the standard framebuffer interface and rely on udlfb +to do its thing. The one extra feature they have is the ability to report +rectangles from the X DAMAGE protocol extension down to udlfb via udlfb's +damage interface (which will hopefully be standardized for all virtual +framebuffers that need damage info). These damage notifications allow +udlfb to efficiently process the changed pixels. + +Module Options +============== + +Special configuration for udlfb is usually unnecessary. There are a few +options, however. + +From the command line, pass options to modprobe +modprobe udlfb defio=1 console=1 + +Or for permanent option, create file like /etc/modprobe.d/options with text +options udlfb defio=1 console=1 + +Accepted options: + +fb_defio Make use of the fb_defio (CONFIG_FB_DEFERRED_IO) kernel + module to track changed areas of the framebuffer by page faults. + Standard fbdev applications that use mmap but that do not + report damage, may be able to work with this enabled. + Disabled by default because of overhead and other issues. + +console Allow fbcon to attach to udlfb provided framebuffers. This + is disabled by default because fbcon will aggressively consume + the first framebuffer it finds, which isn't usually what the + user wants in the case of USB displays. + +Sysfs Attributes +================ + +Udlfb creates several files in /sys/class/graphics/fb? +Where ? is the sequential framebuffer id of the particular DisplayLink device + +edid If a valid EDID blob is written to this file (typically + by a udev rule), then udlfb will use this EDID as a + backup in case reading the actual EDID of the monitor + attached to the DisplayLink device fails. This is + especially useful for fixed panels, etc. that cannot + communicate their capabilities via EDID. Reading + this file returns the current EDID of the attached + monitor (or last backup value written). This is + useful to get the EDID of the attached monitor, + which can be passed to utilities like parse-edid. + +metrics_bytes_rendered 32-bit count of pixel bytes rendered + +metrics_bytes_identical 32-bit count of how many of those bytes were found to be + unchanged, based on a shadow framebuffer check + +metrics_bytes_sent 32-bit count of how many bytes were transferred over + USB to communicate the resulting changed pixels to the + hardware. Includes compression and protocol overhead + +metrics_cpu_kcycles_used 32-bit count of CPU cycles used in processing the + above pixels (in thousands of cycles). + +metrics_reset Write-only. Any write to this file resets all metrics + above to zero. Note that the 32-bit counters above + roll over very quickly. To get reliable results, design + performance tests to start and finish in a very short + period of time (one minute or less is safe). + +-- +Bernie Thompson <bernie@plugable.com> diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt index f3e046a..1a2e8aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt @@ -197,6 +197,54 @@ Notes: example, # fbset -depth 16 + +[Configure viafb via /proc] +--------------------------- + The following files exist in /proc/viafb + + supported_output_devices + + This read-only file contains a full ',' seperated list containing all + output devices that could be available on your platform. It is likely + that not all of those have a connector on your hardware but it should + provide a good starting point to figure out which of those names match + a real connector. + Example: + # cat /proc/viafb/supported_output_devices + + iga1/output_devices + iga2/output_devices + + These two files are readable and writable. iga1 and iga2 are the two + independent units that produce the screen image. Those images can be + forwarded to one or more output devices. Reading those files is a way + to query which output devices are currently used by an iga. + Example: + # cat /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices + If there are no output devices printed the output of this iga is lost. + This can happen for example if only one (the other) iga is used. + Writing to these files allows adjusting the output devices during + runtime. One can add new devices, remove existing ones or switch + between igas. Essentially you can write a ',' seperated list of device + names (or a single one) in the same format as the output to those + files. You can add a '+' or '-' as a prefix allowing simple addition + and removal of devices. So a prefix '+' adds the devices from your list + to the already existing ones, '-' removes the listed devices from the + existing ones and if no prefix is given it replaces all existing ones + with the listed ones. If you remove devices they are expected to turn + off. If you add devices that are already part of the other iga they are + removed there and added to the new one. + Examples: + Add CRT as output device to iga1 + # echo +CRT > /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices + + Remove (turn off) DVP1 and LVDS1 as output devices of iga2 + # echo -DVP1,LVDS1 > /proc/viafb/iga2/output_devices + + Replace all iga1 output devices by CRT + # echo CRT > /proc/viafb/iga1/output_devices + + [Bootup with viafb]: -------------------- Add the following line to your grub.conf: diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 842aa9d..22f1081 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -97,21 +97,38 @@ Who: Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz> --------------------------- -What: Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and from Video devices. -When: July 2009 -Files: include/linux/videodev.h -Check: include/linux/videodev.h -Why: V4L1 AP1 was replaced by V4L2 API during migration from 2.4 to 2.6 - series. The old API have lots of drawbacks and don't provide enough - means to work with all video and audio standards. The newer API is - already available on the main drivers and should be used instead. - Newer drivers should use v4l_compat_translate_ioctl function to handle - old calls, replacing to newer ones. - Decoder iocts are using internally to allow video drivers to - communicate with video decoders. This should also be improved to allow - V4L2 calls being translated into compatible internal ioctls. - Compatibility ioctls will be provided, for a while, via - v4l1-compat module. +What: Video4Linux obsolete drivers using V4L1 API +When: kernel 2.6.39 +Files: drivers/staging/se401/* drivers/staging/usbvideo/* +Check: drivers/staging/se401/se401.c drivers/staging/usbvideo/usbvideo.c +Why: There are some drivers still using V4L1 API, despite all efforts we've done + to migrate. Those drivers are for obsolete hardware that the old maintainer + didn't care (or not have the hardware anymore), and that no other developer + could find any hardware to buy. They probably have no practical usage today, + and people with such old hardware could probably keep using an older version + of the kernel. Those drivers will be moved to staging on 2.6.38 and, if nobody + cares enough to port and test them with V4L2 API, they'll be removed on 2.6.39. +Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> + +--------------------------- + +What: Video4Linux: Remove obsolete ioctl's +When: kernel 2.6.39 +Files: include/media/videodev2.h +Why: Some ioctl's were defined wrong on 2.6.2 and 2.6.6, using the wrong + type of R/W arguments. They were fixed, but the old ioctl names are + still there, maintained to avoid breaking binary compatibility: + #define VIDIOC_OVERLAY_OLD _IOWR('V', 14, int) + #define VIDIOC_S_PARM_OLD _IOW('V', 22, struct v4l2_streamparm) + #define VIDIOC_S_CTRL_OLD _IOW('V', 28, struct v4l2_control) + #define VIDIOC_G_AUDIO_OLD _IOWR('V', 33, struct v4l2_audio) + #define VIDIOC_G_AUDOUT_OLD _IOWR('V', 49, struct v4l2_audioout) + #define VIDIOC_CROPCAP_OLD _IOR('V', 58, struct v4l2_cropcap) + There's no sense on preserving those forever, as it is very doubtful + that someone would try to use a such old binary with a modern kernel. + Removing them will allow us to remove some magic done at the V4L ioctl + handler. + Who: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org> --------------------------- @@ -386,34 +403,6 @@ Who: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> ---------------------------- -What: Support for VMware's guest paravirtuliazation technique [VMI] will be - dropped. -When: 2.6.37 or earlier. -Why: With the recent innovations in CPU hardware acceleration technologies - from Intel and AMD, VMware ran a few experiments to compare these - techniques to guest paravirtualization technique on VMware's platform. - These hardware assisted virtualization techniques have outperformed the - performance benefits provided by VMI in most of the workloads. VMware - expects that these hardware features will be ubiquitous in a couple of - years, as a result, VMware has started a phased retirement of this - feature from the hypervisor. We will be removing this feature from the - Kernel too. Right now we are targeting 2.6.37 but can retire earlier if - technical reasons (read opportunity to remove major chunk of pvops) - arise. - - Please note that VMI has always been an optimization and non-VMI kernels - still work fine on VMware's platform. - Latest versions of VMware's product which support VMI are, - Workstation 7.0 and VSphere 4.0 on ESX side, future maintainence - releases for these products will continue supporting VMI. - - For more details about VMI retirement take a look at this, - http://blogs.vmware.com/guestosguide/2009/09/vmi-retirement.html - -Who: Alok N Kataria <akataria@vmware.com> - ----------------------------- - What: Support for lcd_switch and display_get in asus-laptop driver When: March 2010 Why: These two features use non-standard interfaces. There are the @@ -498,29 +487,6 @@ When: April 2011 Why: Superseded by xt_CT Who: Netfilter developer team <netfilter-devel@vger.kernel.org> ---------------------------- - -What: video4linux /dev/vtx teletext API support -When: 2.6.35 -Files: drivers/media/video/saa5246a.c drivers/media/video/saa5249.c - include/linux/videotext.h -Why: The vtx device nodes have been superseded by vbi device nodes - for many years. No applications exist that use the vtx support. - Of the two i2c drivers that actually support this API the saa5249 - has been impossible to use for a year now and no known hardware - that supports this device exists. The saa5246a is theoretically - supported by the old mxb boards, but it never actually worked. - - In summary: there is no hardware that can use this API and there - are no applications actually implementing this API. - - The vtx support still reserves minors 192-223 and we would really - like to reuse those for upcoming new functionality. In the unlikely - event that new hardware appears that wants to use the functionality - provided by the vtx API, then that functionality should be build - around the sliced VBI API instead. -Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> - ---------------------------- What: IRQF_DISABLED @@ -530,16 +496,6 @@ Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> ---------------------------- -What: old ieee1394 subsystem (CONFIG_IEEE1394) -When: 2.6.37 -Files: drivers/ieee1394/ except init_ohci1394_dma.c -Why: superseded by drivers/firewire/ (CONFIG_FIREWIRE) which offers more - features, better performance, and better security, all with smaller - and more modern code base -Who: Stefan Richter <stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de> - ----------------------------- - What: The acpi_sleep=s4_nonvs command line option When: 2.6.37 Files: arch/x86/kernel/acpi/sleep.c @@ -564,3 +520,59 @@ Who: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp> ---------------------------- +What: namespace cgroup (ns_cgroup) +When: 2.6.38 +Why: The ns_cgroup leads to some problems: + * cgroup creation is out-of-control + * cgroup name can conflict when pids are looping + * it is not possible to have a single process handling + a lot of namespaces without falling in a exponential creation time + * we may want to create a namespace without creating a cgroup + + The ns_cgroup is replaced by a compatibility flag 'clone_children', + where a newly created cgroup will copy the parent cgroup values. + The userspace has to manually create a cgroup and add a task to + the 'tasks' file. +Who: Daniel Lezcano <daniel.lezcano@free.fr> + +---------------------------- + +What: iwlwifi disable_hw_scan module parameters +When: 2.6.40 +Why: Hareware scan is the prefer method for iwlwifi devices for + scanning operation. Remove software scan support for all the + iwlwifi devices. + +Who: Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com> + +---------------------------- + +What: access to nfsd auth cache through sys_nfsservctl or '.' files + in the 'nfsd' filesystem. +When: 2.6.40 +Why: This is a legacy interface which have been replaced by a more + dynamic cache. Continuing to maintain this interface is an + unnecessary burden. +Who: NeilBrown <neilb@suse.de> + +---------------------------- + +What: i2c_adapter.id +When: June 2011 +Why: This field is deprecated. I2C device drivers shouldn't change their + behavior based on the underlying I2C adapter. Instead, the I2C + adapter driver should instantiate the I2C devices and provide the + needed platform-specific information. +Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> + +---------------------------- + +What: cancel_rearming_delayed_work[queue]() +When: 2.6.39 + +Why: The functions have been superceded by cancel_delayed_work_sync() + quite some time ago. The conversion is trivial and there is no + in-kernel user left. +Who: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> + +---------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX index 4303614..8c624a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX @@ -96,8 +96,6 @@ seq_file.txt - how to use the seq_file API sharedsubtree.txt - a description of shared subtrees for namespaces. -smbfs.txt - - info on using filesystems with the SMB protocol (Win 3.11 and NT). spufs.txt - info and mount options for the SPU filesystem used on Cell. sysfs-pci.txt diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt index f9765e8..b22abba 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ OPTIONS This can be used to share devices/named pipes/sockets between hosts. This functionality will be expanded in later versions. - access there are three access modes. + access there are four access modes. user = if a user tries to access a file on v9fs filesystem for the first time, v9fs sends an attach command (Tattach) for that user. @@ -120,6 +120,8 @@ OPTIONS the files on the mounted filesystem any = v9fs does single attach and performs all operations as one user + client = ACL based access check on the 9p client + side for access validation cachetag cache tag to use the specified persistent cache. cache tags for existing cache sessions can be listed at diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking index 2db4283..977d891 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking @@ -9,23 +9,25 @@ be able to use diff(1). --------------------------- dentry_operations -------------------------- prototypes: - int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, int); - int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); + int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + struct qstr *); + int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *); int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); char *(*d_dname)((struct dentry *dentry, char *buffer, int buflen); locking rules: - none have BKL - dcache_lock rename_lock ->d_lock may block -d_revalidate: no no no yes -d_hash no no no yes -d_compare: no yes no no -d_delete: yes no yes no -d_release: no no no yes -d_iput: no no no yes + rename_lock ->d_lock may block rcu-walk +d_revalidate: no no yes (ref-walk) maybe +d_hash no no no maybe +d_compare: yes no no maybe +d_delete: no yes no no +d_release: no no yes no +d_iput: no no yes no d_dname: no no no no --------------------------- inode_operations --------------------------- @@ -42,18 +44,23 @@ ata *); int (*rename) (struct inode *, struct dentry *, struct inode *, struct dentry *); int (*readlink) (struct dentry *, char __user *,int); - int (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); + void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *); void (*truncate) (struct inode *); - int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *); + int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int); + int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int); int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *, struct dentry *, struct kstat *); int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int); ssize_t (*getxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *, void *, size_t); ssize_t (*listxattr) (struct dentry *, char *, size_t); int (*removexattr) (struct dentry *, const char *); + void (*truncate_range)(struct inode *, loff_t, loff_t); + long (*fallocate)(struct inode *inode, int mode, loff_t offset, loff_t len); + int (*fiemap)(struct inode *, struct fiemap_extent_info *, u64 start, u64 len); locking rules: - all may block, none have BKL + all may block i_mutex(inode) lookup: yes create: yes @@ -66,19 +73,24 @@ rmdir: yes (both) (see below) rename: yes (all) (see below) readlink: no follow_link: no +put_link: no truncate: yes (see below) setattr: yes -permission: no +permission: no (may not block if called in rcu-walk mode) +check_acl: no getattr: no setxattr: yes getxattr: no listxattr: no removexattr: yes +truncate_range: yes +fallocate: no +fiemap: no Additionally, ->rmdir(), ->unlink() and ->rename() have ->i_mutex on victim. cross-directory ->rename() has (per-superblock) ->s_vfs_rename_sem. ->truncate() is never called directly - it's a callback, not a -method. It's called by vmtruncate() - library function normally used by +method. It's called by vmtruncate() - deprecated library function used by ->setattr(). Locking information above applies to that call (i.e. is inherited from ->setattr() - vmtruncate() is used when ATTR_SIZE had been passed). @@ -91,7 +103,7 @@ prototypes: struct inode *(*alloc_inode)(struct super_block *sb); void (*destroy_inode)(struct inode *); void (*dirty_inode) (struct inode *); - int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, int); + int (*write_inode) (struct inode *, struct writeback_control *wbc); int (*drop_inode) (struct inode *); void (*evict_inode) (struct inode *); void (*put_super) (struct super_block *); @@ -105,10 +117,10 @@ prototypes: int (*show_options)(struct seq_file *, struct vfsmount *); ssize_t (*quota_read)(struct super_block *, int, char *, size_t, loff_t); ssize_t (*quota_write)(struct super_block *, int, const char *, size_t, loff_t); + int (*bdev_try_to_free_page)(struct super_block*, struct page*, gfp_t); locking rules: All may block [not true, see below] - None have BKL s_umount alloc_inode: destroy_inode: @@ -127,6 +139,7 @@ umount_begin: no show_options: no (namespace_sem) quota_read: no (see below) quota_write: no (see below) +bdev_try_to_free_page: no (see below) ->statfs() has s_umount (shared) when called by ustat(2) (native or compat), but that's an accident of bad API; s_umount is used to pin @@ -139,19 +152,25 @@ be the only ones operating on the quota file by the quota code (via dqio_sem) (unless an admin really wants to screw up something and writes to quota files with quotas on). For other details about locking see also dquot_operations section. +->bdev_try_to_free_page is called from the ->releasepage handler of +the block device inode. See there for more details. --------------------------- file_system_type --------------------------- prototypes: int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int, const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *); + struct dentry *(*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int, + const char *, void *); void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); locking rules: - may block BKL -get_sb yes no -kill_sb yes no + may block +get_sb yes +mount yes +kill_sb yes ->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount (exclusive on ->s_umount). +->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry. ->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it, unlocks and drops the reference. @@ -173,28 +192,38 @@ prototypes: sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); + void (*freepage)(struct page *); int (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov, loff_t offset, unsigned long nr_segs); - int (*launder_page) (struct page *); + int (*get_xip_mem)(struct address_space *, pgoff_t, int, void **, + unsigned long *); + int (*migratepage)(struct address_space *, struct page *, struct page *); + int (*launder_page)(struct page *); + int (*is_partially_uptodate)(struct page *, read_descriptor_t *, unsigned long); + int (*error_remove_page)(struct address_space *, struct page *); locking rules: - All except set_page_dirty may block - - BKL PageLocked(page) i_mutex -writepage: no yes, unlocks (see below) -readpage: no yes, unlocks -sync_page: no maybe -writepages: no -set_page_dirty no no -readpages: no -write_begin: no locks the page yes -write_end: no yes, unlocks yes -perform_write: no n/a yes -bmap: no -invalidatepage: no yes -releasepage: no yes -direct_IO: no -launder_page: no yes + All except set_page_dirty and freepage may block + + PageLocked(page) i_mutex +writepage: yes, unlocks (see below) +readpage: yes, unlocks +sync_page: maybe +writepages: +set_page_dirty no +readpages: +write_begin: locks the page yes +write_end: yes, unlocks yes +bmap: +invalidatepage: yes +releasepage: yes +freepage: yes +direct_IO: +get_xip_mem: maybe +migratepage: yes (both) +launder_page: yes +is_partially_uptodate: yes +error_remove_page: yes ->write_begin(), ->write_end(), ->sync_page() and ->readpage() may be called from the request handler (/dev/loop). @@ -274,9 +303,8 @@ under spinlock (it cannot block) and is sometimes called with the page not locked. ->bmap() is currently used by legacy ioctl() (FIBMAP) provided by some -filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away. All -instances do not actually need the BKL. Please, keep it that way and don't -breed new callers. +filesystems and by the swapper. The latter will eventually go away. Please, +keep it that way and don't breed new callers. ->invalidatepage() is called when the filesystem must attempt to drop some or all of the buffers from the page when it is being truncated. It @@ -288,55 +316,46 @@ buffers from the page in preparation for freeing it. It returns zero to indicate that the buffers are (or may be) freeable. If ->releasepage is zero, the kernel assumes that the fs has no private interest in the buffers. + ->freepage() is called when the kernel is done dropping the page +from the page cache. + ->launder_page() may be called prior to releasing a page if it is still found to be dirty. It returns zero if the page was successfully cleaned, or an error value if not. Note that in order to prevent the page getting mapped back in and redirtied, it needs to be kept locked across the entire operation. - Note: currently almost all instances of address_space methods are -using BKL for internal serialization and that's one of the worst sources -of contention. Normally they are calling library functions (in fs/buffer.c) -and pass foo_get_block() as a callback (on local block-based filesystems, -indeed). BKL is not needed for library stuff and is usually taken by -foo_get_block(). It's an overkill, since block bitmaps can be protected by -internal fs locking and real critical areas are much smaller than the areas -filesystems protect now. - ----------------------- file_lock_operations ------------------------------ prototypes: - void (*fl_insert)(struct file_lock *); /* lock insertion callback */ - void (*fl_remove)(struct file_lock *); /* lock removal callback */ void (*fl_copy_lock)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); void (*fl_release_private)(struct file_lock *); locking rules: - BKL may block -fl_insert: yes no -fl_remove: yes no -fl_copy_lock: yes no -fl_release_private: yes yes + file_lock_lock may block +fl_copy_lock: yes no +fl_release_private: maybe no ----------------------- lock_manager_operations --------------------------- prototypes: int (*fl_compare_owner)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); void (*fl_notify)(struct file_lock *); /* unblock callback */ - void (*fl_copy_lock)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); + int (*fl_grant)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *, int); void (*fl_release_private)(struct file_lock *); void (*fl_break)(struct file_lock *); /* break_lease callback */ + int (*fl_mylease)(struct file_lock *, struct file_lock *); + int (*fl_change)(struct file_lock **, int); locking rules: - BKL may block -fl_compare_owner: yes no -fl_notify: yes no -fl_copy_lock: yes no -fl_release_private: yes yes -fl_break: yes no - - Currently only NFSD and NLM provide instances of this class. None of the -them block. If you have out-of-tree instances - please, show up. Locking -in that area will change. + file_lock_lock may block +fl_compare_owner: yes no +fl_notify: yes no +fl_grant: no no +fl_release_private: maybe no +fl_break: yes no +fl_mylease: yes no +fl_change yes no + --------------------------- buffer_head ----------------------------------- prototypes: void (*b_end_io)(struct buffer_head *bh, int uptodate); @@ -349,21 +368,36 @@ call this method upon the IO completion. --------------------------- block_device_operations ----------------------- prototypes: - int (*open) (struct inode *, struct file *); - int (*release) (struct inode *, struct file *); - int (*ioctl) (struct inode *, struct file *, unsigned, unsigned long); + int (*open) (struct block_device *, fmode_t); + int (*release) (struct gendisk *, fmode_t); + int (*ioctl) (struct block_device *, fmode_t, unsigned, unsigned long); + int (*compat_ioctl) (struct block_device *, fmode_t, unsigned, unsigned long); + int (*direct_access) (struct block_device *, sector_t, void **, unsigned long *); int (*media_changed) (struct gendisk *); + void (*unlock_native_capacity) (struct gendisk *); int (*revalidate_disk) (struct gendisk *); + int (*getgeo)(struct block_device *, struct hd_geometry *); + void (*swap_slot_free_notify) (struct block_device *, unsigned long); locking rules: - BKL bd_sem -open: yes yes -release: yes yes -ioctl: yes no -media_changed: no no -revalidate_disk: no no + bd_mutex +open: yes +release: yes +ioctl: no +compat_ioctl: no +direct_access: no +media_changed: no +unlock_native_capacity: no +revalidate_disk: no +getgeo: no +swap_slot_free_notify: no (see below) + +media_changed, unlock_native_capacity and revalidate_disk are called only from +check_disk_change(). + +swap_slot_free_notify is called with swap_lock and sometimes the page lock +held. -The last two are called only from check_disk_change(). --------------------------- file_operations ------------------------------- prototypes: @@ -395,34 +429,21 @@ prototypes: unsigned long (*get_unmapped_area)(struct file *, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long, unsigned long); int (*check_flags)(int); + int (*flock) (struct file *, int, struct file_lock *); + ssize_t (*splice_write)(struct pipe_inode_info *, struct file *, loff_t *, + size_t, unsigned int); + ssize_t (*splice_read)(struct file *, loff_t *, struct pipe_inode_info *, + size_t, unsigned int); + int (*setlease)(struct file *, long, struct file_lock **); }; locking rules: - All may block. - BKL -llseek: no (see below) -read: no -aio_read: no -write: no -aio_write: no -readdir: no -poll: no -unlocked_ioctl: no -compat_ioctl: no -mmap: no -open: no -flush: no -release: no -fsync: no (see below) -aio_fsync: no -fasync: no -lock: yes -readv: no -writev: no -sendfile: no -sendpage: no -get_unmapped_area: no -check_flags: no + All may block except for ->setlease. + No VFS locks held on entry except for ->fsync and ->setlease. + +->fsync() has i_mutex on inode. + +->setlease has the file_list_lock held and must not sleep. ->llseek() locking has moved from llseek to the individual llseek implementations. If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you @@ -432,17 +453,10 @@ mutex or just to use i_size_read() instead. Note: this does not protect the file->f_pos against concurrent modifications since this is something the userspace has to take care about. -Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive -loads and dropping BKL on ->release() helps to get rid of that (we still -grab BKL for cases when we close a file that had been opened r/w, but that -can and should be done using the internal locking with smaller critical areas). -Current worst offender is ext2_get_block()... - -->fasync() is called without BKL protection, and is responsible for -maintaining the FASYNC bit in filp->f_flags. Most instances call -fasync_helper(), which does that maintenance, so it's not normally -something one needs to worry about. Return values > 0 will be mapped to -zero in the VFS layer. +->fasync() is responsible for maintaining the FASYNC bit in filp->f_flags. +Most instances call fasync_helper(), which does that maintenance, so it's +not normally something one needs to worry about. Return values > 0 will be +mapped to zero in the VFS layer. ->readdir() and ->ioctl() on directories must be changed. Ideally we would move ->readdir() to inode_operations and use a separate method for directory @@ -453,8 +467,6 @@ components. And there are other reasons why the current interface is a mess... ->read on directories probably must go away - we should just enforce -EISDIR in sys_read() and friends. -->fsync() has i_mutex on inode. - --------------------------- dquot_operations ------------------------------- prototypes: int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *); @@ -489,12 +501,12 @@ prototypes: int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int); locking rules: - BKL mmap_sem PageLocked(page) -open: no yes -close: no yes -fault: no yes can return with page locked -page_mkwrite: no yes can return with page locked -access: no yes + mmap_sem PageLocked(page) +open: yes +close: yes +fault: yes can return with page locked +page_mkwrite: yes can return with page locked +access: yes ->fault() is called when a previously not present pte is about to be faulted in. The filesystem must find and return the page associated @@ -521,6 +533,3 @@ VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs. (if you break something or notice that it is broken and do not fix it yourself - at least put it here) - -ipc/shm.c::shm_delete() - may need BKL. -->read() and ->write() in many drivers are (probably) missing BKL. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c index d428cc9..fd53869 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example_explicit.c @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ static ssize_t childless_storeme_write(struct childless *childless, char *p = (char *) page; tmp = simple_strtoul(p, &p, 10); - if (!p || (*p && (*p != '\n'))) + if ((*p != '\0') && (*p != '\n')) return -EINVAL; if (tmp > INT_MAX) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 79334ed..0000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/dentry-locking.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ -RCU-based dcache locking model -============================== - -On many workloads, the most common operation on dcache is to look up a -dentry, given a parent dentry and the name of the child. Typically, -for every open(), stat() etc., the dentry corresponding to the -pathname will be looked up by walking the tree starting with the first -component of the pathname and using that dentry along with the next -component to look up the next level and so on. Since it is a frequent -operation for workloads like multiuser environments and web servers, -it is important to optimize this path. - -Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup and thus in -every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk -algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and -walking as many cached path component dentries as possible. This -significantly decreases the number of acquisition of -dcache_lock. However it also increases the lock hold time -significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines. Since -2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU -to make dcache look-up lock-free. - -The current dcache locking model is not very different from the -existing dcache locking model. Prior to 2.5.62 kernel, dcache_lock -protected the hash chain, d_child, d_alias, d_lru lists as well as -d_inode and several other things like mount look-up. RCU-based changes -affect only the way the hash chain is protected. For everything else -the dcache_lock must be taken for both traversing as well as -updating. The hash chain updates too take the dcache_lock. The -significant change is the way d_lookup traverses the hash chain, it -doesn't acquire the dcache_lock for this and rely on RCU to ensure -that the dentry has not been *freed*. - - -Dcache locking details -====================== - -For many multi-user workloads, open() and stat() on files are very -frequently occurring operations. Both involve walking of path names to -find the dentry corresponding to the concerned file. In 2.4 kernel, -dcache_lock was held during look-up of each path component. Contention -and cache-line bouncing of this global lock caused significant -scalability problems. With the introduction of RCU in Linux kernel, -this was worked around by making the look-up of path components during -path walking lock-free. - - -Safe lock-free look-up of dcache hash table -=========================================== - -Dcache is a complex data structure with the hash table entries also -linked together in other lists. In 2.4 kernel, dcache_lock protected -all the lists. We applied RCU only on hash chain walking. The rest of -the lists are still protected by dcache_lock. Some of the important -changes are : - -1. The deletion from hash chain is done using hlist_del_rcu() macro - which doesn't initialize next pointer of the deleted dentry and - this allows us to walk safely lock-free while a deletion is - happening. - -2. Insertion of a dentry into the hash table is done using - hlist_add_head_rcu() which take care of ordering the writes - the - writes to the dentry must be visible before the dentry is - inserted. This works in conjunction with hlist_for_each_rcu(), - which has since been replaced by hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), while - walking the hash chain. The only requirement is that all - initialization to the dentry must be done before - hlist_add_head_rcu() since we don't have dcache_lock protection - while traversing the hash chain. This isn't different from the - existing code. - -3. The dentry looked up without holding dcache_lock by cannot be - returned for walking if it is unhashed. It then may have a NULL - d_inode or other bogosity since RCU doesn't protect the other - fields in the dentry. We therefore use a flag DCACHE_UNHASHED to - indicate unhashed dentries and use this in conjunction with a - per-dentry lock (d_lock). Once looked up without the dcache_lock, - we acquire the per-dentry lock (d_lock) and check if the dentry is - unhashed. If so, the look-up is failed. If not, the reference count - of the dentry is increased and the dentry is returned. - -4. Once a dentry is looked up, it must be ensured during the path walk - for that component it doesn't go away. In pre-2.5.10 code, this was - done holding a reference to the dentry. dcache_rcu does the same. - In some sense, dcache_rcu path walking looks like the pre-2.5.10 - version. - -5. All dentry hash chain updates must take the dcache_lock as well as - the per-dentry lock in that order. dput() does this to ensure that - a dentry that has just been looked up in another CPU doesn't get - deleted before dget() can be done on it. - -6. There are several ways to do reference counting of RCU protected - objects. One such example is in ipv4 route cache where deferred - freeing (using call_rcu()) is done as soon as the reference count - goes to zero. This cannot be done in the case of dentries because - tearing down of dentries require blocking (dentry_iput()) which - isn't supported from RCU callbacks. Instead, tearing down of - dentries happen synchronously in dput(), but actual freeing happens - later when RCU grace period is over. This allows safe lock-free - walking of the hash chains, but a matched dentry may have been - partially torn down. The checking of DCACHE_UNHASHED flag with - d_lock held detects such dentries and prevents them from being - returned from look-up. - - -Maintaining POSIX rename semantics -================================== - -Since look-up of dentries is lock-free, it can race against a -concurrent rename operation. For example, during rename of file A to -B, look-up of either A or B must succeed. So, if look-up of B happens -after A has been removed from the hash chain but not added to the new -hash chain, it may fail. Also, a comparison while the name is being -written concurrently by a rename may result in false positive matches -violating rename semantics. Issues related to race with rename are -handled as described below : - -1. Look-up can be done in two ways - d_lookup() which is safe from - simultaneous renames and __d_lookup() which is not. If - __d_lookup() fails, it must be followed up by a d_lookup() to - correctly determine whether a dentry is in the hash table or - not. d_lookup() protects look-ups using a sequence lock - (rename_lock). - -2. The name associated with a dentry (d_name) may be changed if a - rename is allowed to happen simultaneously. To avoid memcmp() in - __d_lookup() go out of bounds due to a rename and false positive - comparison, the name comparison is done while holding the - per-dentry lock. This prevents concurrent renames during this - operation. - -3. Hash table walking during look-up may move to a different bucket as - the current dentry is moved to a different bucket due to rename. - But we use hlists in dcache hash table and they are - null-terminated. So, even if a dentry moves to a different bucket, - hash chain walk will terminate. [with a list_head list, it may not - since termination is when the list_head in the original bucket is - reached]. Since we redo the d_parent check and compare name while - holding d_lock, lock-free look-up will not race against d_move(). - -4. There can be a theoretical race when a dentry keeps coming back to - original bucket due to double moves. Due to this look-up may - consider that it has never moved and can end up in a infinite loop. - But this is not any worse that theoretical livelocks we already - have in the kernel. - - -Important guidelines for filesystem developers related to dcache_rcu -==================================================================== - -1. Existing dcache interfaces (pre-2.5.62) exported to filesystem - don't change. Only dcache internal implementation changes. However - filesystems *must not* delete from the dentry hash chains directly - using the list macros like allowed earlier. They must use dcache - APIs like d_drop() or __d_drop() depending on the situation. - -2. d_flags is now protected by a per-dentry lock (d_lock). All access - to d_flags must be protected by it. - -3. For a hashed dentry, checking of d_count needs to be protected by - d_lock. - - -Papers and other documentation on dcache locking -================================================ - -1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124). - -2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html - - - diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index e1def17..6ab9442 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -353,6 +353,20 @@ noauto_da_alloc replacing existing files via patterns such as system crashes before the delayed allocation blocks are forced to disk. +noinit_itable Do not initialize any uninitialized inode table + blocks in the background. This feature may be + used by installation CD's so that the install + process can complete as quickly as possible; the + inode table initialization process would then be + deferred until the next time the file system + is unmounted. + +init_itable=n The lazy itable init code will wait n times the + number of milliseconds it took to zero out the + previous block group's inode table. This + minimizes the impact on the systme performance + while file system's inode table is being initialized. + discard Controls whether ext4 should issue discard/TRIM nodiscard(*) commands to the underlying block device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD devices diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX index 2f68cd6..a57e124 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/00-INDEX @@ -12,5 +12,9 @@ nfs-rdma.txt - how to install and setup the Linux NFS/RDMA client and server software nfsroot.txt - short guide on setting up a diskless box with NFS root filesystem. +pnfs.txt + - short explanation of some of the internals of the pnfs client code rpc-cache.txt - introduction to the caching mechanisms in the sunrpc layer. +idmapper.txt + - information for configuring request-keys to be used by idmapper diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9b4192 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + +========= +ID Mapper +========= +Id mapper is used by NFS to translate user and group ids into names, and to +translate user and group names into ids. Part of this translation involves +performing an upcall to userspace to request the information. Id mapper will +user request-key to perform this upcall and cache the result. The program +/usr/sbin/nfs.idmap should be called by request-key, and will perform the +translation and initialize a key with the resulting information. + + NFS_USE_NEW_IDMAPPER must be selected when configuring the kernel to use this + feature. + +=========== +Configuring +=========== +The file /etc/request-key.conf will need to be modified so /sbin/request-key can +direct the upcall. The following line should be added: + +#OP TYPE DESCRIPTION CALLOUT INFO PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ... +#====== ======= =============== =============== =============================== +create id_resolver * * /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap %k %d 600 + +This will direct all id_resolver requests to the program /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap. +The last parameter, 600, defines how many seconds into the future the key will +expire. This parameter is optional for /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap. When the timeout +is not specified, nfs.idmap will default to 600 seconds. + +id mapper uses for key descriptions: + uid: Find the UID for the given user + gid: Find the GID for the given group + user: Find the user name for the given UID + group: Find the group name for the given GID + +You can handle any of these individually, rather than using the generic upcall +program. If you would like to use your own program for a uid lookup then you +would edit your request-key.conf so it look similar to this: + +#OP TYPE DESCRIPTION CALLOUT INFO PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ... +#====== ======= =============== =============== =============================== +create id_resolver uid:* * /some/other/program %k %d 600 +create id_resolver * * /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap %k %d 600 + +Notice that the new line was added above the line for the generic program. +request-key will find the first matching line and corresponding program. In +this case, /some/other/program will handle all uid lookups and +/usr/sbin/nfs.idmap will handle gid, user, and group lookups. + +See <file:Documentation/keys-request-keys.txt> for more information about the +request-key function. + + +========= +nfs.idmap +========= +nfs.idmap is designed to be called by request-key, and should not be run "by +hand". This program takes two arguments, a serialized key and a key +description. The serialized key is first converted into a key_serial_t, and +then passed as an argument to keyctl_instantiate (both are part of keyutils.h). + +The actual lookups are performed by functions found in nfsidmap.h. nfs.idmap +determines the correct function to call by looking at the first part of the +description string. For example, a uid lookup description will appear as +"uid:user@domain". + +nfs.idmap will return 0 if the key was instantiated, and non-zero otherwise. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt index f2430a7..90c71c6 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt @@ -159,6 +159,28 @@ ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf> Default: any +nfsrootdebug + + This parameter enables debugging messages to appear in the kernel + log at boot time so that administrators can verify that the correct + NFS mount options, server address, and root path are passed to the + NFS client. + + +rdinit=<executable file> + + To specify which file contains the program that starts system + initialization, administrators can use this command line parameter. + The default value of this parameter is "/init". If the specified + file exists and the kernel can execute it, root filesystem related + kernel command line parameters, including `nfsroot=', are ignored. + + A description of the process of mounting the root file system can be + found in: + + Documentation/early-userspace/README + + 3.) Boot Loader diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc0b9cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +Reference counting in pnfs: +========================== + +The are several inter-related caches. We have layouts which can +reference multiple devices, each of which can reference multiple data servers. +Each data server can be referenced by multiple devices. Each device +can be referenced by multiple layouts. To keep all of this straight, +we need to reference count. + + +struct pnfs_layout_hdr +---------------------- +The on-the-wire command LAYOUTGET corresponds to struct +pnfs_layout_segment, usually referred to by the variable name lseg. +Each nfs_inode may hold a pointer to a cache of of these layout +segments in nfsi->layout, of type struct pnfs_layout_hdr. + +We reference the header for the inode pointing to it, across each +outstanding RPC call that references it (LAYOUTGET, LAYOUTRETURN, +LAYOUTCOMMIT), and for each lseg held within. + +Each header is also (when non-empty) put on a list associated with +struct nfs_client (cl_layouts). Being put on this list does not bump +the reference count, as the layout is kept around by the lseg that +keeps it in the list. + +deviceid_cache +-------------- +lsegs reference device ids, which are resolved per nfs_client and +layout driver type. The device ids are held in a RCU cache (struct +nfs4_deviceid_cache). The cache itself is referenced across each +mount. The entries (struct nfs4_deviceid) themselves are held across +the lifetime of each lseg referencing them. + +RCU is used because the deviceid is basically a write once, read many +data structure. The hlist size of 32 buckets needs better +justification, but seems reasonable given that we can have multiple +deviceid's per filesystem, and multiple filesystems per nfs_client. + +The hash code is copied from the nfsd code base. A discussion of +hashing and variations of this algorithm can be found at: +http://groups.google.com/group/comp.lang.c/browse_thread/thread/9522965e2b8d3809 + +data server cache +----------------- +file driver devices refer to data servers, which are kept in a module +level cache. Its reference is held over the lifetime of the deviceid +pointing to it. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt index 1f7ae14..5393e66 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt @@ -87,3 +87,10 @@ dir_resv_level= (*) By default, directory reservations will scale with file reservations - users should rarely need to change this value. If allocation reservations are turned off, this option will have no effect. +coherency=full (*) Disallow concurrent O_DIRECT writes, cluster inode + lock will be taken to force other nodes drop cache, + therefore full cluster coherency is guaranteed even + for O_DIRECT writes. +coherency=buffered Allow concurrent O_DIRECT writes without EX lock among + nodes, which gains high performance at risk of getting + stale data on other nodes. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb59c8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt @@ -0,0 +1,382 @@ +Path walking and name lookup locking +==================================== + +Path resolution is the finding a dentry corresponding to a path name string, by +performing a path walk. Typically, for every open(), stat() etc., the path name +will be resolved. Paths are resolved by walking the namespace tree, starting +with the first component of the pathname (eg. root or cwd) with a known dentry, +then finding the child of that dentry, which is named the next component in the +path string. Then repeating the lookup from the child dentry and finding its +child with the next element, and so on. + +Since it is a frequent operation for workloads like multiuser environments and +web servers, it is important to optimize this code. + +Path walking synchronisation history: +Prior to 2.5.10, dcache_lock was acquired in d_lookup (dcache hash lookup) and +thus in every component during path look-up. Since 2.5.10 onwards, fast-walk +algorithm changed this by holding the dcache_lock at the beginning and walking +as many cached path component dentries as possible. This significantly +decreases the number of acquisition of dcache_lock. However it also increases +the lock hold time significantly and affects performance in large SMP machines. +Since 2.5.62 kernel, dcache has been using a new locking model that uses RCU to +make dcache look-up lock-free. + +All the above algorithms required taking a lock and reference count on the +dentry that was looked up, so that may be used as the basis for walking the +next path element. This is inefficient and unscalable. It is inefficient +because of the locks and atomic operations required for every dentry element +slows things down. It is not scalable because many parallel applications that +are path-walk intensive tend to do path lookups starting from a common dentry +(usually, the root "/" or current working directory). So contention on these +common path elements causes lock and cacheline queueing. + +Since 2.6.38, RCU is used to make a significant part of the entire path walk +(including dcache look-up) completely "store-free" (so, no locks, atomics, or +even stores into cachelines of common dentries). This is known as "rcu-walk" +path walking. + +Path walking overview +===================== + +A name string specifies a start (root directory, cwd, fd-relative) and a +sequence of elements (directory entry names), which together refer to a path in +the namespace. A path is represented as a (dentry, vfsmount) tuple. The name +elements are sub-strings, seperated by '/'. + +Name lookups will want to find a particular path that a name string refers to +(usually the final element, or parent of final element). This is done by taking +the path given by the name's starting point (which we know in advance -- eg. +current->fs->cwd or current->fs->root) as the first parent of the lookup. Then +iteratively for each subsequent name element, look up the child of the current +parent with the given name and if it is not the desired entry, make it the +parent for the next lookup. + +A parent, of course, must be a directory, and we must have appropriate +permissions on the parent inode to be able to walk into it. + +Turning the child into a parent for the next lookup requires more checks and +procedures. Symlinks essentially substitute the symlink name for the target +name in the name string, and require some recursive path walking. Mount points +must be followed into (thus changing the vfsmount that subsequent path elements +refer to), switching from the mount point path to the root of the particular +mounted vfsmount. These behaviours are variously modified depending on the +exact path walking flags. + +Path walking then must, broadly, do several particular things: +- find the start point of the walk; +- perform permissions and validity checks on inodes; +- perform dcache hash name lookups on (parent, name element) tuples; +- traverse mount points; +- traverse symlinks; +- lookup and create missing parts of the path on demand. + +Safe store-free look-up of dcache hash table +============================================ + +Dcache name lookup +------------------ +In order to lookup a dcache (parent, name) tuple, we take a hash on the tuple +and use that to select a bucket in the dcache-hash table. The list of entries +in that bucket is then walked, and we do a full comparison of each entry +against our (parent, name) tuple. + +The hash lists are RCU protected, so list walking is not serialised with +concurrent updates (insertion, deletion from the hash). This is a standard RCU +list application with the exception of renames, which will be covered below. + +Parent and name members of a dentry, as well as its membership in the dcache +hash, and its inode are protected by the per-dentry d_lock spinlock. A +reference is taken on the dentry (while the fields are verified under d_lock), +and this stabilises its d_inode pointer and actual inode. This gives a stable +point to perform the next step of our path walk against. + +These members are also protected by d_seq seqlock, although this offers +read-only protection and no durability of results, so care must be taken when +using d_seq for synchronisation (see seqcount based lookups, below). + +Renames +------- +Back to the rename case. In usual RCU protected lists, the only operations that +will happen to an object is insertion, and then eventually removal from the +list. The object will not be reused until an RCU grace period is complete. +This ensures the RCU list traversal primitives can run over the object without +problems (see RCU documentation for how this works). + +However when a dentry is renamed, its hash value can change, requiring it to be +moved to a new hash list. Allocating and inserting a new alias would be +expensive and also problematic for directory dentries. Latency would be far to +high to wait for a grace period after removing the dentry and before inserting +it in the new hash bucket. So what is done is to insert the dentry into the +new list immediately. + +However, when the dentry's list pointers are updated to point to objects in the +new list before waiting for a grace period, this can result in a concurrent RCU +lookup of the old list veering off into the new (incorrect) list and missing +the remaining dentries on the list. + +There is no fundamental problem with walking down the wrong list, because the +dentry comparisons will never match. However it is fatal to miss a matching +dentry. So a seqlock is used to detect when a rename has occurred, and so the +lookup can be retried. + + 1 2 3 + +---+ +---+ +---+ +hlist-->| N-+->| N-+->| N-+-> +head <--+-P |<-+-P |<-+-P | + +---+ +---+ +---+ + +Rename of dentry 2 may require it deleted from the above list, and inserted +into a new list. Deleting 2 gives the following list. + + 1 3 + +---+ +---+ (don't worry, the longer pointers do not +hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+-> impose a measurable performance overhead +head <--+-P |<--------+-P | on modern CPUs) + +---+ +---+ + ^ 2 ^ + | +---+ | + | | N-+----+ + +----+-P | + +---+ + +This is a standard RCU-list deletion, which leaves the deleted object's +pointers intact, so a concurrent list walker that is currently looking at +object 2 will correctly continue to object 3 when it is time to traverse the +next object. + +However, when inserting object 2 onto a new list, we end up with this: + + 1 3 + +---+ +---+ +hlist-->| N-+-------->| N-+-> +head <--+-P |<--------+-P | + +---+ +---+ + 2 + +---+ + | N-+----> + <----+-P | + +---+ + +Because we didn't wait for a grace period, there may be a concurrent lookup +still at 2. Now when it follows 2's 'next' pointer, it will walk off into +another list without ever having checked object 3. + +A related, but distinctly different, issue is that of rename atomicity versus +lookup operations. If a file is renamed from 'A' to 'B', a lookup must only +find either 'A' or 'B'. So if a lookup of 'A' returns NULL, a subsequent lookup +of 'B' must succeed (note the reverse is not true). + +Between deleting the dentry from the old hash list, and inserting it on the new +hash list, a lookup may find neither 'A' nor 'B' matching the dentry. The same +rename seqlock is also used to cover this race in much the same way, by +retrying a negative lookup result if a rename was in progress. + +Seqcount based lookups +---------------------- +In refcount based dcache lookups, d_lock is used to serialise access to +the dentry, stabilising it while comparing its name and parent and then +taking a reference count (the reference count then gives a stable place to +start the next part of the path walk from). + +As explained above, we would like to do path walking without taking locks or +reference counts on intermediate dentries along the path. To do this, a per +dentry seqlock (d_seq) is used to take a "coherent snapshot" of what the dentry +looks like (its name, parent, and inode). That snapshot is then used to start +the next part of the path walk. When loading the coherent snapshot under d_seq, +care must be taken to load the members up-front, and use those pointers rather +than reloading from the dentry later on (otherwise we'd have interesting things +like d_inode going NULL underneath us, if the name was unlinked). + +Also important is to avoid performing any destructive operations (pretty much: +no non-atomic stores to shared data), and to recheck the seqcount when we are +"done" with the operation. Retry or abort if the seqcount does not match. +Avoiding destructive or changing operations means we can easily unwind from +failure. + +What this means is that a caller, provided they are holding RCU lock to +protect the dentry object from disappearing, can perform a seqcount based +lookup which does not increment the refcount on the dentry or write to +it in any way. This returned dentry can be used for subsequent operations, +provided that d_seq is rechecked after that operation is complete. + +Inodes are also rcu freed, so the seqcount lookup dentry's inode may also be +queried for permissions. + +With this two parts of the puzzle, we can do path lookups without taking +locks or refcounts on dentry elements. + +RCU-walk path walking design +============================ + +Path walking code now has two distinct modes, ref-walk and rcu-walk. ref-walk +is the traditional[*] way of performing dcache lookups using d_lock to +serialise concurrent modifications to the dentry and take a reference count on +it. ref-walk is simple and obvious, and may sleep, take locks, etc while path +walking is operating on each dentry. rcu-walk uses seqcount based dentry +lookups, and can perform lookup of intermediate elements without any stores to +shared data in the dentry or inode. rcu-walk can not be applied to all cases, +eg. if the filesystem must sleep or perform non trivial operations, rcu-walk +must be switched to ref-walk mode. + +[*] RCU is still used for the dentry hash lookup in ref-walk, but not the full + path walk. + +Where ref-walk uses a stable, refcounted ``parent'' to walk the remaining +path string, rcu-walk uses a d_seq protected snapshot. When looking up a +child of this parent snapshot, we open d_seq critical section on the child +before closing d_seq critical section on the parent. This gives an interlocking +ladder of snapshots to walk down. + + + proc 101 + /----------------\ + / comm: "vi" \ + / fs.root: dentry0 \ + \ fs.cwd: dentry2 / + \ / + \----------------/ + +So when vi wants to open("/home/npiggin/test.c", O_RDWR), then it will +start from current->fs->root, which is a pinned dentry. Alternatively, +"./test.c" would start from cwd; both names refer to the same path in +the context of proc101. + + dentry 0 + +---------------------+ rcu-walk begins here, we note d_seq, check the + | name: "/" | inode's permission, and then look up the next + | inode: 10 | path element which is "home"... + | children:"home", ...| + +---------------------+ + | + dentry 1 V + +---------------------+ ... which brings us here. We find dentry1 via + | name: "home" | hash lookup, then note d_seq and compare name + | inode: 678 | string and parent pointer. When we have a match, + | children:"npiggin" | we now recheck the d_seq of dentry0. Then we + +---------------------+ check inode and look up the next element. + | + dentry2 V + +---------------------+ Note: if dentry0 is now modified, lookup is + | name: "npiggin" | not necessarily invalid, so we need only keep a + | inode: 543 | parent for d_seq verification, and grandparents + | children:"a.c", ... | can be forgotten. + +---------------------+ + | + dentry3 V + +---------------------+ At this point we have our destination dentry. + | name: "a.c" | We now take its d_lock, verify d_seq of this + | inode: 14221 | dentry. If that checks out, we can increment + | children:NULL | its refcount because we're holding d_lock. + +---------------------+ + +Taking a refcount on a dentry from rcu-walk mode, by taking its d_lock, +re-checking its d_seq, and then incrementing its refcount is called +"dropping rcu" or dropping from rcu-walk into ref-walk mode. + +It is, in some sense, a bit of a house of cards. If the seqcount check of the +parent snapshot fails, the house comes down, because we had closed the d_seq +section on the grandparent, so we have nothing left to stand on. In that case, +the path walk must be fully restarted (which we do in ref-walk mode, to avoid +live locks). It is costly to have a full restart, but fortunately they are +quite rare. + +When we reach a point where sleeping is required, or a filesystem callout +requires ref-walk, then instead of restarting the walk, we attempt to drop rcu +at the last known good dentry we have. Avoiding a full restart in ref-walk in +these cases is fundamental for performance and scalability because blocking +operations such as creates and unlinks are not uncommon. + +The detailed design for rcu-walk is like this: +* LOOKUP_RCU is set in nd->flags, which distinguishes rcu-walk from ref-walk. +* Take the RCU lock for the entire path walk, starting with the acquiring + of the starting path (eg. root/cwd/fd-path). So now dentry refcounts are + not required for dentry persistence. +* synchronize_rcu is called when unregistering a filesystem, so we can + access d_ops and i_ops during rcu-walk. +* Similarly take the vfsmount lock for the entire path walk. So now mnt + refcounts are not required for persistence. Also we are free to perform mount + lookups, and to assume dentry mount points and mount roots are stable up and + down the path. +* Have a per-dentry seqlock to protect the dentry name, parent, and inode, + so we can load this tuple atomically, and also check whether any of its + members have changed. +* Dentry lookups (based on parent, candidate string tuple) recheck the parent + sequence after the child is found in case anything changed in the parent + during the path walk. +* inode is also RCU protected so we can load d_inode and use the inode for + limited things. +* i_mode, i_uid, i_gid can be tested for exec permissions during path walk. +* i_op can be loaded. +* When the destination dentry is reached, drop rcu there (ie. take d_lock, + verify d_seq, increment refcount). +* If seqlock verification fails anywhere along the path, do a full restart + of the path lookup in ref-walk mode. -ECHILD tends to be used (for want of + a better errno) to signal an rcu-walk failure. + +The cases where rcu-walk cannot continue are: +* NULL dentry (ie. any uncached path element) +* Following links + +It may be possible eventually to make following links rcu-walk aware. + +Uncached path elements will always require dropping to ref-walk mode, at the +very least because i_mutex needs to be grabbed, and objects allocated. + +Final note: +"store-free" path walking is not strictly store free. We take vfsmount lock +and refcounts (both of which can be made per-cpu), and we also store to the +stack (which is essentially CPU-local), and we also have to take locks and +refcount on final dentry. + +The point is that shared data, where practically possible, is not locked +or stored into. The result is massive improvements in performance and +scalability of path resolution. + + +Interesting statistics +====================== + +The following table gives rcu lookup statistics for a few simple workloads +(2s12c24t Westmere, debian non-graphical system). Ungraceful are attempts to +drop rcu that fail due to d_seq failure and requiring the entire path lookup +again. Other cases are successful rcu-drops that are required before the final +element, nodentry for missing dentry, revalidate for filesystem revalidate +routine requiring rcu drop, permission for permission check requiring drop, +and link for symlink traversal requiring drop. + + rcu-lookups restart nodentry link revalidate permission +bootup 47121 0 4624 1010 10283 7852 +dbench 25386793 0 6778659(26.7%) 55 549 1156 +kbuild 2696672 10 64442(2.3%) 108764(4.0%) 1 1590 +git diff 39605 0 28 2 0 106 +vfstest 24185492 4945 708725(2.9%) 1076136(4.4%) 0 2651 + +What this shows is that failed rcu-walk lookups, ie. ones that are restarted +entirely with ref-walk, are quite rare. Even the "vfstest" case which +specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to excercise +such races is not showing a huge amount of restarts. + +Dropping from rcu-walk to ref-walk mean that we have encountered a dentry where +the reference count needs to be taken for some reason. This is either because +we have reached the target of the path walk, or because we have encountered a +condition that can't be resolved in rcu-walk mode. Ideally, we drop rcu-walk +only when we have reached the target dentry, so the other statistics show where +this does not happen. + +Note that a graceful drop from rcu-walk mode due to something such as the +dentry not existing (which can be common) is not necessarily a failure of +rcu-walk scheme, because some elements of the path may have been walked in +rcu-walk mode. The further we get from common path elements (such as cwd or +root), the less contended the dentry is likely to be. The closer we are to +common path elements, the more likely they will exist in dentry cache. + + +Papers and other documentation on dcache locking +================================================ + +1. Scaling dcache with RCU (http://linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=7124). + +2. http://lse.sourceforge.net/locking/dcache/dcache.html + + diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting index b12c895..07a32b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting @@ -216,7 +216,6 @@ had ->revalidate()) add calls in ->follow_link()/->readlink(). ->d_parent changes are not protected by BKL anymore. Read access is safe if at least one of the following is true: * filesystem has no cross-directory rename() - * dcache_lock is held * we know that parent had been locked (e.g. we are looking at ->d_parent of ->lookup() argument). * we are called from ->rename(). @@ -318,3 +317,71 @@ if it's zero is not *and* *never* *had* *been* enough. Final unlink() and iput( may happen while the inode is in the middle of ->write_inode(); e.g. if you blindly free the on-disk inode, you may end up doing that while ->write_inode() is writing to it. + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_delete() now only advises the dcache as to whether or not to cache +unreferenced dentries, and is now only called when the dentry refcount goes to +0. Even on 0 refcount transition, it must be able to tolerate being called 0, +1, or more times (eg. constant, idempotent). + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_compare() calling convention and locking rules are significantly +changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and +look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance. + +--- +[mandatory] + + .d_hash() calling convention and locking rules are significantly +changed. Read updated documentation in Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt (and +look at examples of other filesystems) for guidance. + +--- +[mandatory] + dcache_lock is gone, replaced by fine grained locks. See fs/dcache.c +for details of what locks to replace dcache_lock with in order to protect +particular things. Most of the time, a filesystem only needs ->d_lock, which +protects *all* the dcache state of a given dentry. + +-- +[mandatory] + + Filesystems must RCU-free their inodes, if they can have been accessed +via rcu-walk path walk (basically, if the file can have had a path name in the +vfs namespace). + + i_dentry and i_rcu share storage in a union, and the vfs expects +i_dentry to be reinitialized before it is freed, so an: + + INIT_LIST_HEAD(&inode->i_dentry); + +must be done in the RCU callback. + +-- +[recommended] + vfs now tries to do path walking in "rcu-walk mode", which avoids +atomic operations and scalability hazards on dentries and inodes (see +Documentation/filesystems/path-walk.txt). d_hash and d_compare changes (above) +are examples of the changes required to support this. For more complex +filesystem callbacks, the vfs drops out of rcu-walk mode before the fs call, so +no changes are required to the filesystem. However, this is costly and loses +the benefits of rcu-walk mode. We will begin to add filesystem callbacks that +are rcu-walk aware, shown below. Filesystems should take advantage of this +where possible. + +-- +[mandatory] + d_revalidate is a callback that is made on every path element (if +the filesystem provides it), which requires dropping out of rcu-walk mode. This +may now be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). -ECHILD should be +returned if the filesystem cannot handle rcu-walk. See +Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details. + + permission and check_acl are inode permission checks that are called +on many or all directory inodes on the way down a path walk (to check for +exec permission). These must now be rcu-walk aware (flags & IPERM_RCU). See +Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt for more details. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index a6aca87..9471225 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -136,6 +136,7 @@ Table 1-1: Process specific entries in /proc statm Process memory status information status Process status in human readable form wchan If CONFIG_KALLSYMS is set, a pre-decoded wchan + pagemap Page table stack Report full stack trace, enable via CONFIG_STACKTRACE smaps a extension based on maps, showing the memory consumption of each mapping @@ -370,17 +371,24 @@ Shared_Dirty: 0 kB Private_Clean: 0 kB Private_Dirty: 0 kB Referenced: 892 kB +Anonymous: 0 kB Swap: 0 kB KernelPageSize: 4 kB MMUPageSize: 4 kB -The first of these lines shows the same information as is displayed for the -mapping in /proc/PID/maps. The remaining lines show the size of the mapping, -the amount of the mapping that is currently resident in RAM, the "proportional -set size” (divide each shared page by the number of processes sharing it), the -number of clean and dirty shared pages in the mapping, and the number of clean -and dirty private pages in the mapping. The "Referenced" indicates the amount -of memory currently marked as referenced or accessed. +The first of these lines shows the same information as is displayed for the +mapping in /proc/PID/maps. The remaining lines show the size of the mapping +(size), the amount of the mapping that is currently resident in RAM (RSS), the +process' proportional share of this mapping (PSS), the number of clean and +dirty private pages in the mapping. Note that even a page which is part of a +MAP_SHARED mapping, but has only a single pte mapped, i.e. is currently used +by only one process, is accounted as private and not as shared. "Referenced" +indicates the amount of memory currently marked as referenced or accessed. +"Anonymous" shows the amount of memory that does not belong to any file. Even +a mapping associated with a file may contain anonymous pages: when MAP_PRIVATE +and a page is modified, the file page is replaced by a private anonymous copy. +"Swap" shows how much would-be-anonymous memory is also used, but out on +swap. This file is only present if the CONFIG_MMU kernel configuration option is enabled. @@ -397,6 +405,9 @@ To clear the bits for the file mapped pages associated with the process > echo 3 > /proc/PID/clear_refs Any other value written to /proc/PID/clear_refs will have no effect. +The /proc/pid/pagemap gives the PFN, which can be used to find the pageflags +using /proc/kpageflags and number of times a page is mapped using +/proc/kpagecount. For detailed explanation, see Documentation/vm/pagemap.txt. 1.2 Kernel data --------------- @@ -1170,6 +1181,30 @@ Table 1-12: Files in /proc/fs/ext4/<devname> mb_groups details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks .............................................................................. +2.0 /proc/consoles +------------------ +Shows registered system console lines. + +To see which character device lines are currently used for the system console +/dev/console, you may simply look into the file /proc/consoles: + + > cat /proc/consoles + tty0 -WU (ECp) 4:7 + ttyS0 -W- (Ep) 4:64 + +The columns are: + + device name of the device + operations R = can do read operations + W = can do write operations + U = can do unblank + flags E = it is enabled + C = it is prefered console + B = it is primary boot console + p = it is used for printk buffer + b = it is not a TTY but a Braille device + a = it is safe to use when cpu is offline + major:minor major and minor number of the device separated by a colon ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Summary diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt index fc0e39a..4ede421 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt @@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ replicas continue to be exactly same. # mount /dev/sd0 /tmp/a #ls /tmp/a - t1 t2 t2 + t1 t2 t3 #ls /mnt/a - t1 t2 t2 + t1 t2 t3 Note that the mount has propagated to the mount at /mnt as well. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 194fb0d..0000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -Smbfs is a filesystem that implements the SMB protocol, which is the -protocol used by Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95 and Windows NT. -Smbfs was inspired by Samba, the program written by Andrew Tridgell -that turns any Unix host into a file server for DOS or Windows clients. - -Smbfs is a SMB client, but uses parts of samba for its operation. For -more info on samba, including documentation, please go to -http://www.samba.org/ and then on to your nearest mirror. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index ed7e5ef..fbb324e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -325,7 +325,8 @@ struct inode_operations { void * (*follow_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); void (*put_link) (struct dentry *, struct nameidata *, void *); void (*truncate) (struct inode *); - int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, struct nameidata *); + int (*permission) (struct inode *, int, unsigned int); + int (*check_acl)(struct inode *, int, unsigned int); int (*setattr) (struct dentry *, struct iattr *); int (*getattr) (struct vfsmount *mnt, struct dentry *, struct kstat *); int (*setxattr) (struct dentry *, const char *,const void *,size_t,int); @@ -414,6 +415,13 @@ otherwise noted. permission: called by the VFS to check for access rights on a POSIX-like filesystem. + May be called in rcu-walk mode (flags & IPERM_RCU). If in rcu-walk + mode, the filesystem must check the permission without blocking or + storing to the inode. + + If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return + -ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode. + setattr: called by the VFS to set attributes for a file. This method is called by chmod(2) and related system calls. @@ -534,6 +542,7 @@ struct address_space_operations { sector_t (*bmap)(struct address_space *, sector_t); int (*invalidatepage) (struct page *, unsigned long); int (*releasepage) (struct page *, int); + void (*freepage)(struct page *); ssize_t (*direct_IO)(int, struct kiocb *, const struct iovec *iov, loff_t offset, unsigned long nr_segs); struct page* (*get_xip_page)(struct address_space *, sector_t, @@ -660,11 +669,10 @@ struct address_space_operations { releasepage: releasepage is called on PagePrivate pages to indicate that the page should be freed if possible. ->releasepage should remove any private data from the page and clear the - PagePrivate flag. It may also remove the page from the - address_space. If this fails for some reason, it may indicate - failure with a 0 return value. - This is used in two distinct though related cases. The first - is when the VM finds a clean page with no active users and + PagePrivate flag. If releasepage() fails for some reason, it must + indicate failure with a 0 return value. + releasepage() is used in two distinct though related cases. The + first is when the VM finds a clean page with no active users and wants to make it a free page. If ->releasepage succeeds, the page will be removed from the address_space and become free. @@ -679,6 +687,12 @@ struct address_space_operations { need to ensure this. Possibly it can clear the PageUptodate bit if it cannot free private data yet. + freepage: freepage is called once the page is no longer visible in + the page cache in order to allow the cleanup of any private + data. Since it may be called by the memory reclaimer, it + should not assume that the original address_space mapping still + exists, and it should not block. + direct_IO: called by the generic read/write routines to perform direct_IO - that is IO requests which bypass the page cache and transfer data directly between the storage and the @@ -841,9 +855,12 @@ defined: struct dentry_operations { int (*d_revalidate)(struct dentry *, struct nameidata *); - int (*d_hash) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_compare) (struct dentry *, struct qstr *, struct qstr *); - int (*d_delete)(struct dentry *); + int (*d_hash)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + struct qstr *); + int (*d_compare)(const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + const struct dentry *, const struct inode *, + unsigned int, const char *, const struct qstr *); + int (*d_delete)(const struct dentry *); void (*d_release)(struct dentry *); void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int); @@ -854,13 +871,45 @@ struct dentry_operations { dcache. Most filesystems leave this as NULL, because all their dentries in the dcache are valid - d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table + d_revalidate may be called in rcu-walk mode (nd->flags & LOOKUP_RCU). + If in rcu-walk mode, the filesystem must revalidate the dentry without + blocking or storing to the dentry, d_parent and d_inode should not be + used without care (because they can go NULL), instead nd->inode should + be used. + + If a situation is encountered that rcu-walk cannot handle, return + -ECHILD and it will be called again in ref-walk mode. + + d_hash: called when the VFS adds a dentry to the hash table. The first + dentry passed to d_hash is the parent directory that the name is + to be hashed into. The inode is the dentry's inode. + + Same locking and synchronisation rules as d_compare regarding + what is safe to dereference etc. + + d_compare: called to compare a dentry name with a given name. The first + dentry is the parent of the dentry to be compared, the second is + the parent's inode, then the dentry and inode (may be NULL) of the + child dentry. len and name string are properties of the dentry to be + compared. qstr is the name to compare it with. + + Must be constant and idempotent, and should not take locks if + possible, and should not or store into the dentry or inodes. + Should not dereference pointers outside the dentry or inodes without + lots of care (eg. d_parent, d_inode, d_name should not be used). + + However, our vfsmount is pinned, and RCU held, so the dentries and + inodes won't disappear, neither will our sb or filesystem module. + ->i_sb and ->d_sb may be used. - d_compare: called when a dentry should be compared with another + It is a tricky calling convention because it needs to be called under + "rcu-walk", ie. without any locks or references on things. - d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is - deleted. This means no-one is using the dentry, however it is - still valid and in the dcache + d_delete: called when the last reference to a dentry is dropped and the + dcache is deciding whether or not to cache it. Return 1 to delete + immediately, or 0 to cache the dentry. Default is NULL which means to + always cache a reachable dentry. d_delete must be constant and + idempotent. d_release: called when a dentry is really deallocated @@ -904,14 +953,11 @@ manipulate dentries: the usage count) dput: close a handle for a dentry (decrements the usage count). If - the usage count drops to 0, the "d_delete" method is called - and the dentry is placed on the unused list if the dentry is - still in its parents hash list. Putting the dentry on the - unused list just means that if the system needs some RAM, it - goes through the unused list of dentries and deallocates them. - If the dentry has already been unhashed and the usage count - drops to 0, in this case the dentry is deallocated after the - "d_delete" method is called + the usage count drops to 0, and the dentry is still in its + parent's hash, the "d_delete" method is called to check whether + it should be cached. If it should not be cached, or if the dentry + is not hashed, it is deleted. Otherwise cached dentries are put + into an LRU list to be reclaimed on memory shortage. d_drop: this unhashes a dentry from its parents hash list. A subsequent call to dput() will deallocate the dentry if its diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt index 96d0df2..7445bf3 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt @@ -794,17 +794,6 @@ designed. Roadmap: -2.6.37 Remove experimental tag from mount option - => should be roughly 6 months after initial merge - => enough time to: - => gain confidence and fix problems reported by early - adopters (a.k.a. guinea pigs) - => address worst performance regressions and undesired - behaviours - => start tuning/optimising code for parallelism - => start tuning/optimising algorithms consuming - excessive CPU time - 2.6.39 Switch default mount option to use delayed logging => should be roughly 12 months after initial merge => enough time to shake out remaining problems before next round of diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt index d96a6db..792faa3 100644 --- a/Documentation/gpio.txt +++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt @@ -109,17 +109,19 @@ use numbers 2000-2063 to identify GPIOs in a bank of I2C GPIO expanders. If you want to initialize a structure with an invalid GPIO number, use some negative number (perhaps "-EINVAL"); that will never be valid. To -test if a number could reference a GPIO, you may use this predicate: +test if such number from such a structure could reference a GPIO, you +may use this predicate: int gpio_is_valid(int number); A number that's not valid will be rejected by calls which may request or free GPIOs (see below). Other numbers may also be rejected; for -example, a number might be valid but unused on a given board. - -Whether a platform supports multiple GPIO controllers is currently a -platform-specific implementation issue. +example, a number might be valid but temporarily unused on a given board. +Whether a platform supports multiple GPIO controllers is a platform-specific +implementation issue, as are whether that support can leave "holes" in the space +of GPIO numbers, and whether new controllers can be added at runtime. Such issues +can affect things including whether adjacent GPIO numbers are both valid. Using GPIOs ----------- @@ -480,12 +482,16 @@ To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select" either ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB or ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB and arrange that its <asm/gpio.h> includes <asm-generic/gpio.h> and defines three functions: gpio_get_value(), gpio_set_value(), and gpio_cansleep(). -They may also want to provide a custom value for ARCH_NR_GPIOS. -ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB means that the gpio-lib code will always get compiled +It may also provide a custom value for ARCH_NR_GPIOS, so that it better +reflects the number of GPIOs in actual use on that platform, without +wasting static table space. (It should count both built-in/SoC GPIOs and +also ones on GPIO expanders. + +ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB means that the gpiolib code will always get compiled into the kernel on that architecture. -ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB means the gpio-lib code defaults to off and the user +ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB means the gpiolib code defaults to off and the user can enable it and build it into the kernel optionally. If neither of these options are selected, the platform does not support @@ -611,6 +617,16 @@ and have the following read/write attributes: is configured as an output, this value may be written; any nonzero value is treated as high. + If the pin can be configured as interrupt-generating interrupt + and if it has been configured to generate interrupts (see the + description of "edge"), you can poll(2) on that file and + poll(2) will return whenever the interrupt was triggered. If + you use poll(2), set the events POLLPRI and POLLERR. If you + use select(2), set the file descriptor in exceptfds. After + poll(2) returns, either lseek(2) to the beginning of the sysfs + file and read the new value or close the file and re-open it + to read the value. + "edge" ... reads as either "none", "rising", "falling", or "both". Write these strings to select the signal edge(s) that will make poll(2) on the "value" file return. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg index 1a07fd6..a7952c2 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg @@ -2,10 +2,6 @@ Kernel driver f71882fg ====================== Supported chips: - * Fintek F71808E - Prefix: 'f71808fg' - Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space - Datasheet: Not public * Fintek F71858FG Prefix: 'f71858fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 index 8d08bf0..38425f0 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87 @@ -22,6 +22,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'it8720' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) Datasheet: Not publicly available + * IT8721F/IT8758E + Prefix: 'it8721' + Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) + Datasheet: Not publicly available * SiS950 [clone of IT8705F] Prefix: 'it87' Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports) @@ -67,7 +71,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the IT8705F, IT8712F, IT8716F, -IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8726F and SiS950 chips. +IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F, IT8726F, IT8758E and SiS950 chips. These chips are 'Super I/O chips', supporting floppy disks, infrared ports, joysticks and other miscellaneous stuff. For hardware monitoring, they @@ -86,14 +90,15 @@ the driver won't notice and report changes in the VID value. The two upper VID bits share their pins with voltage inputs (in5 and in6) so you can't have both on a given board. -The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and later IT8712F revisions have support for -2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the driver. +The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F, IT8721F/IT8758E and later IT8712F revisions +have support for 2 additional fans. The additional fans are supported by the +driver. -The IT8716F, IT8718F and IT8720F, and late IT8712F and IT8705F also have -optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This is better (no more -fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older chips and -revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when one -of the above chips is detected. +The IT8716F, IT8718F, IT8720F and IT8721F/IT8758E, and late IT8712F and +IT8705F also have optional 16-bit tachometer counters for fans 1 to 3. This +is better (no more fan clock divider mess) but not compatible with the older +chips and revisions. The 16-bit tachometer mode is enabled by the driver when +one of the above chips is detected. The IT8726F is just bit enhanced IT8716F with additional hardware for AMD power sequencing. Therefore the chip will appear as IT8716F @@ -115,7 +120,12 @@ alarm is triggered if the voltage has crossed a programmable minimum or maximum limit. Note that minimum in this case always means 'closest to zero'; this is important for negative voltage measurements. All voltage inputs can measure voltages between 0 and 4.08 volts, with a resolution of -0.016 volt. The battery voltage in8 does not have limit registers. +0.016 volt (except IT8721F/IT8758E: 0.012 volt.) The battery voltage in8 does +not have limit registers. + +On the IT8721F/IT8758E, some voltage inputs are internal and scaled inside +the chip (in7, in8 and optionally in3). The driver handles this transparently +so user-space doesn't have to care. The VID lines (IT8712F/IT8716F/IT8718F/IT8720F) encode the core voltage value: the voltage level your processor should work with. This is hardcoded by diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 index b98e0e0..239258a 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 @@ -14,6 +14,10 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'adt7463' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7463 + * Analog Devices ADT7468 + Prefix: 'adt7468' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e + Datasheet: http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7468 * SMSC EMC6D100, SMSC EMC6D101 Prefix: 'emc6d100' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e @@ -34,7 +38,7 @@ Description ----------- This driver implements support for the National Semiconductor LM85 and -compatible chips including the Analog Devices ADM1027, ADT7463 and +compatible chips including the Analog Devices ADM1027, ADT7463, ADT7468 and SMSC EMC6D10x chips family. The LM85 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0 @@ -87,14 +91,22 @@ To smooth the response of fans to changes in temperature, the LM85 has an optional filter for smoothing temperatures. The ADM1027 has the same config option but uses it to rate limit the changes to fan speed instead. -The ADM1027 and ADT7463 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore measure -temperatures with 0.25 degC resolution. They also provide an offset to the -temperature readings that is automatically applied during measurement. -This offset can be used to zero out any errors due to traces and placement. -The documentation says that the offset is in 0.25 degC steps, but in -initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog Devices has -confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as described in the -documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the offset register. +The ADM1027, ADT7463 and ADT7468 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore +measure temperatures with 0.25 degC resolution. They also provide an offset +to the temperature readings that is automatically applied during +measurement. This offset can be used to zero out any errors due to traces +and placement. The documentation says that the offset is in 0.25 degC +steps, but in initial testing of the ADM1027 it was 1.00 degC steps. Analog +Devices has confirmed this "bug". The ADT7463 is reported to work as +described in the documentation. The current lm85 driver does not show the +offset register. + +The ADT7468 has a high-frequency PWM mode, where all PWM outputs are +driven by a 22.5 kHz clock. This is a global mode, not per-PWM output, +which means that setting any PWM frequency above 11.3 kHz will switch +all 3 PWM outputs to a 22.5 kHz frequency. Conversely, setting any PWM +frequency below 11.3 kHz will switch all 3 PWM outputs to a frequency +between 10 and 100 Hz, which can then be tuned separately. See the vendor datasheets for more information. There is application note from National (AN-1260) with some additional information about the LM85. @@ -125,17 +137,17 @@ datasheet for a complete description of the differences. Other than identifying the chip, the driver behaves no differently with regard to these two chips. The LM85B is recommended for new designs. -The ADM1027 and ADT7463 chips have an optional SMBALERT output that can be -used to signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the temperature -sensors fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so they won't -trigger SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces one of the other -functions (PWM2 or IN0). This functionality is not implemented in current -driver. +The ADM1027, ADT7463 and ADT7468 chips have an optional SMBALERT output +that can be used to signal the chipset in case a limit is exceeded or the +temperature sensors fail. Individual sensor interrupts can be masked so +they won't trigger SMBALERT. The SMBALERT output if configured replaces one +of the other functions (PWM2 or IN0). This functionality is not implemented +in current driver. -The ADT7463 also has an optional THERM output/input which can be connected -to the processor PROC_HOT output. If available, the autofan control -dynamic Tmin feature can be enabled to keep the system temperature within -spec (just?!) with the least possible fan noise. +The ADT7463 and ADT7468 also have an optional THERM output/input which can +be connected to the processor PROC_HOT output. If available, the autofan +control dynamic Tmin feature can be enabled to keep the system temperature +within spec (just?!) with the least possible fan noise. Configuration Notes ------------------- @@ -201,8 +213,8 @@ the temperatures to compensate for systemic errors in the measurements. These features are not currently supported by the lm85 driver. -In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 also has Tmin control -and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to adjust the -Tmin value to maintain the measured temperature sensor at a specified -temperature. There isn't much documentation on this feature in the -ADT7463 data sheet. This is not supported by current driver. +In addition to the ADM1027 features, the ADT7463 and ADT7468 also have +Tmin control and THERM asserted counts. Automatic Tmin control acts to +adjust the Tmin value to maintain the measured temperature sensor at a +specified temperature. There isn't much documentation on this feature in +the ADT7463 data sheet. This is not supported by current driver. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index 6a03dd4..fa475c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -63,8 +63,8 @@ Supported chips: Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578 * Maxim MAX6659 - Prefix: 'max6657' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d (unsupported 0x4e) + Prefix: 'max6659' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/2578 * Maxim MAX6680 @@ -84,6 +84,21 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3500 + * Maxim MAX6695 + Prefix: 'max6695' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199 + * Maxim MAX6696 + Prefix: 'max6695' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18, 0x19, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2a, 0x2b, + 0x4c, 0x4d and 0x4e + Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website + http://www.maxim-ic.com/datasheet/index.mvp/id/4199 + * Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771W/G + Prefix: 'w83l771' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c + Datasheet: No longer available * Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771AWG/ASG Prefix: 'w83l771' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c @@ -101,10 +116,11 @@ well as the temperature of up to one external diode. It is compatible with many other devices, many of which are supported by this driver. Note that there is no easy way to differentiate between the MAX6657, -MAX6658 and MAX6659 variants. The extra address and features of the -MAX6659 are not supported by this driver. The MAX6680 and MAX6681 only -differ in their pinout, therefore they obviously can't (and don't need to) -be distinguished. +MAX6658 and MAX6659 variants. The extra features of the MAX6659 are only +supported by this driver if the chip is located at address 0x4d or 0x4e, +or if the chip type is explicitly selected as max6659. +The MAX6680 and MAX6681 only differ in their pinout, therefore they obviously +can't (and don't need to) be distinguished. The specificity of this family of chipsets over the ADM1021/LM84 family is that it features critical limits with hysteresis, and an @@ -151,11 +167,21 @@ MAX6680 and MAX6681: * Selectable address * Remote sensor type selection +MAX6695 and MAX6696: + * Better local resolution + * Selectable address (max6696) + * Second critical temperature limit + * Two remote sensors + +W83L771W/G + * The G variant is lead-free, otherwise similar to the W. + * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF + * Moving average (depending on conversion rate) + W83L771AWG/ASG + * Successor of the W83L771W/G, same features. * The AWG and ASG variants only differ in package format. - * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF * Diode ideality factor configuration (remote sensor) at 0xE3 - * Moving average (depending on conversion rate) All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution is 1.0 degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 index ac711f3..7a10616 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm93 @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Authors: Mark M. Hoffman <mhoffman@lightlink.com> Ported to 2.6 by Eric J. Bowersox <ericb@aspsys.com> Adapted to 2.6.20 by Carsten Emde <ce@osadl.org> - Modified for mainline integration by Hans J. Koch <hjk@linutronix.de> + Modified for mainline integration by Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de> Module Parameters ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eba2e2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4261 @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +Kernel driver ltc4261 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Linear Technology LTC4261 + Prefix: 'ltc4261' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: + http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/42612fb.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +The LTC4261/LTC4261-2 negative voltage Hot Swap controllers allow a board +to be safely inserted and removed from a live backplane. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not probe for LTC4261 devices, since there is no register +which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate +the devices explicitly. + +Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4261 at address 0x10 +on I2C bus #1: +$ modprobe ltc4261 +$ echo ltc4261 0x10 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +Voltage readings provided by this driver are reported as obtained from the ADC +registers. If a set of voltage divider resistors is installed, calculate the +real voltage by multiplying the reported value with (R1+R2)/R2, where R1 is the +value of the divider resistor against the measured voltage and R2 is the value +of the divider resistor against Ground. + +Current reading provided by this driver is reported as obtained from the ADC +Current Sense register. The reported value assumes that a 1 mOhm sense resistor +is installed. If a different sense resistor is installed, calculate the real +current by dividing the reported value by the sense resistor value in mOhm. + +The chip has two voltage sensors, but only one set of voltage alarm status bits. +In many many designs, those alarms are associated with the ADIN2 sensor, due to +the proximity of the ADIN2 pin to the OV pin. ADIN2 is, however, not available +on all chip variants. To ensure that the alarm condition is reported to the user, +report it with both voltage sensors. + +in1_input ADIN2 voltage (mV) +in1_min_alarm ADIN/ADIN2 Undervoltage alarm +in1_max_alarm ADIN/ADIN2 Overvoltage alarm + +in2_input ADIN voltage (mV) +in2_min_alarm ADIN/ADIN2 Undervoltage alarm +in2_max_alarm ADIN/ADIN2 Overvoltage alarm + +curr1_input SENSE current (mA) +curr1_alarm SENSE overcurrent alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 index 8be7beb..c565650 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6650 @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Supported chips: Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6650-MAX6651.pdf Authors: - Hans J. Koch <hjk@linutronix.de> + Hans J. Koch <hjk@hansjkoch.de> John Morris <john.morris@spirentcom.com> Claus Gindhart <claus.gindhart@kontron.com> diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 index e76a789..ac020b3 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pcf8591 @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Kernel driver pcf8591 Supported chips: * Philips/NXP PCF8591 Prefix: 'pcf8591' - Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f + Addresses scanned: none Datasheet: Publicly available at the NXP website http://www.nxp.com/pip/PCF8591_6.html @@ -58,18 +58,16 @@ Module parameters Accessing PCF8591 via /sys interface ------------------------------------- -! Be careful ! -The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect! Stupid chip. -So every chip with address in the interval [0x48..0x4f] is -detected as PCF8591. If you have other chips in this address -range, the workaround is to load this module after the one -for your others chips. +The PCF8591 is plainly impossible to detect! Thus the driver won't even +try. You have to explicitly instantiate the device at the relevant +address (in the interval [0x48..0x4f]) either through platform data, or +using the sysfs interface. See Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices +for details. -On detection (i.e. insmod, modprobe et al.), directories are being -created for each detected PCF8591: +Directories are being created for each instantiated PCF8591: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/<0>-<1>/ -where <0> is the bus the chip was detected on (e. g. i2c-0) +where <0> is the bus the chip is connected to (e. g. i2c-0) and <1> the chip address ([48..4f]) Inside these directories, there are such files: diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index ff45d1f..6456990 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -91,12 +91,11 @@ name The chip name. I2C devices get this attribute created automatically. RO -update_rate The rate at which the chip will update readings. +update_interval The interval at which the chip will update readings. Unit: millisecond RW - Some devices have a variable update rate. This attribute - can be used to change the update rate to the desired - frequency. + Some devices have a variable update rate or interval. + This attribute can be used to change it to the desired value. ************ @@ -310,6 +309,20 @@ temp[1-*]_crit_hyst from the critical value. RW +temp[1-*]_emergency + Temperature emergency max value, for chips supporting more than + two upper temperature limits. Must be equal or greater than + corresponding temp_crit values. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + RW + +temp[1-*]_emergency_hyst + Temperature hysteresis value for emergency limit. + Unit: millidegree Celsius + Must be reported as an absolute temperature, NOT a delta + from the emergency value. + RW + temp[1-*]_lcrit Temperature critical min value, typically lower than corresponding temp_min values. Unit: millidegree Celsius @@ -506,6 +519,7 @@ fan[1-*]_max_alarm temp[1-*]_min_alarm temp[1-*]_max_alarm temp[1-*]_crit_alarm +temp[1-*]_emergency_alarm Limit alarm 0: no alarm 1: alarm diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 index e307914..93fe76e 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 @@ -15,10 +15,14 @@ Supported adapters: * Intel 82801I (ICH9) * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai) * Intel 82801JI (ICH10) - * Intel 3400/5 Series (PCH) + * Intel 5/3400 Series (PCH) * Intel Cougar Point (PCH) + * Intel Patsburg (PCH) Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website +On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller +and the additional 'Integrated Device Function' controllers are supported. + Authors: Mark Studebaker <mdsxyz123@yahoo.com> Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> diff --git a/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt b/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29d088d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/cma3000_d0x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +Kernel driver for CMA3000-D0x +============================ + +Supported chips: +* VTI CMA3000-D0x +Datasheet: + CMA3000-D0X Product Family Specification 8281000A.02.pdf + <http://www.vti.fi/en/> + +Author: Hemanth V <hemanthv@ti.com> + + +Description +----------- +CMA3000 Tri-axis accelerometer supports Motion detect, Measurement and +Free fall modes. + +Motion Detect Mode: Its the low power mode where interrupts are generated only +when motion exceeds the defined thresholds. + +Measurement Mode: This mode is used to read the acceleration data on X,Y,Z +axis and supports 400, 100, 40 Hz sample frequency. + +Free fall Mode: This mode is intended to save system resources. + +Threshold values: Chip supports defining threshold values for above modes +which includes time and g value. Refer product specifications for more details. + +CMA3000 chip supports mutually exclusive I2C and SPI interfaces for +communication, currently the driver supports I2C based communication only. +Initial configuration for bus mode is set in non volatile memory and can later +be modified through bus interface command. + +Driver reports acceleration data through input subsystem. It generates ABS_MISC +event with value 1 when free fall is detected. + +Platform data need to be configured for initial default values. + +Platform Data +------------- +fuzz_x: Noise on X Axis + +fuzz_y: Noise on Y Axis + +fuzz_z: Noise on Z Axis + +g_range: G range in milli g i.e 2000 or 8000 + +mode: Default Operating mode + +mdthr: Motion detect g range threshold value + +mdfftmr: Motion detect and free fall time threshold value + +ffthr: Free fall g range threshold value + +Input Interface +-------------- +Input driver version is 1.0.0 +Input device ID: bus 0x18 vendor 0x0 product 0x0 version 0x0 +Input device name: "cma3000-accelerometer" +Supported events: + Event type 0 (Sync) + Event type 3 (Absolute) + Event code 0 (X) + Value 47 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 1 (Y) + Value -28 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 2 (Z) + Value 905 + Min -8000 + Max 8000 + Fuzz 200 + Event code 40 (Misc) + Value 0 + Min 0 + Max 1 + Event type 4 (Misc) + + +Register/Platform parameters Description +---------------------------------------- + +mode: + 0: power down mode + 1: 100 Hz Measurement mode + 2: 400 Hz Measurement mode + 3: 40 Hz Measurement mode + 4: Motion Detect mode (default) + 5: 100 Hz Free fall mode + 6: 40 Hz Free fall mode + 7: Power off mode + +grange: + 2000: 2000 mg or 2G Range + 8000: 8000 mg or 8G Range + +mdthr: + X: X * 71mg (8G Range) + X: X * 18mg (2G Range) + +mdfftmr: + X: (X & 0x70) * 100 ms (MDTMR) + (X & 0x0F) * 2.5 ms (FFTMR 400 Hz) + (X & 0x0F) * 10 ms (FFTMR 100 Hz) + +ffthr: + X: (X >> 2) * 18mg (2G Range) + X: (X & 0x0F) * 71 mg (8G Range) diff --git a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt index bdcba154..71536e7 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/multi-touch-protocol.txt @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Multi-touch (MT) Protocol ------------------------- - Copyright (C) 2009 Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se> + Copyright (C) 2009-2010 Henrik Rydberg <rydberg@euromail.se> Introduction @@ -161,19 +161,24 @@ against the glass. The inner region will increase, and in general, the ratio ABS_MT_TOUCH_MAJOR / ABS_MT_WIDTH_MAJOR, which is always smaller than unity, is related to the contact pressure. For pressure-based devices, ABS_MT_PRESSURE may be used to provide the pressure on the contact area -instead. +instead. Devices capable of contact hovering can use ABS_MT_DISTANCE to +indicate the distance between the contact and the surface. In addition to the MAJOR parameters, the oval shape of the contact can be described by adding the MINOR parameters, such that MAJOR and MINOR are the major and minor axis of an ellipse. Finally, the orientation of the oval shape can be describe with the ORIENTATION parameter. +For type A devices, further specification of the touch shape is possible +via ABS_MT_BLOB_ID. + The ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE may be used to specify whether the touching tool is a -contact or a pen or something else. Devices with more granular information -may specify general shapes as blobs, i.e., as a sequence of rectangular -shapes grouped together by an ABS_MT_BLOB_ID. Finally, for the few devices -that currently support it, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event may be used to -report contact tracking from hardware [5]. +finger or a pen or something else. Finally, the ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID event +may be used to track identified contacts over time [5]. + +In the type B protocol, ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE and ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID are +implicitly handled by input core; drivers should instead call +input_mt_report_slot_state(). Event Semantics @@ -213,6 +218,12 @@ The pressure, in arbitrary units, on the contact area. May be used instead of TOUCH and WIDTH for pressure-based devices or any device with a spatial signal intensity distribution. +ABS_MT_DISTANCE + +The distance, in surface units, between the contact and the surface. Zero +distance means the contact is touching the surface. A positive number means +the contact is hovering above the surface. + ABS_MT_ORIENTATION The orientation of the ellipse. The value should describe a signed quarter @@ -240,21 +251,24 @@ ABS_MT_TOOL_TYPE The type of approaching tool. A lot of kernel drivers cannot distinguish between different tool types, such as a finger or a pen. In such cases, the event should be omitted. The protocol currently supports MT_TOOL_FINGER and -MT_TOOL_PEN [2]. +MT_TOOL_PEN [2]. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; +drivers should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state(). ABS_MT_BLOB_ID The BLOB_ID groups several packets together into one arbitrarily shaped -contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and +contact. The sequence of points forms a polygon which defines the shape of +the contact. This is a low-level anonymous grouping for type A devices, and should not be confused with the high-level trackingID [5]. Most type A devices do not have blob capability, so drivers can safely omit this event. ABS_MT_TRACKING_ID The TRACKING_ID identifies an initiated contact throughout its life cycle -[5]. This event is mandatory for type B devices. The value range of the -TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure unique identification of a -contact maintained over an extended period of time. +[5]. The value range of the TRACKING_ID should be large enough to ensure +unique identification of a contact maintained over an extended period of +time. For type B devices, this event is handled by input core; drivers +should instead use input_mt_report_slot_state(). Event Computation @@ -301,18 +315,19 @@ and with ORIENTATION, one can detect twisting of fingers. Notes ----- -In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data -reported in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch -events. In addition, all finger data must bypass input filtering, -since subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers. +In order to stay compatible with existing applications, the data reported +in a finger packet must not be recognized as single-touch events. + +For type A devices, all finger data bypasses input filtering, since +subsequent events of the same type refer to different fingers. -The first kernel driver to utilize the MT protocol is the bcm5974 driver, -where examples can be found. +For example usage of the type A protocol, see the bcm5974 driver. For +example usage of the type B protocol, see the hid-egalax driver. [1] With the extension ABS_MT_APPROACH_X and ABS_MT_APPROACH_Y, the difference between the contact position and the approaching tool position could be used to derive tilt. [2] The list can of course be extended. -[3] Multitouch X driver project: http://bitmath.org/code/multitouch/. +[3] The mtdev project: http://bitmath.org/code/mtdev/. [4] See the section on event computation. [5] See the section on finger tracking. diff --git a/Documentation/input/ntrig.txt b/Documentation/input/ntrig.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be1fd98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/ntrig.txt @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +N-Trig touchscreen Driver +------------------------- + Copyright (c) 2008-2010 Rafi Rubin <rafi@seas.upenn.edu> + Copyright (c) 2009-2010 Stephane Chatty + +This driver provides support for N-Trig pen and multi-touch sensors. Single +and multi-touch events are translated to the appropriate protocols for +the hid and input systems. Pen events are sufficiently hid compliant and +are left to the hid core. The driver also provides additional filtering +and utility functions accessible with sysfs and module parameters. + +This driver has been reported to work properly with multiple N-Trig devices +attached. + + +Parameters +---------- + +Note: values set at load time are global and will apply to all applicable +devices. Adjusting parameters with sysfs will override the load time values, +but only for that one device. + +The following parameters are used to configure filters to reduce noise: + +activate_slack number of fingers to ignore before processing events + +activation_height size threshold to activate immediately +activation_width + +min_height size threshold bellow which fingers are ignored +min_width both to decide activation and during activity + +deactivate_slack the number of "no contact" frames to ignore before + propagating the end of activity events + +When the last finger is removed from the device, it sends a number of empty +frames. By holding off on deactivation for a few frames we can tolerate false +erroneous disconnects, where the sensor may mistakenly not detect a finger that +is still present. Thus deactivate_slack addresses problems where a users might +see breaks in lines during drawing, or drop an object during a long drag. + + +Additional sysfs items +---------------------- + +These nodes just provide easy access to the ranges reported by the device. +sensor_logical_height the range for positions reported during activity +sensor_logical_width + +sensor_physical_height internal ranges not used for normal events but +sensor_physical_width useful for tuning + +All N-Trig devices with product id of 1 report events in the ranges of +X: 0-9600 +Y: 0-7200 +However not all of these devices have the same physical dimensions. Most +seem to be 12" sensors (Dell Latitude XT and XT2 and the HP TX2), and +at least one model (Dell Studio 17) has a 17" sensor. The ratio of physical +to logical sizes is used to adjust the size based filter parameters. + + +Filtering +--------- + +With the release of the early multi-touch firmwares it became increasingly +obvious that these sensors were prone to erroneous events. Users reported +seeing both inappropriately dropped contact and ghosts, contacts reported +where no finger was actually touching the screen. + +Deactivation slack helps prevent dropped contact for single touch use, but does +not address the problem of dropping one of more contacts while other contacts +are still active. Drops in the multi-touch context require additional +processing and should be handled in tandem with tacking. + +As observed ghost contacts are similar to actual use of the sensor, but they +seem to have different profiles. Ghost activity typically shows up as small +short lived touches. As such, I assume that the longer the continuous stream +of events the more likely those events are from a real contact, and that the +larger the size of each contact the more likely it is real. Balancing the +goals of preventing ghosts and accepting real events quickly (to minimize +user observable latency), the filter accumulates confidence for incoming +events until it hits thresholds and begins propagating. In the interest in +minimizing stored state as well as the cost of operations to make a decision, +I've kept that decision simple. + +Time is measured in terms of the number of fingers reported, not frames since +the probability of multiple simultaneous ghosts is expected to drop off +dramatically with increasing numbers. Rather than accumulate weight as a +function of size, I just use it as a binary threshold. A sufficiently large +contact immediately overrides the waiting period and leads to activation. + +Setting the activation size thresholds to large values will result in deciding +primarily on activation slack. If you see longer lived ghosts, turning up the +activation slack while reducing the size thresholds may suffice to eliminate +the ghosts while keeping the screen quite responsive to firm taps. + +Contacts continue to be filtered with min_height and min_width even after +the initial activation filter is satisfied. The intent is to provide +a mechanism for filtering out ghosts in the form of an extra finger while +you actually are using the screen. In practice this sort of ghost has +been far less problematic or relatively rare and I've left the defaults +set to 0 for both parameters, effectively turning off that filter. + +I don't know what the optimal values are for these filters. If the defaults +don't work for you, please play with the parameters. If you do find other +values more comfortable, I would appreciate feedback. + +The calibration of these devices does drift over time. If ghosts or contact +dropping worsen and interfere with the normal usage of your device, try +recalibrating it. + + +Calibration +----------- + +The N-Trig windows tools provide calibration and testing routines. Also an +unofficial unsupported set of user space tools including a calibrator is +available at: +http://code.launchpad.net/~rafi-seas/+junk/ntrig_calib + + +Tracking +-------- + +As of yet, all tested N-Trig firmwares do not track fingers. When multiple +contacts are active they seem to be sorted primarily by Y position. diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt index 33223ff..d6a63c7 100644 --- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt +++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt @@ -155,7 +155,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 'Q' all linux/soundcard.h 'R' 00-1F linux/random.h conflict! 'R' 01 linux/rfkill.h conflict! -'R' 01-0F media/rds.h conflict! 'R' C0-DF net/bluetooth/rfcomm.h 'S' all linux/cdrom.h conflict! 'S' 80-81 scsi/scsi_ioctl.h conflict! @@ -194,7 +193,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments <http://lrcwww.epfl.ch/> 'b' 00-FF conflict! bit3 vme host bridge <mailto:natalia@nikhefk.nikhef.nl> -'b' 00-0F media/bt819.h conflict! 'c' all linux/cm4000_cs.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/comstats.h conflict! 'c' 00-7F linux/coda.h conflict! @@ -259,15 +257,12 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments 't' 00-7F linux/if_ppp.h 't' 80-8F linux/isdn_ppp.h 't' 90 linux/toshiba.h -'u' 00-1F linux/smb_fs.h -'v' all linux/videodev.h conflict! +'u' 00-1F linux/smb_fs.h gone 'v' 00-1F linux/ext2_fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-1F linux/fs.h conflict! 'v' 00-0F linux/sonypi.h conflict! -'v' C0-CF drivers/media/video/ov511.h conflict! 'v' C0-DF media/pwc-ioctl.h conflict! 'v' C0-FF linux/meye.h conflict! -'v' C0-CF drivers/media/video/zoran/zoran.h conflict! 'v' D0-DF drivers/media/video/cpia2/cpia2dev.h conflict! 'w' all CERN SCI driver 'y' 00-1F packet based user level communications @@ -278,8 +273,6 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments <mailto:oe@port.de> 'z' 10-4F drivers/s390/crypto/zcrypt_api.h conflict! 0x80 00-1F linux/fb.h -0x81 00-1F linux/videotext.h -0x88 00-3F media/ovcamchip.h 0x89 00-06 arch/x86/include/asm/sockios.h 0x89 0B-DF linux/sockios.h 0x89 E0-EF linux/sockios.h SIOCPROTOPRIVATE range diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt index c787ae5..0ef00bd 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt @@ -776,6 +776,13 @@ This will delete the directory debian, including all subdirectories. Kbuild will assume the directories to be in the same relative path as the Makefile if no absolute path is specified (path does not start with '/'). +To exclude certain files from make clean, use the $(no-clean-files) variable. +This is only a special case used in the top level Kbuild file: + + Example: + #Kbuild + no-clean-files := $(bounds-file) $(offsets-file) + Usually kbuild descends down in subdirectories due to "obj-* := dir/", but in the architecture makefiles where the kbuild infrastructure is not sufficient this sometimes needs to be explicit. diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt index 0767cf6..3fb39e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/modules.txt @@ -1,215 +1,185 @@ +Building External Modules -In this document you will find information about: -- how to build external modules -- how to make your module use the kbuild infrastructure -- how kbuild will install a kernel -- how to install modules in a non-standard location +This document describes how to build an out-of-tree kernel module. === Table of Contents === 1 Introduction - === 2 How to build external modules - --- 2.1 Building external modules - --- 2.2 Available targets - --- 2.3 Available options - --- 2.4 Preparing the kernel tree for module build - --- 2.5 Building separate files for a module - === 3. Example commands - === 4. Creating a kbuild file for an external module - === 5. Include files - --- 5.1 How to include files from the kernel include dir - --- 5.2 External modules using an include/ dir - --- 5.3 External modules using several directories - === 6. Module installation - --- 6.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH - --- 6.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR - === 7. Module versioning & Module.symvers - --- 7.1 Symbols from the kernel (vmlinux + modules) - --- 7.2 Symbols and external modules - --- 7.3 Symbols from another external module - === 8. Tips & Tricks - --- 8.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR + === 2 How to Build External Modules + --- 2.1 Command Syntax + --- 2.2 Options + --- 2.3 Targets + --- 2.4 Building Separate Files + === 3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module + --- 3.1 Shared Makefile + --- 3.2 Separate Kbuild file and Makefile + --- 3.3 Binary Blobs + --- 3.4 Building Multiple Modules + === 4. Include Files + --- 4.1 Kernel Includes + --- 4.2 Single Subdirectory + --- 4.3 Several Subdirectories + === 5. Module Installation + --- 5.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH + --- 5.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR + === 6. Module Versioning + --- 6.1 Symbols From the Kernel (vmlinux + modules) + --- 6.2 Symbols and External Modules + --- 6.3 Symbols From Another External Module + === 7. Tips & Tricks + --- 7.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR === 1. Introduction -kbuild includes functionality for building modules both -within the kernel source tree and outside the kernel source tree. -The latter is usually referred to as external or "out-of-tree" -modules and is used both during development and for modules that -are not planned to be included in the kernel tree. +"kbuild" is the build system used by the Linux kernel. Modules must use +kbuild to stay compatible with changes in the build infrastructure and +to pick up the right flags to "gcc." Functionality for building modules +both in-tree and out-of-tree is provided. The method for building +either is similar, and all modules are initially developed and built +out-of-tree. -What is covered within this file is mainly information to authors -of modules. The author of an external module should supply -a makefile that hides most of the complexity, so one only has to type -'make' to build the module. A complete example will be presented in -chapter 4, "Creating a kbuild file for an external module". +Covered in this document is information aimed at developers interested +in building out-of-tree (or "external") modules. The author of an +external module should supply a makefile that hides most of the +complexity, so one only has to type "make" to build the module. This is +easily accomplished, and a complete example will be presented in +section 3. -=== 2. How to build external modules +=== 2. How to Build External Modules -kbuild offers functionality to build external modules, with the -prerequisite that there is a pre-built kernel available with full source. -A subset of the targets available when building the kernel is available -when building an external module. +To build external modules, you must have a prebuilt kernel available +that contains the configuration and header files used in the build. +Also, the kernel must have been built with modules enabled. If you are +using a distribution kernel, there will be a package for the kernel you +are running provided by your distribution. ---- 2.1 Building external modules +An alternative is to use the "make" target "modules_prepare." This will +make sure the kernel contains the information required. The target +exists solely as a simple way to prepare a kernel source tree for +building external modules. - Use the following command to build an external module: +NOTE: "modules_prepare" will not build Module.symvers even if +CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is set; therefore, a full kernel build needs to be +executed to make module versioning work. - make -C <path-to-kernel> M=`pwd` +--- 2.1 Command Syntax - For the running kernel use: + The command to build an external module is: - make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=`pwd` + $ make -C <path_to_kernel_src> M=$PWD - For the above command to succeed, the kernel must have been - built with modules enabled. + The kbuild system knows that an external module is being built + due to the "M=<dir>" option given in the command. - To install the modules that were just built: + To build against the running kernel use: - make -C <path-to-kernel> M=`pwd` modules_install + $ make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=$PWD - More complex examples will be shown later, the above should - be enough to get you started. + Then to install the module(s) just built, add the target + "modules_install" to the command: ---- 2.2 Available targets + $ make -C /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build M=$PWD modules_install - $KDIR refers to the path to the kernel source top-level directory +--- 2.2 Options - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` - Will build the module(s) located in current directory. - All output files will be located in the same directory - as the module source. - No attempts are made to update the kernel source, and it is - a precondition that a successful make has been executed - for the kernel. + ($KDIR refers to the path of the kernel source directory.) - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` modules - The modules target is implied when no target is given. - Same functionality as if no target was specified. - See description above. + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` modules_install - Install the external module(s). - Installation default is in /lib/modules/<kernel-version>/extra, - but may be prefixed with INSTALL_MOD_PATH - see separate - chapter. + -C $KDIR + The directory where the kernel source is located. + "make" will actually change to the specified directory + when executing and will change back when finished. - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` clean - Remove all generated files for the module - the kernel - source directory is not modified. + M=$PWD + Informs kbuild that an external module is being built. + The value given to "M" is the absolute path of the + directory where the external module (kbuild file) is + located. - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` help - help will list the available target when building external - modules. +--- 2.3 Targets ---- 2.3 Available options: + When building an external module, only a subset of the "make" + targets are available. - $KDIR refers to the path to the kernel source top-level directory + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD [target] - make -C $KDIR - Used to specify where to find the kernel source. - '$KDIR' represent the directory where the kernel source is. - Make will actually change directory to the specified directory - when executed but change back when finished. + The default will build the module(s) located in the current + directory, so a target does not need to be specified. All + output files will also be generated in this directory. No + attempts are made to update the kernel source, and it is a + precondition that a successful "make" has been executed for the + kernel. - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` - M= is used to tell kbuild that an external module is - being built. - The option given to M= is the directory where the external - module (kbuild file) is located. - When an external module is being built only a subset of the - usual targets are available. + modules + The default target for external modules. It has the + same functionality as if no target was specified. See + description above. - make -C $KDIR SUBDIRS=`pwd` - Same as M=. The SUBDIRS= syntax is kept for backwards - compatibility. + modules_install + Install the external module(s). The default location is + /lib/modules/<kernel_release>/extra/, but a prefix may + be added with INSTALL_MOD_PATH (discussed in section 5). ---- 2.4 Preparing the kernel tree for module build + clean + Remove all generated files in the module directory only. - To make sure the kernel contains the information required to - build external modules the target 'modules_prepare' must be used. - 'modules_prepare' exists solely as a simple way to prepare - a kernel source tree for building external modules. - Note: modules_prepare will not build Module.symvers even if - CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is set. Therefore a full kernel build - needs to be executed to make module versioning work. + help + List the available targets for external modules. ---- 2.5 Building separate files for a module - It is possible to build single files which are part of a module. - This works equally well for the kernel, a module and even for - external modules. - Examples (module foo.ko, consist of bar.o, baz.o): - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` bar.lst - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` bar.o - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` foo.ko - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` / - - -=== 3. Example commands - -This example shows the actual commands to be executed when building -an external module for the currently running kernel. -In the example below, the distribution is supposed to use the -facility to locate output files for a kernel compile in a different -directory than the kernel source - but the examples will also work -when the source and the output files are mixed in the same directory. +--- 2.4 Building Separate Files -# Kernel source -/lib/modules/<kernel-version>/source -> /usr/src/linux-<version> - -# Output from kernel compile -/lib/modules/<kernel-version>/build -> /usr/src/linux-<version>-up - -Change to the directory where the kbuild file is located and execute -the following commands to build the module: + It is possible to build single files that are part of a module. + This works equally well for the kernel, a module, and even for + external modules. - cd /home/user/src/module - make -C /usr/src/`uname -r`/source \ - O=/lib/modules/`uname-r`/build \ - M=`pwd` + Example (The module foo.ko, consist of bar.o and baz.o): + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD bar.lst + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD baz.o + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD foo.ko + make -C $KDIR M=$PWD / -Then, to install the module use the following command: - make -C /usr/src/`uname -r`/source \ - O=/lib/modules/`uname-r`/build \ - M=`pwd` \ - modules_install +=== 3. Creating a Kbuild File for an External Module -If you look closely you will see that this is the same command as -listed before - with the directories spelled out. +In the last section we saw the command to build a module for the +running kernel. The module is not actually built, however, because a +build file is required. Contained in this file will be the name of +the module(s) being built, along with the list of requisite source +files. The file may be as simple as a single line: -The above are rather long commands, and the following chapter -lists a few tricks to make it all easier. + obj-m := <module_name>.o +The kbuild system will build <module_name>.o from <module_name>.c, +and, after linking, will result in the kernel module <module_name>.ko. +The above line can be put in either a "Kbuild" file or a "Makefile." +When the module is built from multiple sources, an additional line is +needed listing the files: -=== 4. Creating a kbuild file for an external module + <module_name>-y := <src1>.o <src2>.o ... -kbuild is the build system for the kernel, and external modules -must use kbuild to stay compatible with changes in the build system -and to pick up the right flags to gcc etc. +NOTE: Further documentation describing the syntax used by kbuild is +located in Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt. -The kbuild file used as input shall follow the syntax described -in Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt. This chapter will introduce a few -more tricks to be used when dealing with external modules. +The examples below demonstrate how to create a build file for the +module 8123.ko, which is built from the following files: -In the following a Makefile will be created for a module with the -following files: 8123_if.c 8123_if.h 8123_pci.c 8123_bin.o_shipped <= Binary blob ---- 4.1 Shared Makefile for module and kernel +--- 3.1 Shared Makefile - An external module always includes a wrapper Makefile supporting - building the module using 'make' with no arguments. - The Makefile provided will most likely include additional - functionality such as test targets etc. and this part shall - be filtered away from kbuild since it may impact kbuild if - name clashes occurs. + An external module always includes a wrapper makefile that + supports building the module using "make" with no arguments. + This target is not used by kbuild; it is only for convenience. + Additional functionality, such as test targets, can be included + but should be filtered out from kbuild due to possible name + clashes. Example 1: --> filename: Makefile @@ -219,11 +189,11 @@ following files: 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o else - # Normal Makefile + # normal makefile + KDIR ?= /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - KERNELDIR := /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - all:: - $(MAKE) -C $(KERNELDIR) M=`pwd` $@ + default: + $(MAKE) -C $(KDIR) M=$$PWD # Module specific targets genbin: @@ -231,15 +201,20 @@ following files: endif - In example 1, the check for KERNELRELEASE is used to separate - the two parts of the Makefile. kbuild will only see the two - assignments whereas make will see everything except the two - kbuild assignments. + The check for KERNELRELEASE is used to separate the two parts + of the makefile. In the example, kbuild will only see the two + assignments, whereas "make" will see everything except these + two assignments. This is due to two passes made on the file: + the first pass is by the "make" instance run on the command + line; the second pass is by the kbuild system, which is + initiated by the parameterized "make" in the default target. + +--- 3.2 Separate Kbuild File and Makefile - In recent versions of the kernel, kbuild will look for a file named - Kbuild and as second option look for a file named Makefile. - Utilising the Kbuild file makes us split up the Makefile in example 1 - into two files as shown in example 2: + In newer versions of the kernel, kbuild will first look for a + file named "Kbuild," and only if that is not found, will it + then look for a makefile. Utilizing a "Kbuild" file allows us + to split up the makefile from example 1 into two files: Example 2: --> filename: Kbuild @@ -247,20 +222,21 @@ following files: 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o --> filename: Makefile - KERNELDIR := /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - all:: - $(MAKE) -C $(KERNELDIR) M=`pwd` $@ + KDIR ?= /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build + + default: + $(MAKE) -C $(KDIR) M=$$PWD # Module specific targets genbin: echo "X" > 8123_bin.o_shipped + The split in example 2 is questionable due to the simplicity of + each file; however, some external modules use makefiles + consisting of several hundred lines, and here it really pays + off to separate the kbuild part from the rest. - In example 2, we are down to two fairly simple files and for simple - files as used in this example the split is questionable. But some - external modules use Makefiles of several hundred lines and here it - really pays off to separate the kbuild part from the rest. - Example 3 shows a backward compatible version. + The next example shows a backward compatible version. Example 3: --> filename: Kbuild @@ -269,13 +245,15 @@ following files: --> filename: Makefile ifneq ($(KERNELRELEASE),) + # kbuild part of makefile include Kbuild + else - # Normal Makefile + # normal makefile + KDIR ?= /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - KERNELDIR := /lib/modules/`uname -r`/build - all:: - $(MAKE) -C $(KERNELDIR) M=`pwd` $@ + default: + $(MAKE) -C $(KDIR) M=$$PWD # Module specific targets genbin: @@ -283,260 +261,271 @@ following files: endif - The trick here is to include the Kbuild file from Makefile, so - if an older version of kbuild picks up the Makefile, the Kbuild - file will be included. + Here the "Kbuild" file is included from the makefile. This + allows an older version of kbuild, which only knows of + makefiles, to be used when the "make" and kbuild parts are + split into separate files. ---- 4.2 Binary blobs included in a module +--- 3.3 Binary Blobs - Some external modules needs to include a .o as a blob. kbuild - has support for this, but requires the blob file to be named - <filename>_shipped. In our example the blob is named - 8123_bin.o_shipped and when the kbuild rules kick in the file - 8123_bin.o is created as a simple copy off the 8213_bin.o_shipped file - with the _shipped part stripped of the filename. - This allows the 8123_bin.o filename to be used in the assignment to - the module. + Some external modules need to include an object file as a blob. + kbuild has support for this, but requires the blob file to be + named <filename>_shipped. When the kbuild rules kick in, a copy + of <filename>_shipped is created with _shipped stripped off, + giving us <filename>. This shortened filename can be used in + the assignment to the module. + + Throughout this section, 8123_bin.o_shipped has been used to + build the kernel module 8123.ko; it has been included as + 8123_bin.o. - Example 4: - obj-m := 8123.o 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o - In example 4, there is no distinction between the ordinary .c/.h files - and the binary file. But kbuild will pick up different rules to create - the .o file. + Although there is no distinction between the ordinary source + files and the binary file, kbuild will pick up different rules + when creating the object file for the module. + +--- 3.4 Building Multiple Modules + kbuild supports building multiple modules with a single build + file. For example, if you wanted to build two modules, foo.ko + and bar.ko, the kbuild lines would be: -=== 5. Include files + obj-m := foo.o bar.o + foo-y := <foo_srcs> + bar-y := <bar_srcs> -Include files are a necessity when a .c file uses something from other .c -files (not strictly in the sense of C, but if good programming practice is -used). Any module that consists of more than one .c file will have a .h file -for one of the .c files. + It is that simple! -- If the .h file only describes a module internal interface, then the .h file - shall be placed in the same directory as the .c files. -- If the .h files describe an interface used by other parts of the kernel - located in different directories, the .h files shall be located in - include/linux/ or other include/ directories as appropriate. -One exception for this rule is larger subsystems that have their own directory -under include/ such as include/scsi. Another exception is arch-specific -.h files which are located under include/asm-$(ARCH)/*. +=== 4. Include Files -External modules have a tendency to locate include files in a separate include/ -directory and therefore need to deal with this in their kbuild file. +Within the kernel, header files are kept in standard locations +according to the following rule: ---- 5.1 How to include files from the kernel include dir + * If the header file only describes the internal interface of a + module, then the file is placed in the same directory as the + source files. + * If the header file describes an interface used by other parts + of the kernel that are located in different directories, then + the file is placed in include/linux/. - When a module needs to include a file from include/linux/, then one - just uses: + NOTE: There are two notable exceptions to this rule: larger + subsystems have their own directory under include/, such as + include/scsi; and architecture specific headers are located + under arch/$(ARCH)/include/. - #include <linux/modules.h> +--- 4.1 Kernel Includes - kbuild will make sure to add options to gcc so the relevant - directories are searched. - Likewise for .h files placed in the same directory as the .c file. + To include a header file located under include/linux/, simply + use: - #include "8123_if.h" + #include <linux/module.h> - will do the job. + kbuild will add options to "gcc" so the relevant directories + are searched. ---- 5.2 External modules using an include/ dir +--- 4.2 Single Subdirectory - External modules often locate their .h files in a separate include/ - directory although this is not usual kernel style. When an external - module uses an include/ dir then kbuild needs to be told so. - The trick here is to use either EXTRA_CFLAGS (take effect for all .c - files) or CFLAGS_$F.o (take effect only for a single file). + External modules tend to place header files in a separate + include/ directory where their source is located, although this + is not the usual kernel style. To inform kbuild of the + directory, use either ccflags-y or CFLAGS_<filename>.o. - In our example, if we move 8123_if.h to a subdirectory named include/ - the resulting Kbuild file would look like: + Using the example from section 3, if we moved 8123_if.h to a + subdirectory named include, the resulting kbuild file would + look like: --> filename: Kbuild - obj-m := 8123.o + obj-m := 8123.o - EXTRA_CFLAGS := -Iinclude + ccflags-y := -Iinclude 8123-y := 8123_if.o 8123_pci.o 8123_bin.o - Note that in the assignment there is no space between -I and the path. - This is a kbuild limitation: there must be no space present. + Note that in the assignment there is no space between -I and + the path. This is a limitation of kbuild: there must be no + space present. ---- 5.3 External modules using several directories - - If an external module does not follow the usual kernel style, but - decides to spread files over several directories, then kbuild can - handle this too. +--- 4.3 Several Subdirectories + kbuild can handle files that are spread over several directories. Consider the following example: - | - +- src/complex_main.c - | +- hal/hardwareif.c - | +- hal/include/hardwareif.h - +- include/complex.h - - To build a single module named complex.ko, we then need the following + . + |__ src + | |__ complex_main.c + | |__ hal + | |__ hardwareif.c + | |__ include + | |__ hardwareif.h + |__ include + |__ complex.h + + To build the module complex.ko, we then need the following kbuild file: - Kbuild: + --> filename: Kbuild obj-m := complex.o complex-y := src/complex_main.o complex-y += src/hal/hardwareif.o - EXTRA_CFLAGS := -I$(src)/include - EXTRA_CFLAGS += -I$(src)src/hal/include + ccflags-y := -I$(src)/include + ccflags-y += -I$(src)/src/hal/include + As you can see, kbuild knows how to handle object files located + in other directories. The trick is to specify the directory + relative to the kbuild file's location. That being said, this + is NOT recommended practice. - kbuild knows how to handle .o files located in another directory - - although this is NOT recommended practice. The syntax is to specify - the directory relative to the directory where the Kbuild file is - located. + For the header files, kbuild must be explicitly told where to + look. When kbuild executes, the current directory is always the + root of the kernel tree (the argument to "-C") and therefore an + absolute path is needed. $(src) provides the absolute path by + pointing to the directory where the currently executing kbuild + file is located. - To find the .h files, we have to explicitly tell kbuild where to look - for the .h files. When kbuild executes, the current directory is always - the root of the kernel tree (argument to -C) and therefore we have to - tell kbuild how to find the .h files using absolute paths. - $(src) will specify the absolute path to the directory where the - Kbuild file are located when being build as an external module. - Therefore -I$(src)/ is used to point out the directory of the Kbuild - file and any additional path are just appended. -=== 6. Module installation +=== 5. Module Installation -Modules which are included in the kernel are installed in the directory: +Modules which are included in the kernel are installed in the +directory: - /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel + /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel/ -External modules are installed in the directory: +And external modules are installed in: - /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra + /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra/ ---- 6.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH +--- 5.1 INSTALL_MOD_PATH - Above are the default directories, but as always, some level of - customization is possible. One can prefix the path using the variable - INSTALL_MOD_PATH: + Above are the default directories but as always some level of + customization is possible. A prefix can be added to the + installation path using the variable INSTALL_MOD_PATH: $ make INSTALL_MOD_PATH=/frodo modules_install - => Install dir: /frodo/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel - - INSTALL_MOD_PATH may be set as an ordinary shell variable or as in the - example above, can be specified on the command line when calling make. - INSTALL_MOD_PATH has effect both when installing modules included in - the kernel as well as when installing external modules. + => Install dir: /frodo/lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/kernel/ ---- 6.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR + INSTALL_MOD_PATH may be set as an ordinary shell variable or, + as shown above, can be specified on the command line when + calling "make." This has effect when installing both in-tree + and out-of-tree modules. - When installing external modules they are by default installed to a - directory under /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra, but one may wish - to locate modules for a specific functionality in a separate - directory. For this purpose, one can use INSTALL_MOD_DIR to specify an - alternative name to 'extra'. +--- 5.2 INSTALL_MOD_DIR - $ make INSTALL_MOD_DIR=gandalf -C KERNELDIR \ - M=`pwd` modules_install - => Install dir: /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/gandalf + External modules are by default installed to a directory under + /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/extra/, but you may wish to + locate modules for a specific functionality in a separate + directory. For this purpose, use INSTALL_MOD_DIR to specify an + alternative name to "extra." + $ make INSTALL_MOD_DIR=gandalf -C $KDIR \ + M=$PWD modules_install + => Install dir: /lib/modules/$(KERNELRELEASE)/gandalf/ -=== 7. Module versioning & Module.symvers -Module versioning is enabled by the CONFIG_MODVERSIONS tag. +=== 6. Module Versioning -Module versioning is used as a simple ABI consistency check. The Module -versioning creates a CRC value of the full prototype for an exported symbol and -when a module is loaded/used then the CRC values contained in the kernel are -compared with similar values in the module. If they are not equal, then the -kernel refuses to load the module. +Module versioning is enabled by the CONFIG_MODVERSIONS tag, and is used +as a simple ABI consistency check. A CRC value of the full prototype +for an exported symbol is created. When a module is loaded/used, the +CRC values contained in the kernel are compared with similar values in +the module; if they are not equal, the kernel refuses to load the +module. -Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel build. +Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel +build. ---- 7.1 Symbols from the kernel (vmlinux + modules) +--- 6.1 Symbols From the Kernel (vmlinux + modules) - During a kernel build, a file named Module.symvers will be generated. - Module.symvers contains all exported symbols from the kernel and - compiled modules. For each symbols, the corresponding CRC value - is stored too. + During a kernel build, a file named Module.symvers will be + generated. Module.symvers contains all exported symbols from + the kernel and compiled modules. For each symbol, the + corresponding CRC value is also stored. The syntax of the Module.symvers file is: - <CRC> <Symbol> <module> - Sample: + <CRC> <Symbol> <module> + 0x2d036834 scsi_remove_host drivers/scsi/scsi_mod - For a kernel build without CONFIG_MODVERSIONS enabled, the crc - would read: 0x00000000 + For a kernel build without CONFIG_MODVERSIONS enabled, the CRC + would read 0x00000000. Module.symvers serves two purposes: - 1) It lists all exported symbols both from vmlinux and all modules - 2) It lists the CRC if CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is enabled - ---- 7.2 Symbols and external modules - - When building an external module, the build system needs access to - the symbols from the kernel to check if all external symbols are - defined. This is done in the MODPOST step and to obtain all - symbols, modpost reads Module.symvers from the kernel. - If a Module.symvers file is present in the directory where - the external module is being built, this file will be read too. - During the MODPOST step, a new Module.symvers file will be written - containing all exported symbols that were not defined in the kernel. - ---- 7.3 Symbols from another external module - - Sometimes, an external module uses exported symbols from another - external module. Kbuild needs to have full knowledge on all symbols - to avoid spitting out warnings about undefined symbols. - Three solutions exist to let kbuild know all symbols of more than - one external module. - The method with a top-level kbuild file is recommended but may be - impractical in certain situations. - - Use a top-level Kbuild file - If you have two modules: 'foo' and 'bar', and 'foo' needs - symbols from 'bar', then one can use a common top-level kbuild - file so both modules are compiled in same build. - - Consider following directory layout: - ./foo/ <= contains the foo module - ./bar/ <= contains the bar module - The top-level Kbuild file would then look like: - - #./Kbuild: (this file may also be named Makefile) + 1) It lists all exported symbols from vmlinux and all modules. + 2) It lists the CRC if CONFIG_MODVERSIONS is enabled. + +--- 6.2 Symbols and External Modules + + When building an external module, the build system needs access + to the symbols from the kernel to check if all external symbols + are defined. This is done in the MODPOST step. modpost obtains + the symbols by reading Module.symvers from the kernel source + tree. If a Module.symvers file is present in the directory + where the external module is being built, this file will be + read too. During the MODPOST step, a new Module.symvers file + will be written containing all exported symbols that were not + defined in the kernel. + +--- 6.3 Symbols From Another External Module + + Sometimes, an external module uses exported symbols from + another external module. kbuild needs to have full knowledge of + all symbols to avoid spitting out warnings about undefined + symbols. Three solutions exist for this situation. + + NOTE: The method with a top-level kbuild file is recommended + but may be impractical in certain situations. + + Use a top-level kbuild file + If you have two modules, foo.ko and bar.ko, where + foo.ko needs symbols from bar.ko, you can use a + common top-level kbuild file so both modules are + compiled in the same build. Consider the following + directory layout: + + ./foo/ <= contains foo.ko + ./bar/ <= contains bar.ko + + The top-level kbuild file would then look like: + + #./Kbuild (or ./Makefile): obj-y := foo/ bar/ - Executing: - make -C $KDIR M=`pwd` + And executing + + $ make -C $KDIR M=$PWD - will then do the expected and compile both modules with full - knowledge on symbols from both modules. + will then do the expected and compile both modules with + full knowledge of symbols from either module. Use an extra Module.symvers file - When an external module is built, a Module.symvers file is - generated containing all exported symbols which are not - defined in the kernel. - To get access to symbols from module 'bar', one can copy the - Module.symvers file from the compilation of the 'bar' module - to the directory where the 'foo' module is built. - During the module build, kbuild will read the Module.symvers - file in the directory of the external module and when the - build is finished, a new Module.symvers file is created - containing the sum of all symbols defined and not part of the - kernel. - - Use make variable KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in the Makefile - If it is impractical to copy Module.symvers from another - module, you can assign a space separated list of files to - KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in your Makfile. These files will be - loaded by modpost during the initialisation of its symbol - tables. - -=== 8. Tips & Tricks - ---- 8.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR - - Modules often need to check for certain CONFIG_ options to decide if - a specific feature shall be included in the module. When kbuild is used - this is done by referencing the CONFIG_ variable directly. + When an external module is built, a Module.symvers file + is generated containing all exported symbols which are + not defined in the kernel. To get access to symbols + from bar.ko, copy the Module.symvers file from the + compilation of bar.ko to the directory where foo.ko is + built. During the module build, kbuild will read the + Module.symvers file in the directory of the external + module, and when the build is finished, a new + Module.symvers file is created containing the sum of + all symbols defined and not part of the kernel. + + Use "make" variable KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS + If it is impractical to copy Module.symvers from + another module, you can assign a space separated list + of files to KBUILD_EXTRA_SYMBOLS in your build file. + These files will be loaded by modpost during the + initialization of its symbol tables. + + +=== 7. Tips & Tricks + +--- 7.1 Testing for CONFIG_FOO_BAR + + Modules often need to check for certain CONFIG_ options to + decide if a specific feature is included in the module. In + kbuild this is done by referencing the CONFIG_ variable + directly. #fs/ext2/Makefile obj-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS) += ext2.o @@ -544,9 +533,9 @@ Module.symvers contains a list of all exported symbols from a kernel build. ext2-y := balloc.o bitmap.o dir.o ext2-$(CONFIG_EXT2_FS_XATTR) += xattr.o - External modules have traditionally used grep to check for specific - CONFIG_ settings directly in .config. This usage is broken. - As introduced before, external modules shall use kbuild when building - and therefore can use the same methods as in-kernel modules when - testing for CONFIG_ definitions. + External modules have traditionally used "grep" to check for + specific CONFIG_ settings directly in .config. This usage is + broken. As introduced before, external modules should use + kbuild for building and can therefore use the same methods as + in-tree modules when testing for CONFIG_ definitions. diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt index 27a52b3..3d8a977 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-doc-nano-HOWTO.txt @@ -345,5 +345,10 @@ documentation, in <filename>, for the functions listed. section titled <section title> from <filename>. Spaces are allowed in <section title>; do not quote the <section title>. +!C<filename> is replaced by nothing, but makes the tools check that +all DOC: sections and documented functions, symbols, etc. are used. +This makes sense to use when you use !F/!P only and want to verify +that all documentation is included. + Tim. */ <twaugh@redhat.com> diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt index 715eaaf..9a86746 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-docs.txt @@ -537,7 +537,7 @@ Notes: Further information in http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/linuxdrive2/ - * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3nd Edition" + * Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 3rd Edition" Authors: Jonathan Corbet, Alessandro Rubini, and Greg Kroah-Hartman Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates. Date: 2005. @@ -592,14 +592,6 @@ Pages: 600. ISBN: 0-13-101908-2 - * Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.4 BSD UNIX - Operating System" - Author: Marshall Kirk McKusick, Keith Bostic, Michael J. Karels, - John S. Quarterman. - Publisher: Addison-Wesley. - Date: 1996. - ISBN: 0-201-54979-4 - * Title: "Programming for the real world - POSIX.4" Author: Bill O. Gallmeister. Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates, Inc.. @@ -610,28 +602,13 @@ POSIX. Good reference. * Title: "UNIX Systems for Modern Architectures: Symmetric - Multiprocesssing and Caching for Kernel Programmers" + Multiprocessing and Caching for Kernel Programmers" Author: Curt Schimmel. Publisher: Addison Wesley. Date: June, 1994. Pages: 432. ISBN: 0-201-63338-8 - * Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.3 BSD UNIX - Operating System" - Author: Samuel J. Leffler, Marshall Kirk McKusick, Michael J. - Karels, John S. Quarterman. - Publisher: Addison-Wesley. - Date: 1989 (reprinted with corrections on October, 1990). - ISBN: 0-201-06196-1 - - * Title: "The Design of the UNIX Operating System" - Author: Maurice J. Bach. - Publisher: Prentice Hall. - Date: 1986. - Pages: 471. - ISBN: 0-13-201757-1 - MISCELLANEOUS: * Name: linux/Documentation diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index 2c85c06..f3dc951 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -43,10 +43,11 @@ parameter is applicable: AVR32 AVR32 architecture is enabled. AX25 Appropriate AX.25 support is enabled. BLACKFIN Blackfin architecture is enabled. - DRM Direct Rendering Management support is enabled. EDD BIOS Enhanced Disk Drive Services (EDD) is enabled EFI EFI Partitioning (GPT) is enabled EIDE EIDE/ATAPI support is enabled. + DRM Direct Rendering Management support is enabled. + DYNAMIC_DEBUG Build in debug messages and enable them at runtime FB The frame buffer device is enabled. GCOV GCOV profiling is enabled. HW Appropriate hardware is enabled. @@ -455,7 +456,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file [ARM] imx_timer1,OSTS,netx_timer,mpu_timer2, pxa_timer,timer3,32k_counter,timer0_1 [AVR32] avr32 - [X86-32] pit,hpet,tsc,vmi-timer; + [X86-32] pit,hpet,tsc; scx200_hrt on Geode; cyclone on IBM x440 [MIPS] MIPS [PARISC] cr16 @@ -570,6 +571,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Format: <port#>,<type> See also Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt + ddebug_query= [KNL,DYNAMIC_DEBUG] Enable debug messages at early boot + time. See Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt for + details. + debug [KNL] Enable kernel debugging (events log level). debug_locks_verbose= @@ -701,7 +706,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file arch/x86/kernel/cpu/cpufreq/elanfreq.c. elevator= [IOSCHED] - Format: {"anticipatory" | "cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"} + Format: {"cfq" | "deadline" | "noop"} See Documentation/block/as-iosched.txt and Documentation/block/deadline-iosched.txt for details. @@ -1126,9 +1131,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file kvm.oos_shadow= [KVM] Disable out-of-sync shadow paging. Default is 1 (enabled) - kvm-amd.nested= [KVM,AMD] Allow nested virtualization in KVM/SVM. + kvm.mmu_audit= [KVM] This is a R/W parameter which allows audit + KVM MMU at runtime. Default is 0 (off) + kvm-amd.nested= [KVM,AMD] Allow nested virtualization in KVM/SVM. + Default is 1 (enabled) + kvm-amd.npt= [KVM,AMD] Disable nested paging (virtualized MMU) for all guests. Default is 1 (enabled) if in 64bit or 32bit-PAE mode @@ -1532,12 +1541,15 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file 1 to enable accounting Default value is 0. - nfsaddrs= [NFS] + nfsaddrs= [NFS] Deprecated. Use ip= instead. See Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt. nfsroot= [NFS] nfs root filesystem for disk-less boxes. See Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt. + nfsrootdebug [NFS] enable nfsroot debugging messages. + See Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt. + nfs.callback_tcpport= [NFS] set the TCP port on which the NFSv4 callback channel should listen. @@ -1567,20 +1579,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels Format: [panic,][num] - Valid num: 0,1,2 + Valid num: 0 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off - 1 - use the IO-APIC timer for the NMI watchdog - 2 - use the local APIC for the NMI watchdog using - a performance counter. Note: This will use one - performance counter and the local APIC's performance - vector. When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog timeout occurs. This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and need the box quickly up again. - Instead of 1 and 2 it is possible to use the following - symbolic names: lapic and ioapic - Example: nmi_watchdog=2 or nmi_watchdog=panic,lapic netpoll.carrier_timeout= [NET] Specifies amount of time (in seconds) that @@ -1610,6 +1614,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file noapic [SMP,APIC] Tells the kernel to not make use of any IOAPICs that may be present in the system. + noautogroup Disable scheduler automatic task group creation. + nobats [PPC] Do not use BATs for mapping kernel lowmem on "Classic" PPC cores. @@ -1693,6 +1699,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nojitter [IA64] Disables jitter checking for ITC timers. + no-kvmclock [X86,KVM] Disable paravirtualized KVM clock driver + nolapic [X86-32,APIC] Do not enable or use the local APIC. nolapic_timer [X86-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer. @@ -1713,7 +1721,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file norandmaps Don't use address space randomization. Equivalent to echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/randomize_va_space - noreplace-paravirt [X86-32,PV_OPS] Don't patch paravirt_ops + noreplace-paravirt [X86,IA-64,PV_OPS] Don't patch paravirt_ops noreplace-smp [X86-32,SMP] Don't replace SMP instructions with UP alternatives @@ -1745,7 +1753,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file nousb [USB] Disable the USB subsystem - nowatchdog [KNL] Disable the lockup detector. + nowatchdog [KNL] Disable the lockup detector (NMI watchdog). nowb [ARM] @@ -1974,15 +1982,18 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file force Enable ASPM even on devices that claim not to support it. WARNING: Forcing ASPM on may cause system lockups. + pcie_ports= [PCIE] PCIe ports handling: + auto Ask the BIOS whether or not to use native PCIe services + associated with PCIe ports (PME, hot-plug, AER). Use + them only if that is allowed by the BIOS. + native Use native PCIe services associated with PCIe ports + unconditionally. + compat Treat PCIe ports as PCI-to-PCI bridges, disable the PCIe + ports driver. + pcie_pme= [PCIE,PM] Native PCIe PME signaling options: - Format: {auto|force}[,nomsi] - auto Use native PCIe PME signaling if the BIOS allows the - kernel to control PCIe config registers of root ports. - force Use native PCIe PME signaling even if the BIOS refuses - to allow the kernel to control the relevant PCIe config - registers. nomsi Do not use MSI for native PCIe PME signaling (this makes - all PCIe root ports use INTx for everything). + all PCIe root ports use INTx for all services). pcmv= [HW,PCMCIA] BadgePAD 4 @@ -2150,6 +2161,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file Reserves a hole at the top of the kernel virtual address space. + reservelow= [X86] + Format: nn[K] + Set the amount of memory to reserve for BIOS at + the bottom of the address space. + reset_devices [KNL] Force drivers to reset the underlying device during initialization. @@ -2162,6 +2178,11 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file in <PAGE_SIZE> units (needed only for swap files). See Documentation/power/swsusp-and-swap-files.txt + hibernate= [HIBERNATION] + noresume Don't check if there's a hibernation image + present during boot. + nocompress Don't compress/decompress hibernation images. + retain_initrd [RAM] Keep initrd memory after extraction rhash_entries= [KNL,NET] @@ -2353,10 +2374,24 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file improve throughput, but will also increase the amount of memory reserved for use by the client. + swapaccount[=0|1] + [KNL] Enable accounting of swap in memory resource + controller if no parameter or 1 is given or disable + it if 0 is given (See Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt) + swiotlb= [IA-64] Number of I/O TLB slabs switches= [HW,M68k] + sysfs.deprecated=0|1 [KNL] + Enable/disable old style sysfs layout for old udev + on older distributions. When this option is enabled + very new udev will not work anymore. When this option + is disabled (or CONFIG_SYSFS_DEPRECATED not compiled) + in older udev will not work anymore. + Default depends on CONFIG_SYSFS_DEPRECATED_V2 set in + the kernel configuration. + sysrq_always_enabled [KNL] Ignore sysrq setting - this boot parameter will @@ -2405,7 +2440,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file topology informations if the hardware supports these. The scheduler will make use of these informations and e.g. base its process migration decisions on it. - Default is off. + Default is on. tp720= [HW,PS2] @@ -2426,12 +2461,17 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file to facilitate early boot debugging. See also Documentation/trace/events.txt - tsc= Disable clocksource-must-verify flag for TSC. + tsc= Disable clocksource stability checks for TSC. Format: <string> [x86] reliable: mark tsc clocksource as reliable, this - disables clocksource verification at runtime. - Used to enable high-resolution timer mode on older - hardware, and in virtualized environment. + disables clocksource verification at runtime, as well + as the stability checks done at bootup. Used to enable + high-resolution timer mode on older hardware, and in + virtualized environment. + [x86] noirqtime: Do not use TSC to do irq accounting. + Used to run time disable IRQ_TIME_ACCOUNTING on any + platforms where RDTSC is slow and this accounting + can add overhead. turbografx.map[2|3]= [HW,JOY] TurboGraFX parallel port interface @@ -2629,8 +2669,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file aux-ide-disks -- unplug non-primary-master IDE devices nics -- unplug network devices all -- unplug all emulated devices (NICs and IDE disks) - ignore -- continue loading the Xen platform PCI driver even - if the version check failed + unnecessary -- unplugging emulated devices is + unnecessary even if the host did not respond to + the unplug protocol + never -- do not unplug even if version check succeeds xirc2ps_cs= [NET,PCMCIA] Format: diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt index 1762b81..741fe66 100644 --- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt +++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt @@ -542,9 +542,11 @@ Kprobes does not use mutexes or allocate memory except during registration and unregistration. Probe handlers are run with preemption disabled. Depending on the -architecture, handlers may also run with interrupts disabled. In any -case, your handler should not yield the CPU (e.g., by attempting to -acquire a semaphore). +architecture and optimization state, handlers may also run with +interrupts disabled (e.g., kretprobe handlers and optimized kprobe +handlers run without interrupt disabled on x86/x86-64). In any case, +your handler should not yield the CPU (e.g., by attempting to acquire +a semaphore). Since a return probe is implemented by replacing the return address with the trampoline's address, stack backtraces and calls diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt index 5f5b649..b336266 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt @@ -320,13 +320,13 @@ struct kvm_translation { 4.15 KVM_INTERRUPT Capability: basic -Architectures: x86 +Architectures: x86, ppc Type: vcpu ioctl Parameters: struct kvm_interrupt (in) Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error Queues a hardware interrupt vector to be injected. This is only -useful if in-kernel local APIC is not used. +useful if in-kernel local APIC or equivalent is not used. /* for KVM_INTERRUPT */ struct kvm_interrupt { @@ -334,8 +334,37 @@ struct kvm_interrupt { __u32 irq; }; +X86: + Note 'irq' is an interrupt vector, not an interrupt pin or line. +PPC: + +Queues an external interrupt to be injected. This ioctl is overleaded +with 3 different irq values: + +a) KVM_INTERRUPT_SET + + This injects an edge type external interrupt into the guest once it's ready + to receive interrupts. When injected, the interrupt is done. + +b) KVM_INTERRUPT_UNSET + + This unsets any pending interrupt. + + Only available with KVM_CAP_PPC_UNSET_IRQ. + +c) KVM_INTERRUPT_SET_LEVEL + + This injects a level type external interrupt into the guest context. The + interrupt stays pending until a specific ioctl with KVM_INTERRUPT_UNSET + is triggered. + + Only available with KVM_CAP_PPC_IRQ_LEVEL. + +Note that any value for 'irq' other than the ones stated above is invalid +and incurs unexpected behavior. + 4.16 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST Capability: basic @@ -1013,8 +1042,9 @@ number is just right, the 'nent' field is adjusted to the number of valid entries in the 'entries' array, which is then filled. The entries returned are the host cpuid as returned by the cpuid instruction, -with unknown or unsupported features masked out. The fields in each entry -are defined as follows: +with unknown or unsupported features masked out. Some features (for example, +x2apic), may not be present in the host cpu, but are exposed by kvm if it can +emulate them efficiently. The fields in each entry are defined as follows: function: the eax value used to obtain the entry index: the ecx value used to obtain the entry (for entries that are @@ -1032,6 +1062,29 @@ are defined as follows: eax, ebx, ecx, edx: the values returned by the cpuid instruction for this function/index combination +4.46 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO + +Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_GET_PVINFO +Architectures: ppc +Type: vm ioctl +Parameters: struct kvm_ppc_pvinfo (out) +Returns: 0 on success, !0 on error + +struct kvm_ppc_pvinfo { + __u32 flags; + __u32 hcall[4]; + __u8 pad[108]; +}; + +This ioctl fetches PV specific information that need to be passed to the guest +using the device tree or other means from vm context. + +For now the only implemented piece of information distributed here is an array +of 4 instructions that make up a hypercall. + +If any additional field gets added to this structure later on, a bit for that +additional piece of information will be set in the flags bitmap. + 5. The kvm_run structure Application code obtains a pointer to the kvm_run structure by diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/kvm/ppc-pv.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a7f2244 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kvm/ppc-pv.txt @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +The PPC KVM paravirtual interface +================================= + +The basic execution principle by which KVM on PowerPC works is to run all kernel +space code in PR=1 which is user space. This way we trap all privileged +instructions and can emulate them accordingly. + +Unfortunately that is also the downfall. There are quite some privileged +instructions that needlessly return us to the hypervisor even though they +could be handled differently. + +This is what the PPC PV interface helps with. It takes privileged instructions +and transforms them into unprivileged ones with some help from the hypervisor. +This cuts down virtualization costs by about 50% on some of my benchmarks. + +The code for that interface can be found in arch/powerpc/kernel/kvm* + +Querying for existence +====================== + +To find out if we're running on KVM or not, we leverage the device tree. When +Linux is running on KVM, a node /hypervisor exists. That node contains a +compatible property with the value "linux,kvm". + +Once you determined you're running under a PV capable KVM, you can now use +hypercalls as described below. + +KVM hypercalls +============== + +Inside the device tree's /hypervisor node there's a property called +'hypercall-instructions'. This property contains at most 4 opcodes that make +up the hypercall. To call a hypercall, just call these instructions. + +The parameters are as follows: + + Register IN OUT + + r0 - volatile + r3 1st parameter Return code + r4 2nd parameter 1st output value + r5 3rd parameter 2nd output value + r6 4th parameter 3rd output value + r7 5th parameter 4th output value + r8 6th parameter 5th output value + r9 7th parameter 6th output value + r10 8th parameter 7th output value + r11 hypercall number 8th output value + r12 - volatile + +Hypercall definitions are shared in generic code, so the same hypercall numbers +apply for x86 and powerpc alike with the exception that each KVM hypercall +also needs to be ORed with the KVM vendor code which is (42 << 16). + +Return codes can be as follows: + + Code Meaning + + 0 Success + 12 Hypercall not implemented + <0 Error + +The magic page +============== + +To enable communication between the hypervisor and guest there is a new shared +page that contains parts of supervisor visible register state. The guest can +map this shared page using the KVM hypercall KVM_HC_PPC_MAP_MAGIC_PAGE. + +With this hypercall issued the guest always gets the magic page mapped at the +desired location in effective and physical address space. For now, we always +map the page to -4096. This way we can access it using absolute load and store +functions. The following instruction reads the first field of the magic page: + + ld rX, -4096(0) + +The interface is designed to be extensible should there be need later to add +additional registers to the magic page. If you add fields to the magic page, +also define a new hypercall feature to indicate that the host can give you more +registers. Only if the host supports the additional features, make use of them. + +The magic page has the following layout as described in +arch/powerpc/include/asm/kvm_para.h: + +struct kvm_vcpu_arch_shared { + __u64 scratch1; + __u64 scratch2; + __u64 scratch3; + __u64 critical; /* Guest may not get interrupts if == r1 */ + __u64 sprg0; + __u64 sprg1; + __u64 sprg2; + __u64 sprg3; + __u64 srr0; + __u64 srr1; + __u64 dar; + __u64 msr; + __u32 dsisr; + __u32 int_pending; /* Tells the guest if we have an interrupt */ +}; + +Additions to the page must only occur at the end. Struct fields are always 32 +or 64 bit aligned, depending on them being 32 or 64 bit wide respectively. + +Magic page features +=================== + +When mapping the magic page using the KVM hypercall KVM_HC_PPC_MAP_MAGIC_PAGE, +a second return value is passed to the guest. This second return value contains +a bitmap of available features inside the magic page. + +The following enhancements to the magic page are currently available: + + KVM_MAGIC_FEAT_SR Maps SR registers r/w in the magic page + +For enhanced features in the magic page, please check for the existence of the +feature before using them! + +MSR bits +======== + +The MSR contains bits that require hypervisor intervention and bits that do +not require direct hypervisor intervention because they only get interpreted +when entering the guest or don't have any impact on the hypervisor's behavior. + +The following bits are safe to be set inside the guest: + + MSR_EE + MSR_RI + MSR_CR + MSR_ME + +If any other bit changes in the MSR, please still use mtmsr(d). + +Patched instructions +==================== + +The "ld" and "std" instructions are transormed to "lwz" and "stw" instructions +respectively on 32 bit systems with an added offset of 4 to accomodate for big +endianness. + +The following is a list of mapping the Linux kernel performs when running as +guest. Implementing any of those mappings is optional, as the instruction traps +also act on the shared page. So calling privileged instructions still works as +before. + +From To +==== == + +mfmsr rX ld rX, magic_page->msr +mfsprg rX, 0 ld rX, magic_page->sprg0 +mfsprg rX, 1 ld rX, magic_page->sprg1 +mfsprg rX, 2 ld rX, magic_page->sprg2 +mfsprg rX, 3 ld rX, magic_page->sprg3 +mfsrr0 rX ld rX, magic_page->srr0 +mfsrr1 rX ld rX, magic_page->srr1 +mfdar rX ld rX, magic_page->dar +mfdsisr rX lwz rX, magic_page->dsisr + +mtmsr rX std rX, magic_page->msr +mtsprg 0, rX std rX, magic_page->sprg0 +mtsprg 1, rX std rX, magic_page->sprg1 +mtsprg 2, rX std rX, magic_page->sprg2 +mtsprg 3, rX std rX, magic_page->sprg3 +mtsrr0 rX std rX, magic_page->srr0 +mtsrr1 rX std rX, magic_page->srr1 +mtdar rX std rX, magic_page->dar +mtdsisr rX stw rX, magic_page->dsisr + +tlbsync nop + +mtmsrd rX, 0 b <special mtmsr section> +mtmsr rX b <special mtmsr section> + +mtmsrd rX, 1 b <special mtmsrd section> + +[Book3S only] +mtsrin rX, rY b <special mtsrin section> + +[BookE only] +wrteei [0|1] b <special wrteei section> + + +Some instructions require more logic to determine what's going on than a load +or store instruction can deliver. To enable patching of those, we keep some +RAM around where we can live translate instructions to. What happens is the +following: + + 1) copy emulation code to memory + 2) patch that code to fit the emulated instruction + 3) patch that code to return to the original pc + 4 + 4) patch the original instruction to branch to the new code + +That way we can inject an arbitrary amount of code as replacement for a single +instruction. This allows us to check for pending interrupts when setting EE=1 +for example. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/timekeeping.txt b/Documentation/kvm/timekeeping.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c5033a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/kvm/timekeeping.txt @@ -0,0 +1,612 @@ + + Timekeeping Virtualization for X86-Based Architectures + + Zachary Amsden <zamsden@redhat.com> + Copyright (c) 2010, Red Hat. All rights reserved. + +1) Overview +2) Timing Devices +3) TSC Hardware +4) Virtualization Problems + +========================================================================= + +1) Overview + +One of the most complicated parts of the X86 platform, and specifically, +the virtualization of this platform is the plethora of timing devices available +and the complexity of emulating those devices. In addition, virtualization of +time introduces a new set of challenges because it introduces a multiplexed +division of time beyond the control of the guest CPU. + +First, we will describe the various timekeeping hardware available, then +present some of the problems which arise and solutions available, giving +specific recommendations for certain classes of KVM guests. + +The purpose of this document is to collect data and information relevant to +timekeeping which may be difficult to find elsewhere, specifically, +information relevant to KVM and hardware-based virtualization. + +========================================================================= + +2) Timing Devices + +First we discuss the basic hardware devices available. TSC and the related +KVM clock are special enough to warrant a full exposition and are described in +the following section. + +2.1) i8254 - PIT + +One of the first timer devices available is the programmable interrupt timer, +or PIT. The PIT has a fixed frequency 1.193182 MHz base clock and three +channels which can be programmed to deliver periodic or one-shot interrupts. +These three channels can be configured in different modes and have individual +counters. Channel 1 and 2 were not available for general use in the original +IBM PC, and historically were connected to control RAM refresh and the PC +speaker. Now the PIT is typically integrated as part of an emulated chipset +and a separate physical PIT is not used. + +The PIT uses I/O ports 0x40 - 0x43. Access to the 16-bit counters is done +using single or multiple byte access to the I/O ports. There are 6 modes +available, but not all modes are available to all timers, as only timer 2 +has a connected gate input, required for modes 1 and 5. The gate line is +controlled by port 61h, bit 0, as illustrated in the following diagram. + + -------------- ---------------- +| | | | +| 1.1932 MHz |---------->| CLOCK OUT | ---------> IRQ 0 +| Clock | | | | + -------------- | +->| GATE TIMER 0 | + | ---------------- + | + | ---------------- + | | | + |------>| CLOCK OUT | ---------> 66.3 KHZ DRAM + | | | (aka /dev/null) + | +->| GATE TIMER 1 | + | ---------------- + | + | ---------------- + | | | + |------>| CLOCK OUT | ---------> Port 61h, bit 5 + | | | +Port 61h, bit 0 ---------->| GATE TIMER 2 | \_.---- ____ + ---------------- _| )--|LPF|---Speaker + / *---- \___/ +Port 61h, bit 1 -----------------------------------/ + +The timer modes are now described. + +Mode 0: Single Timeout. This is a one-shot software timeout that counts down + when the gate is high (always true for timers 0 and 1). When the count + reaches zero, the output goes high. + +Mode 1: Triggered One-shot. The output is intially set high. When the gate + line is set high, a countdown is initiated (which does not stop if the gate is + lowered), during which the output is set low. When the count reaches zero, + the output goes high. + +Mode 2: Rate Generator. The output is initially set high. When the countdown + reaches 1, the output goes low for one count and then returns high. The value + is reloaded and the countdown automatically resumes. If the gate line goes + low, the count is halted. If the output is low when the gate is lowered, the + output automatically goes high (this only affects timer 2). + +Mode 3: Square Wave. This generates a high / low square wave. The count + determines the length of the pulse, which alternates between high and low + when zero is reached. The count only proceeds when gate is high and is + automatically reloaded on reaching zero. The count is decremented twice at + each clock to generate a full high / low cycle at the full periodic rate. + If the count is even, the clock remains high for N/2 counts and low for N/2 + counts; if the clock is odd, the clock is high for (N+1)/2 counts and low + for (N-1)/2 counts. Only even values are latched by the counter, so odd + values are not observed when reading. This is the intended mode for timer 2, + which generates sine-like tones by low-pass filtering the square wave output. + +Mode 4: Software Strobe. After programming this mode and loading the counter, + the output remains high until the counter reaches zero. Then the output + goes low for 1 clock cycle and returns high. The counter is not reloaded. + Counting only occurs when gate is high. + +Mode 5: Hardware Strobe. After programming and loading the counter, the + output remains high. When the gate is raised, a countdown is initiated + (which does not stop if the gate is lowered). When the counter reaches zero, + the output goes low for 1 clock cycle and then returns high. The counter is + not reloaded. + +In addition to normal binary counting, the PIT supports BCD counting. The +command port, 0x43 is used to set the counter and mode for each of the three +timers. + +PIT commands, issued to port 0x43, using the following bit encoding: + +Bit 7-4: Command (See table below) +Bit 3-1: Mode (000 = Mode 0, 101 = Mode 5, 11X = undefined) +Bit 0 : Binary (0) / BCD (1) + +Command table: + +0000 - Latch Timer 0 count for port 0x40 + sample and hold the count to be read in port 0x40; + additional commands ignored until counter is read; + mode bits ignored. + +0001 - Set Timer 0 LSB mode for port 0x40 + set timer to read LSB only and force MSB to zero; + mode bits set timer mode + +0010 - Set Timer 0 MSB mode for port 0x40 + set timer to read MSB only and force LSB to zero; + mode bits set timer mode + +0011 - Set Timer 0 16-bit mode for port 0x40 + set timer to read / write LSB first, then MSB; + mode bits set timer mode + +0100 - Latch Timer 1 count for port 0x41 - as described above +0101 - Set Timer 1 LSB mode for port 0x41 - as described above +0110 - Set Timer 1 MSB mode for port 0x41 - as described above +0111 - Set Timer 1 16-bit mode for port 0x41 - as described above + +1000 - Latch Timer 2 count for port 0x42 - as described above +1001 - Set Timer 2 LSB mode for port 0x42 - as described above +1010 - Set Timer 2 MSB mode for port 0x42 - as described above +1011 - Set Timer 2 16-bit mode for port 0x42 as described above + +1101 - General counter latch + Latch combination of counters into corresponding ports + Bit 3 = Counter 2 + Bit 2 = Counter 1 + Bit 1 = Counter 0 + Bit 0 = Unused + +1110 - Latch timer status + Latch combination of counter mode into corresponding ports + Bit 3 = Counter 2 + Bit 2 = Counter 1 + Bit 1 = Counter 0 + + The output of ports 0x40-0x42 following this command will be: + + Bit 7 = Output pin + Bit 6 = Count loaded (0 if timer has expired) + Bit 5-4 = Read / Write mode + 01 = MSB only + 10 = LSB only + 11 = LSB / MSB (16-bit) + Bit 3-1 = Mode + Bit 0 = Binary (0) / BCD mode (1) + +2.2) RTC + +The second device which was available in the original PC was the MC146818 real +time clock. The original device is now obsolete, and usually emulated by the +system chipset, sometimes by an HPET and some frankenstein IRQ routing. + +The RTC is accessed through CMOS variables, which uses an index register to +control which bytes are read. Since there is only one index register, read +of the CMOS and read of the RTC require lock protection (in addition, it is +dangerous to allow userspace utilities such as hwclock to have direct RTC +access, as they could corrupt kernel reads and writes of CMOS memory). + +The RTC generates an interrupt which is usually routed to IRQ 8. The interrupt +can function as a periodic timer, an additional once a day alarm, and can issue +interrupts after an update of the CMOS registers by the MC146818 is complete. +The type of interrupt is signalled in the RTC status registers. + +The RTC will update the current time fields by battery power even while the +system is off. The current time fields should not be read while an update is +in progress, as indicated in the status register. + +The clock uses a 32.768kHz crystal, so bits 6-4 of register A should be +programmed to a 32kHz divider if the RTC is to count seconds. + +This is the RAM map originally used for the RTC/CMOS: + +Location Size Description +------------------------------------------ +00h byte Current second (BCD) +01h byte Seconds alarm (BCD) +02h byte Current minute (BCD) +03h byte Minutes alarm (BCD) +04h byte Current hour (BCD) +05h byte Hours alarm (BCD) +06h byte Current day of week (BCD) +07h byte Current day of month (BCD) +08h byte Current month (BCD) +09h byte Current year (BCD) +0Ah byte Register A + bit 7 = Update in progress + bit 6-4 = Divider for clock + 000 = 4.194 MHz + 001 = 1.049 MHz + 010 = 32 kHz + 10X = test modes + 110 = reset / disable + 111 = reset / disable + bit 3-0 = Rate selection for periodic interrupt + 000 = periodic timer disabled + 001 = 3.90625 uS + 010 = 7.8125 uS + 011 = .122070 mS + 100 = .244141 mS + ... + 1101 = 125 mS + 1110 = 250 mS + 1111 = 500 mS +0Bh byte Register B + bit 7 = Run (0) / Halt (1) + bit 6 = Periodic interrupt enable + bit 5 = Alarm interrupt enable + bit 4 = Update-ended interrupt enable + bit 3 = Square wave interrupt enable + bit 2 = BCD calendar (0) / Binary (1) + bit 1 = 12-hour mode (0) / 24-hour mode (1) + bit 0 = 0 (DST off) / 1 (DST enabled) +OCh byte Register C (read only) + bit 7 = interrupt request flag (IRQF) + bit 6 = periodic interrupt flag (PF) + bit 5 = alarm interrupt flag (AF) + bit 4 = update interrupt flag (UF) + bit 3-0 = reserved +ODh byte Register D (read only) + bit 7 = RTC has power + bit 6-0 = reserved +32h byte Current century BCD (*) + (*) location vendor specific and now determined from ACPI global tables + +2.3) APIC + +On Pentium and later processors, an on-board timer is available to each CPU +as part of the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. The APIC is +accessed through memory-mapped registers and provides interrupt service to each +CPU, used for IPIs and local timer interrupts. + +Although in theory the APIC is a safe and stable source for local interrupts, +in practice, many bugs and glitches have occurred due to the special nature of +the APIC CPU-local memory-mapped hardware. Beware that CPU errata may affect +the use of the APIC and that workarounds may be required. In addition, some of +these workarounds pose unique constraints for virtualization - requiring either +extra overhead incurred from extra reads of memory-mapped I/O or additional +functionality that may be more computationally expensive to implement. + +Since the APIC is documented quite well in the Intel and AMD manuals, we will +avoid repetition of the detail here. It should be pointed out that the APIC +timer is programmed through the LVT (local vector timer) register, is capable +of one-shot or periodic operation, and is based on the bus clock divided down +by the programmable divider register. + +2.4) HPET + +HPET is quite complex, and was originally intended to replace the PIT / RTC +support of the X86 PC. It remains to be seen whether that will be the case, as +the de facto standard of PC hardware is to emulate these older devices. Some +systems designated as legacy free may support only the HPET as a hardware timer +device. + +The HPET spec is rather loose and vague, requiring at least 3 hardware timers, +but allowing implementation freedom to support many more. It also imposes no +fixed rate on the timer frequency, but does impose some extremal values on +frequency, error and slew. + +In general, the HPET is recommended as a high precision (compared to PIT /RTC) +time source which is independent of local variation (as there is only one HPET +in any given system). The HPET is also memory-mapped, and its presence is +indicated through ACPI tables by the BIOS. + +Detailed specification of the HPET is beyond the current scope of this +document, as it is also very well documented elsewhere. + +2.5) Offboard Timers + +Several cards, both proprietary (watchdog boards) and commonplace (e1000) have +timing chips built into the cards which may have registers which are accessible +to kernel or user drivers. To the author's knowledge, using these to generate +a clocksource for a Linux or other kernel has not yet been attempted and is in +general frowned upon as not playing by the agreed rules of the game. Such a +timer device would require additional support to be virtualized properly and is +not considered important at this time as no known operating system does this. + +========================================================================= + +3) TSC Hardware + +The TSC or time stamp counter is relatively simple in theory; it counts +instruction cycles issued by the processor, which can be used as a measure of +time. In practice, due to a number of problems, it is the most complicated +timekeeping device to use. + +The TSC is represented internally as a 64-bit MSR which can be read with the +RDMSR, RDTSC, or RDTSCP (when available) instructions. In the past, hardware +limitations made it possible to write the TSC, but generally on old hardware it +was only possible to write the low 32-bits of the 64-bit counter, and the upper +32-bits of the counter were cleared. Now, however, on Intel processors family +0Fh, for models 3, 4 and 6, and family 06h, models e and f, this restriction +has been lifted and all 64-bits are writable. On AMD systems, the ability to +write the TSC MSR is not an architectural guarantee. + +The TSC is accessible from CPL-0 and conditionally, for CPL > 0 software by +means of the CR4.TSD bit, which when enabled, disables CPL > 0 TSC access. + +Some vendors have implemented an additional instruction, RDTSCP, which returns +atomically not just the TSC, but an indicator which corresponds to the +processor number. This can be used to index into an array of TSC variables to +determine offset information in SMP systems where TSCs are not synchronized. +The presence of this instruction must be determined by consulting CPUID feature +bits. + +Both VMX and SVM provide extension fields in the virtualization hardware which +allows the guest visible TSC to be offset by a constant. Newer implementations +promise to allow the TSC to additionally be scaled, but this hardware is not +yet widely available. + +3.1) TSC synchronization + +The TSC is a CPU-local clock in most implementations. This means, on SMP +platforms, the TSCs of different CPUs may start at different times depending +on when the CPUs are powered on. Generally, CPUs on the same die will share +the same clock, however, this is not always the case. + +The BIOS may attempt to resynchronize the TSCs during the poweron process and +the operating system or other system software may attempt to do this as well. +Several hardware limitations make the problem worse - if it is not possible to +write the full 64-bits of the TSC, it may be impossible to match the TSC in +newly arriving CPUs to that of the rest of the system, resulting in +unsynchronized TSCs. This may be done by BIOS or system software, but in +practice, getting a perfectly synchronized TSC will not be possible unless all +values are read from the same clock, which generally only is possible on single +socket systems or those with special hardware support. + +3.2) TSC and CPU hotplug + +As touched on already, CPUs which arrive later than the boot time of the system +may not have a TSC value that is synchronized with the rest of the system. +Either system software, BIOS, or SMM code may actually try to establish the TSC +to a value matching the rest of the system, but a perfect match is usually not +a guarantee. This can have the effect of bringing a system from a state where +TSC is synchronized back to a state where TSC synchronization flaws, however +small, may be exposed to the OS and any virtualization environment. + +3.3) TSC and multi-socket / NUMA + +Multi-socket systems, especially large multi-socket systems are likely to have +individual clocksources rather than a single, universally distributed clock. +Since these clocks are driven by different crystals, they will not have +perfectly matched frequency, and temperature and electrical variations will +cause the CPU clocks, and thus the TSCs to drift over time. Depending on the +exact clock and bus design, the drift may or may not be fixed in absolute +error, and may accumulate over time. + +In addition, very large systems may deliberately slew the clocks of individual +cores. This technique, known as spread-spectrum clocking, reduces EMI at the +clock frequency and harmonics of it, which may be required to pass FCC +standards for telecommunications and computer equipment. + +It is recommended not to trust the TSCs to remain synchronized on NUMA or +multiple socket systems for these reasons. + +3.4) TSC and C-states + +C-states, or idling states of the processor, especially C1E and deeper sleep +states may be problematic for TSC as well. The TSC may stop advancing in such +a state, resulting in a TSC which is behind that of other CPUs when execution +is resumed. Such CPUs must be detected and flagged by the operating system +based on CPU and chipset identifications. + +The TSC in such a case may be corrected by catching it up to a known external +clocksource. + +3.5) TSC frequency change / P-states + +To make things slightly more interesting, some CPUs may change frequency. They +may or may not run the TSC at the same rate, and because the frequency change +may be staggered or slewed, at some points in time, the TSC rate may not be +known other than falling within a range of values. In this case, the TSC will +not be a stable time source, and must be calibrated against a known, stable, +external clock to be a usable source of time. + +Whether the TSC runs at a constant rate or scales with the P-state is model +dependent and must be determined by inspecting CPUID, chipset or vendor +specific MSR fields. + +In addition, some vendors have known bugs where the P-state is actually +compensated for properly during normal operation, but when the processor is +inactive, the P-state may be raised temporarily to service cache misses from +other processors. In such cases, the TSC on halted CPUs could advance faster +than that of non-halted processors. AMD Turion processors are known to have +this problem. + +3.6) TSC and STPCLK / T-states + +External signals given to the processor may also have the effect of stopping +the TSC. This is typically done for thermal emergency power control to prevent +an overheating condition, and typically, there is no way to detect that this +condition has happened. + +3.7) TSC virtualization - VMX + +VMX provides conditional trapping of RDTSC, RDMSR, WRMSR and RDTSCP +instructions, which is enough for full virtualization of TSC in any manner. In +addition, VMX allows passing through the host TSC plus an additional TSC_OFFSET +field specified in the VMCS. Special instructions must be used to read and +write the VMCS field. + +3.8) TSC virtualization - SVM + +SVM provides conditional trapping of RDTSC, RDMSR, WRMSR and RDTSCP +instructions, which is enough for full virtualization of TSC in any manner. In +addition, SVM allows passing through the host TSC plus an additional offset +field specified in the SVM control block. + +3.9) TSC feature bits in Linux + +In summary, there is no way to guarantee the TSC remains in perfect +synchronization unless it is explicitly guaranteed by the architecture. Even +if so, the TSCs in multi-sockets or NUMA systems may still run independently +despite being locally consistent. + +The following feature bits are used by Linux to signal various TSC attributes, +but they can only be taken to be meaningful for UP or single node systems. + +X86_FEATURE_TSC : The TSC is available in hardware +X86_FEATURE_RDTSCP : The RDTSCP instruction is available +X86_FEATURE_CONSTANT_TSC : The TSC rate is unchanged with P-states +X86_FEATURE_NONSTOP_TSC : The TSC does not stop in C-states +X86_FEATURE_TSC_RELIABLE : TSC sync checks are skipped (VMware) + +4) Virtualization Problems + +Timekeeping is especially problematic for virtualization because a number of +challenges arise. The most obvious problem is that time is now shared between +the host and, potentially, a number of virtual machines. Thus the virtual +operating system does not run with 100% usage of the CPU, despite the fact that +it may very well make that assumption. It may expect it to remain true to very +exacting bounds when interrupt sources are disabled, but in reality only its +virtual interrupt sources are disabled, and the machine may still be preempted +at any time. This causes problems as the passage of real time, the injection +of machine interrupts and the associated clock sources are no longer completely +synchronized with real time. + +This same problem can occur on native harware to a degree, as SMM mode may +steal cycles from the naturally on X86 systems when SMM mode is used by the +BIOS, but not in such an extreme fashion. However, the fact that SMM mode may +cause similar problems to virtualization makes it a good justification for +solving many of these problems on bare metal. + +4.1) Interrupt clocking + +One of the most immediate problems that occurs with legacy operating systems +is that the system timekeeping routines are often designed to keep track of +time by counting periodic interrupts. These interrupts may come from the PIT +or the RTC, but the problem is the same: the host virtualization engine may not +be able to deliver the proper number of interrupts per second, and so guest +time may fall behind. This is especially problematic if a high interrupt rate +is selected, such as 1000 HZ, which is unfortunately the default for many Linux +guests. + +There are three approaches to solving this problem; first, it may be possible +to simply ignore it. Guests which have a separate time source for tracking +'wall clock' or 'real time' may not need any adjustment of their interrupts to +maintain proper time. If this is not sufficient, it may be necessary to inject +additional interrupts into the guest in order to increase the effective +interrupt rate. This approach leads to complications in extreme conditions, +where host load or guest lag is too much to compensate for, and thus another +solution to the problem has risen: the guest may need to become aware of lost +ticks and compensate for them internally. Although promising in theory, the +implementation of this policy in Linux has been extremely error prone, and a +number of buggy variants of lost tick compensation are distributed across +commonly used Linux systems. + +Windows uses periodic RTC clocking as a means of keeping time internally, and +thus requires interrupt slewing to keep proper time. It does use a low enough +rate (ed: is it 18.2 Hz?) however that it has not yet been a problem in +practice. + +4.2) TSC sampling and serialization + +As the highest precision time source available, the cycle counter of the CPU +has aroused much interest from developers. As explained above, this timer has +many problems unique to its nature as a local, potentially unstable and +potentially unsynchronized source. One issue which is not unique to the TSC, +but is highlighted because of its very precise nature is sampling delay. By +definition, the counter, once read is already old. However, it is also +possible for the counter to be read ahead of the actual use of the result. +This is a consequence of the superscalar execution of the instruction stream, +which may execute instructions out of order. Such execution is called +non-serialized. Forcing serialized execution is necessary for precise +measurement with the TSC, and requires a serializing instruction, such as CPUID +or an MSR read. + +Since CPUID may actually be virtualized by a trap and emulate mechanism, this +serialization can pose a performance issue for hardware virtualization. An +accurate time stamp counter reading may therefore not always be available, and +it may be necessary for an implementation to guard against "backwards" reads of +the TSC as seen from other CPUs, even in an otherwise perfectly synchronized +system. + +4.3) Timespec aliasing + +Additionally, this lack of serialization from the TSC poses another challenge +when using results of the TSC when measured against another time source. As +the TSC is much higher precision, many possible values of the TSC may be read +while another clock is still expressing the same value. + +That is, you may read (T,T+10) while external clock C maintains the same value. +Due to non-serialized reads, you may actually end up with a range which +fluctuates - from (T-1.. T+10). Thus, any time calculated from a TSC, but +calibrated against an external value may have a range of valid values. +Re-calibrating this computation may actually cause time, as computed after the +calibration, to go backwards, compared with time computed before the +calibration. + +This problem is particularly pronounced with an internal time source in Linux, +the kernel time, which is expressed in the theoretically high resolution +timespec - but which advances in much larger granularity intervals, sometimes +at the rate of jiffies, and possibly in catchup modes, at a much larger step. + +This aliasing requires care in the computation and recalibration of kvmclock +and any other values derived from TSC computation (such as TSC virtualization +itself). + +4.4) Migration + +Migration of a virtual machine raises problems for timekeeping in two ways. +First, the migration itself may take time, during which interrupts cannot be +delivered, and after which, the guest time may need to be caught up. NTP may +be able to help to some degree here, as the clock correction required is +typically small enough to fall in the NTP-correctable window. + +An additional concern is that timers based off the TSC (or HPET, if the raw bus +clock is exposed) may now be running at different rates, requiring compensation +in some way in the hypervisor by virtualizing these timers. In addition, +migrating to a faster machine may preclude the use of a passthrough TSC, as a +faster clock cannot be made visible to a guest without the potential of time +advancing faster than usual. A slower clock is less of a problem, as it can +always be caught up to the original rate. KVM clock avoids these problems by +simply storing multipliers and offsets against the TSC for the guest to convert +back into nanosecond resolution values. + +4.5) Scheduling + +Since scheduling may be based on precise timing and firing of interrupts, the +scheduling algorithms of an operating system may be adversely affected by +virtualization. In theory, the effect is random and should be universally +distributed, but in contrived as well as real scenarios (guest device access, +causes of virtualization exits, possible context switch), this may not always +be the case. The effect of this has not been well studied. + +In an attempt to work around this, several implementations have provided a +paravirtualized scheduler clock, which reveals the true amount of CPU time for +which a virtual machine has been running. + +4.6) Watchdogs + +Watchdog timers, such as the lock detector in Linux may fire accidentally when +running under hardware virtualization due to timer interrupts being delayed or +misinterpretation of the passage of real time. Usually, these warnings are +spurious and can be ignored, but in some circumstances it may be necessary to +disable such detection. + +4.7) Delays and precision timing + +Precise timing and delays may not be possible in a virtualized system. This +can happen if the system is controlling physical hardware, or issues delays to +compensate for slower I/O to and from devices. The first issue is not solvable +in general for a virtualized system; hardware control software can't be +adequately virtualized without a full real-time operating system, which would +require an RT aware virtualization platform. + +The second issue may cause performance problems, but this is unlikely to be a +significant issue. In many cases these delays may be eliminated through +configuration or paravirtualization. + +4.8) Covert channels and leaks + +In addition to the above problems, time information will inevitably leak to the +guest about the host in anything but a perfect implementation of virtualized +time. This may allow the guest to infer the presence of a hypervisor (as in a +red-pill type detection), and it may allow information to leak between guests +by using CPU utilization itself as a signalling channel. Preventing such +problems would require completely isolated virtual time which may not track +real time any longer. This may be useful in certain security or QA contexts, +but in general isn't recommended for real-world deployment scenarios. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt index f6f8025..1565eef 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt @@ -1024,6 +1024,10 @@ ThinkPad-specific interface. The driver will disable its native backlight brightness control interface if it detects that the standard ACPI interface is available in the ThinkPad. +If you want to use the thinkpad-acpi backlight brightness control +instead of the generic ACPI video backlight brightness control for some +reason, you should use the acpi_backlight=vendor kernel parameter. + The brightness_enable module parameter can be used to control whether the LCD brightness control feature will be enabled when available. brightness_enable=0 forces it to be disabled. brightness_enable=1 diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds-class.txt index 8fd5ca2..58b266b 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds-class.txt @@ -60,15 +60,18 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the -blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemented, triggers can -attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set() -function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL -otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software. - -The blink_set() function should choose a user friendly blinking -value if it is called with *delay_on==0 && *delay_off==0 parameters. In -this case the driver should give back the chosen value through delay_on -and delay_off parameters to the leds subsystem. +blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). To set an LED to blinking, +however, it is better to use use the API function led_blink_set(), +as it will check and implement software fallback if necessary. + +To turn off blinking again, use the API function led_brightness_set() +as that will not just set the LED brightness but also stop any software +timers that may have been required for blinking. + +The blink_set() function should choose a user friendly blinking value +if it is called with *delay_on==0 && *delay_off==0 parameters. In this +case the driver should give back the chosen value through delay_on and +delay_off parameters to the leds subsystem. Setting the brightness to zero with brightness_set() callback function should completely turn off the LED and cancel the previously programmed diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4d8d15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +Kernel driver for lp5521 +======================== + +* National Semiconductor LP5521 led driver chip +* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5521.html + +Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo +Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com) + +Description +----------- + +LP5521 can drive up to 3 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via +the led class control interface. Channels have generic names: +lp5521:channelx, where x is 0 .. 2 + +All three channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs. +More details of the instructions can be found from the public data sheet. + +Control interface for the engines: +x is 1 .. 3 +enginex_mode : disabled, load, run +enginex_load : store program (visible only in engine load mode) + +Example (start to blink the channel 2 led): +cd /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel2/device +echo "load" > engine3_mode +echo "037f4d0003ff6000" > engine3_load +echo "run" > engine3_mode + +stop the engine: +echo "disabled" > engine3_mode + +sysfs contains a selftest entry. +The test communicates with the chip and checks that +the clock mode is automatically set to the requested one. + +Each channel has its own led current settings. +/sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/led_current - RW +/sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/max_current - RO +Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA + +example platform data: + +Note: chan_nr can have values between 0 and 2. + +static struct lp5521_led_config lp5521_led_config[] = { + { + .chan_nr = 0, + .led_current = 50, + .max_current = 130, + }, { + .chan_nr = 1, + .led_current = 0, + .max_current = 130, + }, { + .chan_nr = 2, + .led_current = 0, + .max_current = 130, + } +}; + +static int lp5521_setup(void) +{ + /* setup HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5521_release(void) +{ + /* Release HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5521_enable(bool state) +{ + /* Control of chip enable signal */ +} + +static struct lp5521_platform_data lp5521_platform_data = { + .led_config = lp5521_led_config, + .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5521_led_config), + .clock_mode = LP5521_CLOCK_EXT, + .setup_resources = lp5521_setup, + .release_resources = lp5521_release, + .enable = lp5521_enable, +}; + +If the current is set to 0 in the platform data, that channel is +disabled and it is not visible in the sysfs. diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fad2feb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +Kernel driver for lp5523 +======================== + +* National Semiconductor LP5523 led driver chip +* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5523.html + +Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo +Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com) + +Description +----------- +LP5523 can drive up to 9 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via +the led class control interface. Channels have generic names: +lp5523:channelx where x is 0...8 + +The chip provides 3 engines. Each engine can control channels without +interaction from the main CPU. Details of the micro engine code can be found +from the public data sheet. Leds can be muxed to different channels. + +Control interface for the engines: +x is 1 .. 3 +enginex_mode : disabled, load, run +enginex_load : microcode load (visible only in load mode) +enginex_leds : led mux control (visible only in load mode) + +cd /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/device +echo "load" > engine3_mode +echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > engine3_load +echo "111111111" > engine3_leds +echo "run" > engine3_mode + +sysfs contains a selftest entry. It measures each channel +voltage level and checks if it looks reasonable. If the level is too high, +the led is missing; if the level is too low, there is a short circuit. + +Selftest uses always the current from the platform data. + +Each channel contains led current settings. +/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/led_current - RW +/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/max_current - RO +Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA + +Example platform data: + +Note - chan_nr can have values between 0 and 8. + +static struct lp5523_led_config lp5523_led_config[] = { + { + .chan_nr = 0, + .led_current = 50, + .max_current = 130, + }, +... + }, { + .chan_nr = 8, + .led_current = 50, + .max_current = 130, + } +}; + +static int lp5523_setup(void) +{ + /* Setup HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5523_release(void) +{ + /* Release HW resources */ +} + +static void lp5523_enable(bool state) +{ + /* Control chip enable signal */ +} + +static struct lp5523_platform_data lp5523_platform_data = { + .led_config = lp5523_led_config, + .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5523_led_config), + .clock_mode = LP5523_CLOCK_EXT, + .setup_resources = lp5523_setup, + .release_resources = lp5523_release, + .enable = lp5523_enable, +}; diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile b/Documentation/lguest/Makefile index 28c8cdf..bebac6b 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/lguest/Makefile @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ # This creates the demonstration utility "lguest" which runs a Linux guest. -CFLAGS:=-m32 -Wall -Wmissing-declarations -Wmissing-prototypes -O3 -I../../include -I../../arch/x86/include -U_FORTIFY_SOURCE +# Missing headers? Add "-I../../include -I../../arch/x86/include" +CFLAGS:=-m32 -Wall -Wmissing-declarations -Wmissing-prototypes -O3 -U_FORTIFY_SOURCE all: lguest diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c index e9ce3c5..dc73bc5 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c @@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ #include <limits.h> #include <stddef.h> #include <signal.h> -#include "linux/lguest_launcher.h" -#include "linux/virtio_config.h" -#include "linux/virtio_net.h" -#include "linux/virtio_blk.h" -#include "linux/virtio_console.h" -#include "linux/virtio_rng.h" -#include "linux/virtio_ring.h" -#include "asm/bootparam.h" +#include <linux/virtio_config.h> +#include <linux/virtio_net.h> +#include <linux/virtio_blk.h> +#include <linux/virtio_console.h> +#include <linux/virtio_rng.h> +#include <linux/virtio_ring.h> +#include <asm/bootparam.h> +#include "../../include/linux/lguest_launcher.h" /*L:110 * We can ignore the 42 include files we need for this program, but I do want * to draw attention to the use of kernel-style types. @@ -1447,14 +1447,15 @@ static void add_to_bridge(int fd, const char *if_name, const char *br_name) static void configure_device(int fd, const char *tapif, u32 ipaddr) { struct ifreq ifr; - struct sockaddr_in *sin = (struct sockaddr_in *)&ifr.ifr_addr; + struct sockaddr_in sin; memset(&ifr, 0, sizeof(ifr)); strcpy(ifr.ifr_name, tapif); /* Don't read these incantations. Just cut & paste them like I did! */ - sin->sin_family = AF_INET; - sin->sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(ipaddr); + sin.sin_family = AF_INET; + sin.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(ipaddr); + memcpy(&ifr.ifr_addr, &sin, sizeof(sin)); if (ioctl(fd, SIOCSIFADDR, &ifr) != 0) err(1, "Setting %s interface address", tapif); ifr.ifr_flags = IFF_UP; @@ -1639,15 +1640,6 @@ static void blk_request(struct virtqueue *vq) off = out->sector * 512; /* - * The block device implements "barriers", where the Guest indicates - * that it wants all previous writes to occur before this write. We - * don't have a way of asking our kernel to do a barrier, so we just - * synchronize all the data in the file. Pretty poor, no? - */ - if (out->type & VIRTIO_BLK_T_BARRIER) - fdatasync(vblk->fd); - - /* * In general the virtio block driver is allowed to try SCSI commands. * It'd be nice if we supported eject, for example, but we don't. */ @@ -1679,6 +1671,13 @@ static void blk_request(struct virtqueue *vq) /* Die, bad Guest, die. */ errx(1, "Write past end %llu+%u", off, ret); } + + wlen = sizeof(*in); + *in = (ret >= 0 ? VIRTIO_BLK_S_OK : VIRTIO_BLK_S_IOERR); + } else if (out->type & VIRTIO_BLK_T_FLUSH) { + /* Flush */ + ret = fdatasync(vblk->fd); + verbose("FLUSH fdatasync: %i\n", ret); wlen = sizeof(*in); *in = (ret >= 0 ? VIRTIO_BLK_S_OK : VIRTIO_BLK_S_IOERR); } else { @@ -1702,15 +1701,6 @@ static void blk_request(struct virtqueue *vq) } } - /* - * OK, so we noted that it was pretty poor to use an fdatasync as a - * barrier. But Christoph Hellwig points out that we need a sync - * *afterwards* as well: "Barriers specify no reordering to the front - * or the back." And Jens Axboe confirmed it, so here we are: - */ - if (out->type & VIRTIO_BLK_T_BARRIER) - fdatasync(vblk->fd); - /* Finished that request. */ add_used(vq, head, wlen); } @@ -1735,8 +1725,8 @@ static void setup_block_file(const char *filename) vblk->fd = open_or_die(filename, O_RDWR|O_LARGEFILE); vblk->len = lseek64(vblk->fd, 0, SEEK_END); - /* We support barriers. */ - add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_BLK_F_BARRIER); + /* We support FLUSH. */ + add_feature(dev, VIRTIO_BLK_F_FLUSH); /* Tell Guest how many sectors this device has. */ conf.capacity = cpu_to_le64(vblk->len / 512); diff --git a/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt b/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt index f2481ca..951eb9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt +++ b/Documentation/make/headers_install.txt @@ -39,8 +39,9 @@ INSTALL_HDR_PATH indicates where to install the headers. It defaults to The command "make headers_install_all" exports headers for all architectures simultaneously. (This is mostly of interest to distribution maintainers, who create an architecture-independent tarball from the resulting include -directory.) Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv" -or "ln -s" before building a C library with headers exported this way. +directory.) You also can use HDR_ARCH_LIST to specify list of architectures. +Remember to provide the appropriate linux/asm directory via "mv" or "ln -s" +before building a C library with headers exported this way. The kernel header export infrastructure is maintained by David Woodhouse <dwmw2@infradead.org>. diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/apds990x.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/apds990x.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d5408ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/apds990x.txt @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +Kernel driver apds990x +====================== + +Supported chips: +Avago APDS990X + +Data sheet: +Not freely available + +Author: +Samu Onkalo <samu.p.onkalo@nokia.com> + +Description +----------- + +APDS990x is a combined ambient light and proximity sensor. ALS and proximity +functionality are highly connected. ALS measurement path must be running +while the proximity functionality is enabled. + +ALS produces raw measurement values for two channels: Clear channel +(infrared + visible light) and IR only. However, threshold comparisons happen +using clear channel only. Lux value and the threshold level on the HW +might vary quite much depending the spectrum of the light source. + +Driver makes necessary conversions to both directions so that user handles +only lux values. Lux value is calculated using information from the both +channels. HW threshold level is calculated from the given lux value to match +with current type of the lightning. Sometimes inaccuracy of the estimations +lead to false interrupt, but that doesn't harm. + +ALS contains 4 different gain steps. Driver automatically +selects suitable gain step. After each measurement, reliability of the results +is estimated and new measurement is trigged if necessary. + +Platform data can provide tuned values to the conversion formulas if +values are known. Otherwise plain sensor default values are used. + +Proximity side is little bit simpler. There is no need for complex conversions. +It produces directly usable values. + +Driver controls chip operational state using pm_runtime framework. +Voltage regulators are controlled based on chip operational state. + +SYSFS +----- + + +chip_id + RO - shows detected chip type and version + +power_state + RW - enable / disable chip. Uses counting logic + 1 enables the chip + 0 disables the chip +lux0_input + RO - measured lux value + sysfs_notify called when threshold interrupt occurs + +lux0_sensor_range + RO - lux0_input max value. Actually never reaches since sensor tends + to saturate much before that. Real max value varies depending + on the light spectrum etc. + +lux0_rate + RW - measurement rate in Hz + +lux0_rate_avail + RO - supported measurement rates + +lux0_calibscale + RW - calibration value. Set to neutral value by default. + Output results are multiplied with calibscale / calibscale_default + value. + +lux0_calibscale_default + RO - neutral calibration value + +lux0_thresh_above_value + RW - HI level threshold value. All results above the value + trigs an interrupt. 65535 (i.e. sensor_range) disables the above + interrupt. + +lux0_thresh_below_value + RW - LO level threshold value. All results below the value + trigs an interrupt. 0 disables the below interrupt. + +prox0_raw + RO - measured proximity value + sysfs_notify called when threshold interrupt occurs + +prox0_sensor_range + RO - prox0_raw max value (1023) + +prox0_raw_en + RW - enable / disable proximity - uses counting logic + 1 enables the proximity + 0 disables the proximity + +prox0_reporting_mode + RW - trigger / periodic. In "trigger" mode the driver tells two possible + values: 0 or prox0_sensor_range value. 0 means no proximity, + 1023 means proximity. This causes minimal number of interrupts. + In "periodic" mode the driver reports all values above + prox0_thresh_above. This causes more interrupts, but it can give + _rough_ estimate about the distance. + +prox0_reporting_mode_avail + RO - accepted values to prox0_reporting_mode (trigger, periodic) + +prox0_thresh_above_value + RW - threshold level which trigs proximity events. diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/bh1770glc.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/bh1770glc.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d64c01 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/bh1770glc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +Kernel driver bh1770glc +======================= + +Supported chips: +ROHM BH1770GLC +OSRAM SFH7770 + +Data sheet: +Not freely available + +Author: +Samu Onkalo <samu.p.onkalo@nokia.com> + +Description +----------- +BH1770GLC and SFH7770 are combined ambient light and proximity sensors. +ALS and proximity parts operates on their own, but they shares common I2C +interface and interrupt logic. In principle they can run on their own, +but ALS side results are used to estimate reliability of the proximity sensor. + +ALS produces 16 bit lux values. The chip contains interrupt logic to produce +low and high threshold interrupts. + +Proximity part contains IR-led driver up to 3 IR leds. The chip measures +amount of reflected IR light and produces proximity result. Resolution is +8 bit. Driver supports only one channel. Driver uses ALS results to estimate +reliability of the proximity results. Thus ALS is always running while +proximity detection is needed. + +Driver uses threshold interrupts to avoid need for polling the values. +Proximity low interrupt doesn't exists in the chip. This is simulated +by using a delayed work. As long as there is proximity threshold above +interrupts the delayed work is pushed forward. So, when proximity level goes +below the threshold value, there is no interrupt and the delayed work will +finally run. This is handled as no proximity indication. + +Chip state is controlled via runtime pm framework when enabled in config. + +Calibscale factor is used to hide differences between the chips. By default +value set to neutral state meaning factor of 1.00. To get proper values, +calibrated source of light is needed as a reference. Calibscale factor is set +so that measurement produces about the expected lux value. + +SYSFS +----- + +chip_id + RO - shows detected chip type and version + +power_state + RW - enable / disable chip. Uses counting logic + 1 enables the chip + 0 disables the chip + +lux0_input + RO - measured lux value + sysfs_notify called when threshold interrupt occurs + +lux0_sensor_range + RO - lux0_input max value + +lux0_rate + RW - measurement rate in Hz + +lux0_rate_avail + RO - supported measurement rates + +lux0_thresh_above_value + RW - HI level threshold value. All results above the value + trigs an interrupt. 65535 (i.e. sensor_range) disables the above + interrupt. + +lux0_thresh_below_value + RW - LO level threshold value. All results below the value + trigs an interrupt. 0 disables the below interrupt. + +lux0_calibscale + RW - calibration value. Set to neutral value by default. + Output results are multiplied with calibscale / calibscale_default + value. + +lux0_calibscale_default + RO - neutral calibration value + +prox0_raw + RO - measured proximity value + sysfs_notify called when threshold interrupt occurs + +prox0_sensor_range + RO - prox0_raw max value + +prox0_raw_en + RW - enable / disable proximity - uses counting logic + 1 enables the proximity + 0 disables the proximity + +prox0_thresh_above_count + RW - number of proximity interrupts needed before triggering the event + +prox0_rate_above + RW - Measurement rate (in Hz) when the level is above threshold + i.e. when proximity on has been reported. + +prox0_rate_below + RW - Measurement rate (in Hz) when the level is below threshold + i.e. when proximity off has been reported. + +prox0_rate_avail + RO - Supported proximity measurement rates in Hz + +prox0_thresh_above0_value + RW - threshold level which trigs proximity events. + Filtered by persistence filter (prox0_thresh_above_count) + +prox0_thresh_above1_value + RW - threshold level which trigs event immediately diff --git a/Documentation/mutex-design.txt b/Documentation/mutex-design.txt index c91ccc0..38c10fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/mutex-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/mutex-design.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ firstly, there's nothing wrong with semaphores. But if the simpler mutex semantics are sufficient for your code, then there are a couple of advantages of mutexes: - - 'struct mutex' is smaller on most architectures: .e.g on x86, + - 'struct mutex' is smaller on most architectures: E.g. on x86, 'struct semaphore' is 20 bytes, 'struct mutex' is 16 bytes. A smaller structure size means less RAM footprint, and better CPU-cache utilization. @@ -136,3 +136,4 @@ the APIs of 'struct mutex' have been streamlined: void mutex_lock_nested(struct mutex *lock, unsigned int subclass); int mutex_lock_interruptible_nested(struct mutex *lock, unsigned int subclass); + int atomic_dec_and_mutex_lock(atomic_t *cnt, struct mutex *lock); diff --git a/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29ad4b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/LICENSE.qlcnic @@ -0,0 +1,327 @@ +Copyright (c) 2009-2010 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux qlcnic NIC Driver + +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. +You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). + +You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file +under the following terms: + + 1. Redistribution of source code (only if applicable), + must retain the above copyright notice, this list of + conditions and the following disclaimer. + + 2. Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the above + copyright notice, this list of conditions and the + following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other + materials provided with the distribution. + + 3. The name of QLogic Corporation may not be used to + endorse or promote products derived from this software + without specific prior written permission + +REGARDLESS OF WHAT LICENSING MECHANISM IS USED OR APPLICABLE, +THIS PROGRAM IS PROVIDED BY QLOGIC CORPORATION "AS IS'' AND ANY +EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR +BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, +EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED +TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, +DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON +ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, +OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY +OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + +USER ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THIS PROGRAM WILL NOT +CREATE OR GIVE GROUNDS FOR A LICENSE BY IMPLICATION, ESTOPPEL, OR +OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, +TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN +ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN +COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77f0cdd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ +[state: 21-11-2010] + +BATMAN-ADV +---------- + +Batman advanced is a new approach to wireless networking which +does no longer operate on the IP basis. Unlike the batman daemon, +which exchanges information using UDP packets and sets routing +tables, batman-advanced operates on ISO/OSI Layer 2 only and uses +and routes (or better: bridges) Ethernet Frames. It emulates a +virtual network switch of all nodes participating. Therefore all +nodes appear to be link local, thus all higher operating proto- +cols won't be affected by any changes within the network. You can +run almost any protocol above batman advanced, prominent examples +are: IPv4, IPv6, DHCP, IPX. + +Batman advanced was implemented as a Linux kernel driver to re- +duce the overhead to a minimum. It does not depend on any (other) +network driver, and can be used on wifi as well as ethernet lan, +vpn, etc ... (anything with ethernet-style layer 2). + +CONFIGURATION +------------- + +Load the batman-adv module into your kernel: + +# insmod batman-adv.ko + +The module is now waiting for activation. You must add some in- +terfaces on which batman can operate. After loading the module +batman advanced will scan your systems interfaces to search for +compatible interfaces. Once found, it will create subfolders in +the /sys directories of each supported interface, e.g. + +# ls /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/ +# iface_status mesh_iface + +If an interface does not have the "batman_adv" subfolder it prob- +ably is not supported. Not supported interfaces are: loopback, +non-ethernet and batman's own interfaces. + +Note: After the module was loaded it will continuously watch for +new interfaces to verify the compatibility. There is no need to +reload the module if you plug your USB wifi adapter into your ma- +chine after batman advanced was initially loaded. + +To activate a given interface simply write "bat0" into its +"mesh_iface" file inside the batman_adv subfolder: + +# echo bat0 > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface + +Repeat this step for all interfaces you wish to add. Now batman +starts using/broadcasting on this/these interface(s). + +By reading the "iface_status" file you can check its status: + +# cat /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/iface_status +# active + +To deactivate an interface you have to write "none" into its +"mesh_iface" file: + +# echo none > /sys/class/net/eth0/batman_adv/mesh_iface + + +All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface +folder: + +# ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/ +# aggregated_ogms bonding fragmentation orig_interval +# vis_mode + + +There is a special folder for debugging informations: + +# ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ +# originators socket transtable_global transtable_local +# vis_data + + +Some of the files contain all sort of status information regard- +ing the mesh network. For example, you can view the table of +originators (mesh participants) with: + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/originators + +Other files allow to change batman's behaviour to better fit your +requirements. For instance, you can check the current originator +interval (value in milliseconds which determines how often batman +sends its broadcast packets): + +# cat /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval +# 1000 + +and also change its value: + +# echo 3000 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/orig_interval + +In very mobile scenarios, you might want to adjust the originator +interval to a lower value. This will make the mesh more respon- +sive to topology changes, but will also increase the overhead. + + +USAGE +----- + +To make use of your newly created mesh, batman advanced provides +a new interface "bat0" which you should use from this point on. +All interfaces added to batman advanced are not relevant any +longer because batman handles them for you. Basically, one "hands +over" the data by using the batman interface and batman will make +sure it reaches its destination. + +The "bat0" interface can be used like any other regular inter- +face. It needs an IP address which can be either statically con- +figured or dynamically (by using DHCP or similar services): + +# NodeA: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.1 +# NodeB: ifconfig bat0 192.168.0.2 +# NodeB: ping 192.168.0.1 + +Note: In order to avoid problems remove all IP addresses previ- +ously assigned to interfaces now used by batman advanced, e.g. + +# ifconfig eth0 0.0.0.0 + + +VISUALIZATION +------------- + +If you want topology visualization, at least one mesh node must +be configured as VIS-server: + +# echo "server" > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/vis_mode + +Each node is either configured as "server" or as "client" (de- +fault: "client"). Clients send their topology data to the server +next to them, and server synchronize with other servers. If there +is no server configured (default) within the mesh, no topology +information will be transmitted. With these "synchronizing +servers", there can be 1 or more vis servers sharing the same (or +at least very similar) data. + +When configured as server, you can get a topology snapshot of +your mesh: + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/vis_data + +This raw output is intended to be easily parsable and convertable +with other tools. Have a look at the batctl README if you want a +vis output in dot or json format for instance and how those out- +puts could then be visualised in an image. + +The raw format consists of comma separated values per entry where +each entry is giving information about a certain source inter- +face. Each entry can/has to have the following values: +-> "mac" - mac address of an originator's source interface + (each line begins with it) +-> "TQ mac value" - src mac's link quality towards mac address + of a neighbor originator's interface which + is being used for routing +-> "HNA mac" - HNA announced by source mac +-> "PRIMARY" - this is a primary interface +-> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source + (requires preceding PRIMARY) + +The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being the best. +The HNA entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh +via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network. The PRIMARY/SEC +values are only applied on primary interfaces + + +LOGGING/DEBUGGING +----------------- + +All error messages, warnings and information messages are sent to +the kernel log. Depending on your operating system distribution +this can be read in one of a number of ways. Try using the com- +mands: dmesg, logread, or looking in the files /var/log/kern.log +or /var/log/syslog. All batman-adv messages are prefixed with +"batman-adv:" So to see just these messages try + +# dmesg | grep batman-adv + +When investigating problems with your mesh network it is some- +times necessary to see more detail debug messages. This must be +enabled when compiling the batman-adv module. When building bat- +man-adv as part of kernel, use "make menuconfig" and enable the +option "B.A.T.M.A.N. debugging". + +Those additional debug messages can be accessed using a special +file in debugfs + +# cat /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/log + +The additional debug output is by default disabled. It can be en- +abled during run time. Following log_levels are defined: + +0 - All debug output disabled +1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting +2 - Enable route or hna added / changed / deleted +3 - Enable all messages + +The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file +/sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level. e.g. + +# echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level + +will enable debug messages for when routes or HNAs change. + + +BATCTL +------ + +As batman advanced operates on layer 2 all hosts participating in +the virtual switch are completely transparent for all protocols +above layer 2. Therefore the common diagnosis tools do not work +as expected. To overcome these problems batctl was created. At +the moment the batctl contains ping, traceroute, tcpdump and +interfaces to the kernel module settings. + +For more information, please see the manpage (man batctl). + +batctl is available on http://www.open-mesh.org/ + + +CONTACT +------- + +Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :) + +IRC: #batman on irc.freenode.org +Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@b.a.t.m.a.n@lists.open-mesh.org + (optional subscription at + https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n) + +You can also contact the Authors: + +Marek Lindner <lindner_marek@yahoo.de> +Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de> diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index d2b62b7..5dc6387 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -765,6 +765,14 @@ xmit_hash_policy does not exist, and the layer2 policy is the only policy. The layer2+3 value was added for bonding version 3.2.2. +resend_igmp + + Specifies the number of IGMP membership reports to be issued after + a failover event. One membership report is issued immediately after + the failover, subsequent packets are sent in each 200ms interval. + + The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option + was added for bonding version 3.7.0. 3. Configuring Bonding Devices ============================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index cd79735..5b04b67 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ This file contains 4.1.2 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_ERR_FILTER 4.1.3 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_LOOPBACK 4.1.4 RAW socket option CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS + 4.1.5 RAW socket returned message flags 4.2 Broadcast Manager protocol sockets (SOCK_DGRAM) 4.3 connected transport protocols (SOCK_SEQPACKET) 4.4 unconnected transport protocols (SOCK_DGRAM) @@ -471,6 +472,17 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: setsockopt(s, SOL_CAN_RAW, CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS, &recv_own_msgs, sizeof(recv_own_msgs)); + 4.1.5 RAW socket returned message flags + + When using recvmsg() call, the msg->msg_flags may contain following flags: + + MSG_DONTROUTE: set when the received frame was created on the local host. + + MSG_CONFIRM: set when the frame was sent via the socket it is received on. + This flag can be interpreted as a 'transmission confirmation' when the + CAN driver supports the echo of frames on driver level, see 3.2 and 6.2. + In order to receive such messages, CAN_RAW_RECV_OWN_MSGS must be set. + 4.2 Broadcast Manager protocol sockets (SOCK_DGRAM) 4.3 connected transport protocols (SOCK_SEQPACKET) 4.4 unconnected transport protocols (SOCK_DGRAM) diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt index a62fdf7..b395ca6 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/dccp.txt @@ -1,18 +1,20 @@ DCCP protocol -============ +============= Contents ======== - - Introduction - Missing features - Socket options +- Sysctl variables +- IOCTLs +- Other tunables - Notes + Introduction ============ - Datagram Congestion Control Protocol (DCCP) is an unreliable, connection oriented protocol designed to solve issues present in UDP and TCP, particularly for real-time and multimedia (streaming) traffic. @@ -29,9 +31,9 @@ It has a base protocol and pluggable congestion control IDs (CCIDs). DCCP is a Proposed Standard (RFC 2026), and the homepage for DCCP as a protocol is at http://www.ietf.org/html.charters/dccp-charter.html + Missing features ================ - The Linux DCCP implementation does not currently support all the features that are specified in RFCs 4340...42. @@ -45,6 +47,25 @@ http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP_Testing#Experimental_DCCP_source_tree Socket options ============== +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_ID sets the dequeuing policy for outgoing packets. It takes +a policy ID as argument and can only be set before the connection (i.e. changes +during an established connection are not supported). Currently, two policies are +defined: the "simple" policy (DCCPQ_POLICY_SIMPLE), which does nothing special, +and a priority-based variant (DCCPQ_POLICY_PRIO). The latter allows to pass an +u32 priority value as ancillary data to sendmsg(), where higher numbers indicate +a higher packet priority (similar to SO_PRIORITY). This ancillary data needs to +be formatted using a cmsg(3) message header filled in as follows: + cmsg->cmsg_level = SOL_DCCP; + cmsg->cmsg_type = DCCP_SCM_PRIORITY; + cmsg->cmsg_len = CMSG_LEN(sizeof(uint32_t)); /* or CMSG_LEN(4) */ + +DCCP_SOCKOPT_QPOLICY_TXQLEN sets the maximum length of the output queue. A zero +value is always interpreted as unbounded queue length. If different from zero, +the interpretation of this parameter depends on the current dequeuing policy +(see above): the "simple" policy will enforce a fixed queue size by returning +EAGAIN, whereas the "prio" policy enforces a fixed queue length by dropping the +lowest-priority packet first. The default value for this parameter is +initialised from /proc/sys/net/dccp/default/tx_qlen. DCCP_SOCKOPT_SERVICE sets the service. The specification mandates use of service codes (RFC 4340, sec. 8.1.2); if this socket option is not set, @@ -112,6 +133,7 @@ DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID_TX_INFO On unidirectional connections it is useful to close the unused half-connection via shutdown (SHUT_WR or SHUT_RD): this will reduce per-packet processing costs. + Sysctl variables ================ Several DCCP default parameters can be managed by the following sysctls @@ -155,15 +177,30 @@ sync_ratelimit = 125 ms sequence-invalid packets on the same socket (RFC 4340, 7.5.4). The unit of this parameter is milliseconds; a value of 0 disables rate-limiting. + IOCTLS ====== FIONREAD Works as in udp(7): returns in the `int' argument pointer the size of the next pending datagram in bytes, or 0 when no datagram is pending. + +Other tunables +============== +Per-route rto_min support + CCID-2 supports the RTAX_RTO_MIN per-route setting for the minimum value + of the RTO timer. This setting can be modified via the 'rto_min' option + of iproute2; for example: + > ip route change 10.0.0.0/24 rto_min 250j dev wlan0 + > ip route add 10.0.0.254/32 rto_min 800j dev wlan0 + > ip route show dev wlan0 + CCID-3 also supports the rto_min setting: it is used to define the lower + bound for the expiry of the nofeedback timer. This can be useful on LANs + with very low RTTs (e.g., loopback, Gbit ethernet). + + Notes ===== - DCCP does not travel through NAT successfully at present on many boxes. This is because the checksum covers the pseudo-header as per TCP and UDP. Linux NAT support for DCCP has been added. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt index 944aa55..162f323 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e100.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e100.txt @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Tx Descriptors: Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data ethtool -G eth? tx n, where n is the number of desired tx descriptors. Speed/Duplex: The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by - default. Ethtool can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. + default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex. ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half} @@ -126,30 +126,21 @@ Additional Configurations ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support - for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading - ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1. - + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is provided through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with Red - Hat* 8.0. For other Linux distributions, download and install Ethtool from - the following website: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + WoL is provided through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on enabling + WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. - NAPI ---- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt index 2df7186..71ca958 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt @@ -1,82 +1,35 @@ Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family of Adapters =============================================================== -September 26, 2006 - +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. Contents ======== -- In This Release - Identifying Your Adapter -- Building and Installation - Command Line Parameters - Speed and Duplex Configuration - Additional Configurations -- Known Issues - Support - -In This Release -=============== - -This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family -of Adapters. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based systems. - -For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation -supplied with your Intel PRO/1000 adapter. All hardware requirements listed -apply to use with Linux. - -The following features are now available in supported kernels: - - Native VLANs - - Channel Bonding (teaming) - - SNMP - -Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: -/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt - -The driver information previously displayed in the /proc filesystem is not -supported in this release. Alternatively, you can use ethtool (version 1.6 -or later), lspci, and ifconfig to obtain the same information. - -Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section "Additional -Configurations" later in this document. - -NOTE: The Intel(R) 82562v 10/100 Network Connection only provides 10/100 -support. - - Identifying Your Adapter ======================== For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & Driver ID Guide at: - http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm + http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the networking link on the left to search for your adapter: - http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp - + http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/home.htm Command Line Parameters ======================= -If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters -are used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command -using this syntax: - - modprobe e1000 [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] - -For example, with two PRO/1000 PCI adapters, entering: - - modprobe e1000 TxDescriptors=80,128 - -loads the e1000 driver with 80 TX descriptors for the first adapter and -128 TX descriptors for the second adapter. - The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, unless otherwise noted. @@ -89,10 +42,6 @@ NOTES: For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed parameters, see the application note at: http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm - A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to - the data buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware. - - AutoNeg ------- (Supported only on adapters with copper connections) @@ -106,7 +55,6 @@ Duplex parameters must not be specified. NOTE: Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more information on the AutoNeg parameter. - Duplex ------ (Supported only on adapters with copper connections) @@ -119,7 +67,6 @@ set to auto-negotiate, the board auto-detects the correct duplex. If the link partner is forced (either full or half), Duplex defaults to half- duplex. - FlowControl ----------- Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) @@ -128,16 +75,16 @@ Default Value: Reads flow control settings from the EEPROM This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to Ethernet PAUSE frames. - InterruptThrottleRate --------------------- (not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters) -Valid Range: 0,1,3,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative) +Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative, + 4=simplified balancing) Default Value: 3 The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter -will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the -adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter +will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the +adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter will generate per second. Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100 @@ -146,37 +93,43 @@ per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly. -The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static -InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for -all traffic types,but lacking in small packet performance and latency. -The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and +The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static +InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for +all traffic types,but lacking in small packet performance and latency. +The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented. Since 7.3.x, the driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which -it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic +it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last -timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value +timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value for that traffic. The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into -classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is -adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined: +classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is +adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined: "Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency", for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small -packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or +packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or minimal traffic. -In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000 -for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low -latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased +In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000 +for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low +latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most applications. For situations where low latency is vital such as cluster or grid computing, the algorithm can reduce latency even more when InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates -the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to +the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to 70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency". +In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and +RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the +interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the +traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could +be as high as 8000. + Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable for bulk throughput traffic. @@ -212,8 +165,6 @@ NOTE: When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters be platform-specific. If CPU utilization is not a concern, use RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default driver settings. - - RxDescriptors ------------- Valid Range: 80-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters @@ -225,15 +176,14 @@ by the driver. Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets, at the expense of increased system memory utilization. Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for each -descriptor and can be either 2048, 4096, 8192, or 16384 bytes, depending +descriptor and can be either 2048, 4096, 8192, or 16384 bytes, depending on the MTU setting. The maximum MTU size is 16110. -NOTE: MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo - Frames. Depending on the available system resources, the request - for a higher number of receive descriptors may be denied. In this +NOTE: MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo + Frames. Depending on the available system resources, the request + for a higher number of receive descriptors may be denied. In this case, use a lower number. - RxIntDelay ---------- Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) @@ -254,7 +204,6 @@ CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may restoring the network connection. To eliminate the potential for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0. - RxAbsIntDelay ------------- (This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.) @@ -268,7 +217,6 @@ packet is received within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network conditions. - Speed ----- (This parameter is supported only on adapters with copper connections.) @@ -280,7 +228,6 @@ Speed forces the line speed to the specified value in megabits per second partner is set to auto-negotiate, the board will auto-detect the correct speed. Duplex should also be set when Speed is set to either 10 or 100. - TxDescriptors ------------- Valid Range: 80-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters @@ -295,6 +242,36 @@ NOTE: Depending on the available system resources, the request for a higher number of transmit descriptors may be denied. In this case, use a lower number. +TxDescriptorStep +---------------- +Valid Range: 1 (use every Tx Descriptor) + 4 (use every 4th Tx Descriptor) + +Default Value: 1 (use every Tx Descriptor) + +On certain non-Intel architectures, it has been observed that intense TX +traffic bursts of short packets may result in an improper descriptor +writeback. If this occurs, the driver will report a "TX Timeout" and reset +the adapter, after which the transmit flow will restart, though data may +have stalled for as much as 10 seconds before it resumes. + +The improper writeback does not occur on the first descriptor in a system +memory cache-line, which is typically 32 bytes, or 4 descriptors long. + +Setting TxDescriptorStep to a value of 4 will ensure that all TX descriptors +are aligned to the start of a system memory cache line, and so this problem +will not occur. + +NOTES: Setting TxDescriptorStep to 4 effectively reduces the number of + TxDescriptors available for transmits to 1/4 of the normal allocation. + This has a possible negative performance impact, which may be + compensated for by allocating more descriptors using the TxDescriptors + module parameter. + + There are other conditions which may result in "TX Timeout", which will + not be resolved by the use of the TxDescriptorStep parameter. As the + issue addressed by this parameter has never been observed on Intel + Architecture platforms, it should not be used on Intel platforms. TxIntDelay ---------- @@ -307,7 +284,6 @@ efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors. - TxAbsIntDelay ------------- (This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.) @@ -330,6 +306,35 @@ Default Value: 1 A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware. +Copybreak +--------- +Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) +Default Value: 256 +Usage: insmod e1000.ko copybreak=128 + +Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX +buffer before handing it up the stack. + +This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a +single (not 1,1,1 etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and +it is also available during runtime at +/sys/module/e1000/parameters/copybreak + +SmartPowerDownEnable +-------------------- +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 0 (disabled) + +Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off +this parameter in supported chipsets. + +KumeranLockLoss +--------------- +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 1 (enabled) + +This workaround skips resetting the PHY at shutdown for the initial +silicon releases of ICH8 systems. Speed and Duplex Configuration ============================== @@ -385,40 +390,9 @@ If the link partner is forced to a specific speed and duplex, then this parameter should not be used. Instead, use the Speed and Duplex parameters previously mentioned to force the adapter to the same speed and duplex. - Additional Configurations ========================= - Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions - ------------------------------------------------- - Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started - is distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves - adding an alias line to /etc/modules.conf or /etc/modprobe.conf as well - as editing other system startup scripts and/or configuration files. Many - popular Linux distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. - To learn the proper way to configure a network device for your system, - refer to your distribution documentation. If during this process you are - asked for the driver or module name, the name for the Linux Base Driver - for the Intel(R) PRO/1000 Family of Adapters is e1000. - - As an example, if you install the e1000 driver for two PRO/1000 adapters - (eth0 and eth1) and set the speed and duplex to 10full and 100half, add - the following to modules.conf or or modprobe.conf: - - alias eth0 e1000 - alias eth1 e1000 - options e1000 Speed=10,100 Duplex=2,1 - - Viewing Link Messages - --------------------- - Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is - restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages - on your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following: - - dmesg -n 8 - - NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. - Jumbo Frames ------------ Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than @@ -437,9 +411,11 @@ Additional Configurations setting in a different location. Notes: - - - To enable Jumbo Frames, increase the MTU size on the interface beyond - 1500. + Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames + environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer + size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help. + See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/ + networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details. - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16110. This value coincides with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128. @@ -447,185 +423,28 @@ Additional Configurations - Using Jumbo Frames at 10 or 100 Mbps may result in poor performance or loss of link. - - Some Intel gigabit adapters that support Jumbo Frames have a frame size - limit of 9238 bytes, with a corresponding MTU size limit of 9216 bytes. - The adapters with this limitation are based on the Intel(R) 82571EB, - 82572EI, 82573L and 80003ES2LAN controller. These correspond to the - following product names: - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Server Adapter - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Desktop Adapter - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Network Connection - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Network Connection - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Server Adapter - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Network Connection - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PB Server Connection - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PL Network Connection - Intel(R) PRO/1000 EB Network Connection with I/O Acceleration - Intel(R) PRO/1000 EB Backplane Connection with I/O Acceleration - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter - - Adapters based on the Intel(R) 82542 and 82573V/E controller do not support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names: Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection - - The following adapters do not support Jumbo Frames: - Intel(R) 82562V 10/100 Network Connection - Intel(R) 82566DM Gigabit Network Connection - Intel(R) 82566DC Gigabit Network Connection - Intel(R) 82566MM Gigabit Network Connection - Intel(R) 82566MC Gigabit Network Connection - Intel(R) 82562GT 10/100 Network Connection - Intel(R) 82562G 10/100 Network Connection - - Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support - for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading - ethtool to ethtool-1.8.1. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. Ethtool is included with - all versions of Red Hat after Red Hat 7.2. For other Linux distributions, - download and install Ethtool from the following website: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. - - For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the website listed - above. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. - Wake On LAN is only supported on port A for the following devices: - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Network Connection - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Connection - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter - - NAPI - ---- - NAPI (Rx polling mode) is enabled in the e1000 driver. - - See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. - - -Known Issues -============ - -Dropped Receive Packets on Half-duplex 10/100 Networks ------------------------------------------------------- -If you have an Intel PCI Express adapter running at 10mbps or 100mbps, half- -duplex, you may observe occasional dropped receive packets. There are no -workarounds for this problem in this network configuration. The network must -be updated to operate in full-duplex, and/or 1000mbps only. - -Jumbo Frames System Requirement -------------------------------- -Memory allocation failures have been observed on Linux systems with 64 MB -of RAM or less that are running Jumbo Frames. If you are using Jumbo -Frames, your system may require more than the advertised minimum -requirement of 64 MB of system memory. - -Performance Degradation with Jumbo Frames ------------------------------------------ -Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames -environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket -buffer size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values -may help. See the specific application manual and -/usr/src/linux*/Documentation/ -networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details. - -Jumbo Frames on Foundry BigIron 8000 switch -------------------------------------------- -There is a known issue using Jumbo frames when connected to a Foundry -BigIron 8000 switch. This is a 3rd party limitation. If you experience -loss of packets, lower the MTU size. - -Allocating Rx Buffers when Using Jumbo Frames ---------------------------------------------- -Allocating Rx buffers when using Jumbo Frames on 2.6.x kernels may fail if -the available memory is heavily fragmented. This issue may be seen with PCI-X -adapters or with packet split disabled. This can be reduced or eliminated -by changing the amount of available memory for receive buffer allocation, by -increasing /proc/sys/vm/min_free_kbytes. - -Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network ------------------------------------------------------- -Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have -one system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain -(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces -will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system. -This results in unbalanced receive traffic. - -If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP -filtering by entering: - - echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter -(this only works if your kernel's version is higher than 2.4.5), - -NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. The configuration -change can be made permanent by adding the line: - net.ipv4.conf.all.arp_filter = 1 -to the file /etc/sysctl.conf - - or, - -install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains (either in -different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs). - -82541/82547 can't link or are slow to link with some link partners ------------------------------------------------------------------ -There is a known compatibility issue with 82541/82547 and some -low-end switches where the link will not be established, or will -be slow to establish. In particular, these switches are known to -be incompatible with 82541/82547: - - Planex FXG-08TE - I-O Data ETG-SH8 - -To workaround this issue, the driver can be compiled with an override -of the PHY's master/slave setting. Forcing master or forcing slave -mode will improve time-to-link. - - # make CFLAGS_EXTRA=-DE1000_MASTER_SLAVE=<n> - -Where <n> is: - - 0 = Hardware default - 1 = Master mode - 2 = Slave mode - 3 = Auto master/slave - -Disable rx flow control with ethtool ------------------------------------- -In order to disable receive flow control using ethtool, you must turn -off auto-negotiation on the same command line. - -For example: - - ethtool -A eth? autoneg off rx off - -Unplugging network cable while ethtool -p is running ----------------------------------------------------- -In kernel versions 2.5.50 and later (including 2.6 kernel), unplugging -the network cable while ethtool -p is running will cause the system to -become unresponsive to keyboard commands, except for control-alt-delete. -Restarting the system appears to be the only remedy. - - Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97b5ba9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000e.txt @@ -0,0 +1,306 @@ +Linux* Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection +============================================= + +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. + +Contents +======== + +- Identifying Your Adapter +- Command Line Parameters +- Additional Configurations +- Support + +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== + +The e1000e driver supports all PCI Express Intel(R) Gigabit Network +Connections, except those that are 82575, 82576 and 82580-based*. + +* NOTE: The Intel(R) PRO/1000 P Dual Port Server Adapter is supported by + the e1000 driver, not the e1000e driver due to the 82546 part being used + behind a PCI Express bridge. + +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: + + http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm + +For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following +website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the +networking link on the left to search for your adapter: + + http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/home.htm + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +NOTES: For more information about the InterruptThrottleRate, + RxIntDelay, TxIntDelay, RxAbsIntDelay, and TxAbsIntDelay + parameters, see the application note at: + http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm + +InterruptThrottleRate +--------------------- +Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative, + 4=simplified balancing) +Default Value: 3 + +The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter +will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the +adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter +will generate per second. + +Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100 +will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts +per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt +load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, +but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly. + +The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static +InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for +all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency. +The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and +for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented. + +The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which +it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic +that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last +timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value +for that traffic. + +The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into +classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is +adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined: +"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency", +for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small +packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or +minimal traffic. + +In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000 +for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low +latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased +stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most applications. + +For situations where low latency is vital such as cluster or +grid computing, the algorithm can reduce latency even more when +InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates +the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to +70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency". + +In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and +RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the +interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the +traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could +be as high as 8000. + +Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation +and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable +for bulk throughput traffic. + +NOTE: InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and + RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive + and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to + generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate + allows. + +NOTE: When e1000e is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters + are in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non- + linearly. In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting + the overall throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as + follows: + + modprobe e1000e InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000 + + This sets the InterruptThrottleRate to 3000 interrupts/sec for + the first, second, and third instances of the driver. The range + of 2000 to 3000 interrupts per second works on a majority of + systems and is a good starting point, but the optimal value will + be platform-specific. If CPU utilization is not a concern, use + RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default driver settings. + +RxIntDelay +---------- +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 0 + +This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024 +microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if +properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds +extra latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput +of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value +may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive +descriptors. + +CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may + hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If + this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system + event log. In addition, the controller is automatically reset, + restoring the network connection. To eliminate the potential + for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0. + +RxAbsIntDelay +------------- +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 8 + +This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a +receive interrupt is generated. Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero, +this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial +packet is received within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, +along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network +conditions. + +TxIntDelay +---------- +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 8 + +This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of +1.024 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU +efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the +system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high +causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors. + +TxAbsIntDelay +------------- +Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) +Default Value: 32 + +This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a +transmit interrupt is generated. Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero, +this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial +packet is sent on the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, +along with TxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific +network conditions. + +Copybreak +--------- +Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off) +Default Value: 256 + +Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX +buffer before handing it up the stack. + +This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a +single (not 1,1,1 etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and +it is also available during runtime at +/sys/module/e1000e/parameters/copybreak + +SmartPowerDownEnable +-------------------- +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 0 (disabled) + +Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can set this parameter +in supported chipsets. + +KumeranLockLoss +--------------- +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 1 (enabled) + +This workaround skips resetting the PHY at shutdown for the initial +silicon releases of ICH8 systems. + +IntMode +------- +Valid Range: 0-2 (0=legacy, 1=MSI, 2=MSI-X) +Default Value: 2 + +Allows changing the interrupt mode at module load time, without requiring a +recompile. If the driver load fails to enable a specific interrupt mode, the +driver will try other interrupt modes, from least to most compatible. The +interrupt order is MSI-X, MSI, Legacy. If specifying MSI (IntMode=1) +interrupts, only MSI and Legacy will be attempted. + +CrcStripping +------------ +Valid Range: 0-1 +Default Value: 1 (enabled) + +Strip the CRC from received packets before sending up the network stack. If +you have a machine with a BMC enabled but cannot receive IPMI traffic after +loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature. + +WriteProtectNVM +--------------- +Valid Range: 0,1 +Default Value: 1 + +If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the +GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the +NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial +driver load. +NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes +via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the +parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power +cycle. + +Additional Configurations +========================= + + Jumbo Frames + ------------ + Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than + the default of 1500. Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. + For example: + + ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up + + This setting is not saved across reboots. + + Notes: + + - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9216. This value coincides + with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9234 bytes. + + - Using Jumbo Frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in + poor performance or loss of link. + + - Some adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of + 4096 bytes and some adapters do not support Jumbo Frames. + + Ethtool + ------- + The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. We + strongly recommend downloading the latest version of ethtool at: + + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ + + Speed and Duplex + ---------------- + Speed and Duplex are configured through the ethtool* utility. For + instructions, refer to the ethtool man page. + + Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) + --------------------------- + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. For instructions on + enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. + + WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. + For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be + loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system. + + In most cases Wake On LAN is only supported on port A for multiple port + adapters. To verify if a port supports Wake on Lan run ethtool eth<X>. + +Support +======= + +For general information, go to the Intel support website at: + + www.intel.com/support/ + +or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: + + http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000 + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported +kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related +to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt index ab2d718..98953c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt @@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ Default Value: 0 This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to max_vfs worth of virtual function. + Additional Configurations ========================= @@ -60,15 +61,16 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + version of ethtool can be found at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Enabling Wake on LAN* (WoL) --------------------------- - WoL is configured through the Ethtool* utility. + WoL is configured through the ethtool* utility. - For instructions on enabling WoL with Ethtool, refer to the Ethtool man page. + For instructions on enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the igb driver must be @@ -91,31 +93,6 @@ Additional Configurations REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found, the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. - LRO - --- - Large Receive Offload (LRO) is a technique for increasing inbound throughput - of high-bandwidth network connections by reducing CPU overhead. It works by - aggregating multiple incoming packets from a single stream into a larger - buffer before they are passed higher up the networking stack, thus reducing - the number of packets that have to be processed. LRO combines multiple - Ethernet frames into a single receive in the stack, thereby potentially - decreasing CPU utilization for receives. - - NOTE: You need to have inet_lro enabled via either the CONFIG_INET_LRO or - CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE kernel config option. Additionally, if - CONFIG_INET_LRO_MODULE is used, the inet_lro module needs to be loaded - before the igb driver. - - You can verify that the driver is using LRO by looking at these counters in - Ethtool: - - lro_aggregated - count of total packets that were combined - lro_flushed - counts the number of packets flushed out of LRO - lro_no_desc - counts the number of times an LRO descriptor was not available - for the LRO packet - - NOTE: IPv6 and UDP are not supported by LRO. - Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt index 0560281..cbfe4ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igbvf.txt @@ -58,9 +58,11 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool + version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality, although we + strongly recommend downloading the latest version at: - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index f350c69..d99940d 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -11,7 +11,9 @@ ip_forward - BOOLEAN for routers) ip_default_ttl - INTEGER - default 64 + Default value of TTL field (Time To Live) for outgoing (but not + forwarded) IP packets. Should be between 1 and 255 inclusive. + Default: 64 (as recommended by RFC1700) ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN Disable Path MTU Discovery. @@ -20,6 +22,15 @@ ip_no_pmtu_disc - BOOLEAN min_pmtu - INTEGER default 562 - minimum discovered Path MTU +route/max_size - INTEGER + Maximum number of routes allowed in the kernel. Increase + this when using large numbers of interfaces and/or routes. + +neigh/default/gc_thresh3 - INTEGER + Maximum number of neighbor entries allowed. Increase this + when using large numbers of interfaces and when communicating + with large numbers of directly-connected peers. + mtu_expires - INTEGER Time, in seconds, that cached PMTU information is kept. @@ -135,6 +146,7 @@ tcp_adv_win_scale - INTEGER Count buffering overhead as bytes/2^tcp_adv_win_scale (if tcp_adv_win_scale > 0) or bytes-bytes/2^(-tcp_adv_win_scale), if it is <= 0. + Possible values are [-31, 31], inclusive. Default: 2 tcp_allowed_congestion_control - STRING @@ -698,10 +710,28 @@ igmp_max_memberships - INTEGER Change the maximum number of multicast groups we can subscribe to. Default: 20 -conf/interface/* changes special settings per interface (where "interface" is - the name of your network interface) -conf/all/* is special, changes the settings for all interfaces + Theoretical maximum value is bounded by having to send a membership + report in a single datagram (i.e. the report can't span multiple + datagrams, or risk confusing the switch and leaving groups you don't + intend to). + + The number of supported groups 'M' is bounded by the number of group + report entries you can fit into a single datagram of 65535 bytes. + + M = 65536-sizeof (ip header)/(sizeof(Group record)) + + Group records are variable length, with a minimum of 12 bytes. + So net.ipv4.igmp_max_memberships should not be set higher than: + + (65536-24) / 12 = 5459 + + The value 5459 assumes no IP header options, so in practice + this number may be lower. + + conf/interface/* changes special settings per interface (where + "interface" is the name of your network interface) + conf/all/* is special, changes the settings for all interfaces log_martians - BOOLEAN Log packets with impossible addresses to kernel log. @@ -1014,6 +1044,12 @@ conf/interface/*: accept_ra - BOOLEAN Accept Router Advertisements; autoconfigure using them. + Possible values are: + 0 Do not accept Router Advertisements. + 1 Accept Router Advertisements if forwarding is disabled. + 2 Overrule forwarding behaviour. Accept Router Advertisements + even if forwarding is enabled. + Functional default: enabled if local forwarding is disabled. disabled if local forwarding is enabled. @@ -1075,7 +1111,12 @@ forwarding - BOOLEAN Note: It is recommended to have the same setting on all interfaces; mixed router/host scenarios are rather uncommon. - FALSE: + Possible values are: + 0 Forwarding disabled + 1 Forwarding enabled + 2 Forwarding enabled (Hybrid Mode) + + FALSE (0): By default, Host behaviour is assumed. This means: @@ -1085,18 +1126,24 @@ forwarding - BOOLEAN Advertisements (and do autoconfiguration). 4. If accept_redirects is TRUE (default), accept Redirects. - TRUE: + TRUE (1): If local forwarding is enabled, Router behaviour is assumed. This means exactly the reverse from the above: 1. IsRouter flag is set in Neighbour Advertisements. 2. Router Solicitations are not sent. - 3. Router Advertisements are ignored. + 3. Router Advertisements are ignored unless accept_ra is 2. 4. Redirects are ignored. - Default: FALSE if global forwarding is disabled (default), - otherwise TRUE. + TRUE (2): + + Hybrid mode. Same behaviour as TRUE, except for: + + 2. Router Solicitations are being sent when necessary. + + Default: 0 (disabled) if global forwarding is disabled (default), + otherwise 1 (enabled). hop_limit - INTEGER Default Hop Limit to set. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt index a0d0ffb..e196f16 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt @@ -309,15 +309,15 @@ Additional Configurations Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support - for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading - to the latest version. + NOTE: The ethtool version 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. + Support for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by + upgrading to the latest version. NAPI diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt index eeb6868..af77ed3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbe.txt @@ -1,107 +1,126 @@ Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit PCI Express Intel(R) Network Connection ======================================================================== -March 10, 2009 - +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. Contents ======== -- In This Release - Identifying Your Adapter -- Building and Installation - Additional Configurations +- Performance Tuning +- Known Issues - Support +Identifying Your Adapter +======================== +The driver in this release is compatible with 82598 and 82599-based Intel +Network Connections. -In This Release -=============== +For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & +Driver ID Guide at: -This file describes the ixgbe Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit PCI -Express Intel(R) Network Connection. This driver includes support for -Itanium(R)2-based systems. + http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-012904.htm -For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation -supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply -to use with Linux. +SFP+ Devices with Pluggable Optics +---------------------------------- -The following features are available in this kernel: - - Native VLANs - - Channel Bonding (teaming) - - SNMP - - Generic Receive Offload - - Data Center Bridging +82599-BASED ADAPTERS -Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source: -/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +NOTES: If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics, or +is an Intel(R) Ethernet Server Adapter X520-2, then it only supports Intel +optics and/or the direct attach cables listed below. -Ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig can be used to display device and driver -specific information. +When 82599-based SFP+ devices are connected back to back, they should be set to +the same Speed setting via ethtool. Results may vary if you mix speed settings. +82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply +with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach +cables are not supported. +Supplier Type Part Numbers -Identifying Your Adapter -======================== +SR Modules +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) FTLX8571D3BCV-IT +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) AFBR-703SDDZ-IN1 +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) AFBR-703SDZ-IN2 +LR Modules +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) FTLX1471D3BCV-IT +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) AFCT-701SDDZ-IN1 +Intel DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) AFCT-701SDZ-IN2 -This driver supports devices based on the 82598 controller and the 82599 -controller. +The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that +have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. -For specific information on identifying which adapter you have, please visit: +Supplier Type Part Numbers - http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-008441.htm +Finisar SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX8571D3BCL +Avago SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate AFBR-700SDZ +Finisar SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX1471D3BCL +Finisar DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) FTLX8571D3QCV-IT +Avago DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) AFBR-703SDZ-IN1 +Finisar DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) FTLX1471D3QCV-IT +Avago DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) AFCT-701SDZ-IN1 +Finistar 1000BASE-T SFP FCLF8522P2BTL +Avago 1000BASE-T SFP ABCU-5710RZ -Building and Installation -========================= +82599-based adapters support all passive and active limiting direct attach +cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. -select m for "Intel(R) 10GbE PCI Express adapters support" located at: - Location: - -> Device Drivers - -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y]) - -> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) (NETDEV_10000 [=y]) +Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig down +------------------------------------------- +"ifconfig down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters. +"ifconfig up" turns on the later. -1. make modules & make modules_install -2. Load the module: +82598-BASED ADAPTERS -# modprobe ixgbe +NOTES for 82598-Based Adapters: +- Intel(R) Network Adapters that support removable optical modules only support + their original module type (i.e., the Intel(R) 10 Gigabit SR Dual Port + Express Module only supports SR optical modules). If you plug in a different + type of module, the driver will not load. +- Hot Swapping/hot plugging optical modules is not supported. +- Only single speed, 10 gigabit modules are supported. +- LAN on Motherboard (LOMs) may support DA, SR, or LR modules. Other module + types are not supported. Please see your system documentation for details. - The insmod command can be used if the full - path to the driver module is specified. For example: +The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that +have received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices. - insmod /lib/modules/<KERNEL VERSION>/kernel/drivers/net/ixgbe/ixgbe.ko +Supplier Type Part Numbers - With 2.6 based kernels also make sure that older ixgbe drivers are - removed from the kernel, before loading the new module: +Finisar SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX8571D3BCL +Avago SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate AFBR-700SDZ +Finisar SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate FTLX1471D3BCL - rmmod ixgbe; modprobe ixgbe +82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply +with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach +cables are not supported. -3. Assign an IP address to the interface by entering the following, where - x is the interface number: - ifconfig ethx <IP_address> +Flow Control +------------ +Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable +receiving and transmitting pause frames for ixgbe. When TX is enabled, PAUSE +frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined +threshold. When rx is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time delay +specified when a PAUSE frame is received. -4. Verify that the interface works. Enter the following, where <IP_address> - is the IP address for another machine on the same subnet as the interface - that is being tested: +Flow Control is enabled by default. If you want to disable a flow control +capable link partner, use ethtool: - ping <IP_address> + ethtool -A eth? autoneg off RX off TX off +NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gig mode, flow control default +behavior is changed to off. Flow control in 1 gig mode on these devices can +lead to Tx hangs. Additional Configurations ========================= - Viewing Link Messages - --------------------- - Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is - restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on - your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following: - - dmesg -n 8 - - NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots. - - Jumbo Frames ------------ The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is @@ -123,13 +142,8 @@ Additional Configurations other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI. - GRO is enabled by default in the driver. Future versions of ethtool will - support disabling and re-enabling GRO on the fly. - - Data Center Bridging, aka DCB ----------------------------- - DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8 different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. @@ -163,24 +177,71 @@ Additional Configurations http://e1000.sf.net - Ethtool ------- The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and - diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool - version 3.0 or later is required for this functionality. + diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest + ethtool version is required for this functionality. The latest release of ethtool can be found from - http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel. + http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/ - - NAPI + FCoE ---- + This release of the ixgbe driver contains new code to enable users to use + Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and Data Center Bridging (DCB) + functionality that is supported by the 82598-based hardware. This code has + no default effect on the regular driver operation, and configuring DCB and + FCoE is outside the scope of this driver README. Refer to + http://www.open-fcoe.org/ for FCoE project information and contact + e1000-eedc@lists.sourceforge.net for DCB information. + + MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature + ---------------------------------- + When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by + the hardware and not transmitted. An interrupt is sent to the PF driver + notifying it of the spoof attempt. + + When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following + message to the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command): + + Spoof event(s) detected on VF (n) + + Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing. + + +Performance Tuning +================== + +An excellent article on performance tuning can be found at: + +http://www.redhat.com/promo/summit/2008/downloads/pdf/Thursday/Mark_Wagner.pdf + + +Known Issues +============ + + Enabling SR-IOV in a 32-bit Microsoft* Windows* Server 2008 Guest OS using + Intel (R) 82576-based GbE or Intel (R) 82599-based 10GbE controller under KVM + ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- + KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM. This + includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices using + Intel 82576-based and 82599-based controllers. + + While direct assignment of a PCIe device or an SR-IOV Virtual Function (VF) + to a Linux-based VM running 2.6.32 or later kernel works fine, there is a + known issue with Microsoft Windows Server 2008 VM that results in a "yellow + bang" error. This problem is within the KVM VMM itself, not the Intel driver, + or the SR-IOV logic of the VMM, but rather that KVM emulates an older CPU + model for the guests, and this older CPU model does not support MSI-X + interrupts, which is a requirement for Intel SR-IOV. - NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgbe driver. NAPI is enabled - by default in the driver. + If you wish to use the Intel 82576 or 82599-based controllers in SR-IOV mode + with KVM and a Microsoft Windows Server 2008 guest try the following + workaround. The workaround is to tell KVM to emulate a different model of CPU + when using qemu to create the KVM guest: - See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. + "-cpu qemu64,model=13" Support diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt index 19015de..5a91a41 100755..100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgbevf.txt @@ -1,19 +1,16 @@ Linux* Base Driver for Intel(R) Network Connection ================================================== -November 24, 2009 +Intel Gigabit Linux driver. +Copyright(c) 1999 - 2010 Intel Corporation. Contents ======== -- In This Release - Identifying Your Adapter - Known Issues/Troubleshooting - Support -In This Release -=============== - This file describes the ixgbevf Linux* Base Driver for Intel Network Connection. @@ -33,15 +30,11 @@ Identifying Your Adapter For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter & Driver ID Guide at: - http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-008441.htm + http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm Known Issues/Troubleshooting ============================ - Unloading Physical Function (PF) Driver Causes System Reboots When VM is - Running and VF is Loaded on the VM - ------------------------------------------------------------------------ - Do not unload the PF driver (ixgbe) while VFs are assigned to guests. Support ======= @@ -57,34 +50,3 @@ or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at: If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net - -License -======= - -Intel 10 Gigabit Linux driver. -Copyright(c) 1999 - 2009 Intel Corporation. - -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it -under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License, -version 2, as published by the Free Software Foundation. - -This program is distributed in the hope it will be useful, but WITHOUT -ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or -FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for -more details. - -You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with -this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., -51 Franklin St - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. - -The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in -the file called "COPYING". - -Trademarks -========== - -Intel, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of -Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other -countries. - -* Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt index 6e8ce09..24ad2ad 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt @@ -112,6 +112,22 @@ However, connect() and getpeername() are not supported, as they did not seem useful with Phonet usages (could be added easily). +Resource subscription +--------------------- + +A Phonet datagram socket can be subscribed to any number of 8-bits +Phonet resources, as follow: + + uint32_t res = 0xXX; + ioctl(fd, SIOCPNADDRESOURCE, &res); + +Subscription is similarly cancelled using the SIOCPNDELRESOURCE I/O +control request, or when the socket is closed. + +Note that no more than one socket can be subcribed to any given +resource at a time. If not, ioctl() will return EBUSY. + + Phonet Pipe protocol -------------------- @@ -166,6 +182,46 @@ The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level: or zero if encapsulation is off. +Phonet Pipe-controller Implementation +------------------------------------- + +Phonet Pipe-controller is enabled by selecting the CONFIG_PHONET_PIPECTRLR Kconfig +option. It is useful when communicating with those Nokia Modems which do not +implement Pipe controller in them e.g. Nokia Slim Modem used in ST-Ericsson +U8500 platform. + +The implementation is based on the Data Connection Establishment Sequence +depicted in 'Nokia Wireless Modem API - Wireless_modem_user_guide.pdf' +document. + +It allows a phonet sequenced socket (host-pep) to initiate a Pipe connection +between itself and a remote pipe-end point (e.g. modem). + +The implementation adds socket options at SOL_PNPIPE level: + + PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE + It accepts an integer argument for setting value of pipe handle. + + PNPIPE_ENABLE accepts one integer value (int). If set to zero, the pipe + is disabled. If the value is non-zero, the pipe is enabled. If the pipe + is not (yet) connected, ENOTCONN is error is returned. + +The implementation also adds socket 'connect'. On calling the 'connect', pipe +will be created between the source socket and the destination, and the pipe +state will be set to PIPE_DISABLED. + +After a pipe has been created and enabled successfully, the Pipe data can be +exchanged between the host-pep and remote-pep (modem). + +User-space would typically follow below sequence with Pipe controller:- +-socket +-bind +-setsockopt for PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE +-connect +-setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP +-setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENABLE + + Authors ------- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt index 88bb71b..9eb1ba5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/phy.txt @@ -177,18 +177,6 @@ Doing it all yourself A convenience function to print out the PHY status neatly. - int phy_clear_interrupt(struct phy_device *phydev); - int phy_config_interrupt(struct phy_device *phydev, u32 interrupts); - - Clear the PHY's interrupt, and configure which ones are allowed, - respectively. Currently only supports all on, or all off. - - int phy_enable_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev); - int phy_disable_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev); - - Functions which enable/disable PHY interrupts, clearing them - before and after, respectively. - int phy_start_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev); int phy_stop_interrupts(struct phy_device *phydev); @@ -213,12 +201,6 @@ Doing it all yourself Fills the phydev structure with up-to-date information about the current settings in the PHY. - void phy_sanitize_settings(struct phy_device *phydev) - - Resolves differences between currently desired settings, and - supported settings for the given PHY device. Does not make - the changes in the hardware, though. - int phy_ethtool_sset(struct phy_device *phydev, struct ethtool_cmd *cmd); int phy_ethtool_gset(struct phy_device *phydev, struct ethtool_cmd *cmd); diff --git a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt index 7ee770b..80a7a34 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/stmmac.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers (Synopsys IP blocks); it has been fully tested on STLinux platforms. Currently this network device driver is for all STM embedded MAC/GMAC -(7xxx SoCs). +(7xxx SoCs). Other platforms start using it i.e. ARM SPEAr. DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and DWC Ether MAC 10/100 Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing the first code @@ -95,9 +95,14 @@ Several information came from the platform; please refer to the driver's Header file in include/linux directory. struct plat_stmmacenet_data { - int bus_id; - int pbl; - int has_gmac; + int bus_id; + int pbl; + int clk_csr; + int has_gmac; + int enh_desc; + int tx_coe; + int bugged_jumbo; + int pmt; void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed); void (*bus_setup)(unsigned long ioaddr); #ifdef CONFIG_STM_DRIVERS @@ -114,6 +119,12 @@ Where: registers (on STM platforms); - has_gmac: GMAC core is on board (get it at run-time in the next step); - bus_id: bus identifier. +- tx_coe: core is able to perform the tx csum in HW. +- enh_desc: if sets the MAC will use the enhanced descriptor structure. +- clk_csr: CSR Clock range selection. +- bugged_jumbo: some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for + over-sized frames due to limited buffer sizes. Setting this + flag the csum will be done in SW on JUMBO frames. struct plat_stmmacphy_data { int bus_id; @@ -131,13 +142,28 @@ Where: - interface: physical MII interface mode; - phy_reset: hook to reset HW function. +SOURCES: +- Kconfig +- Makefile +- stmmac_main.c: main network device driver; +- stmmac_mdio.c: mdio functions; +- stmmac_ethtool.c: ethtool support; +- stmmac_timer.[ch]: timer code used for mitigating the driver dma interrupts + Only tested on ST40 platforms based. +- stmmac.h: private driver structure; +- common.h: common definitions and VFTs; +- descs.h: descriptor structure definitions; +- dwmac1000_core.c: GMAC core functions; +- dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; +- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the GMAC; +- dwmac100_core: MAC 100 core and dma code; +- dwmac100_dma.c: dma funtions for the MAC chip; +- dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC; +- dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions shared among chips +- enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors +- norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors + TODO: -- Continue to make the driver more generic and suitable for other Synopsys - Ethernet controllers used on other architectures (i.e. ARM). -- 10G controllers are not supported. -- MAC uses Normal descriptors and GMAC uses enhanced ones. - This is a limit that should be reviewed. MAC could want to - use the enhanced structure. -- Checksumming: Rx/Tx csum is done in HW in case of GMAC only. +- XGMAC controller is not supported. - Review the timer optimisation code to use an embedded device that seems to be available in new chip generations. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt index e8c8f4f..98097d8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/timestamping.txt @@ -172,15 +172,19 @@ struct skb_shared_hwtstamps { }; Time stamps for outgoing packets are to be generated as follows: -- In hard_start_xmit(), check if skb_tx(skb)->hardware is set no-zero. - If yes, then the driver is expected to do hardware time stamping. +- In hard_start_xmit(), check if (skb_shinfo(skb)->tx_flags & SKBTX_HW_TSTAMP) + is set no-zero. If yes, then the driver is expected to do hardware time + stamping. - If this is possible for the skb and requested, then declare - that the driver is doing the time stamping by setting the field - skb_tx(skb)->in_progress non-zero. You might want to keep a pointer - to the associated skb for the next step and not free the skb. A driver - not supporting hardware time stamping doesn't do that. A driver must - never touch sk_buff::tstamp! It is used to store software generated - time stamps by the network subsystem. + that the driver is doing the time stamping by setting the flag + SKBTX_IN_PROGRESS in skb_shinfo(skb)->tx_flags , e.g. with + + skb_shinfo(skb)->tx_flags |= SKBTX_IN_PROGRESS; + + You might want to keep a pointer to the associated skb for the next step + and not free the skb. A driver not supporting hardware time stamping doesn't + do that. A driver must never touch sk_buff::tstamp! It is used to store + software generated time stamps by the network subsystem. - As soon as the driver has sent the packet and/or obtained a hardware time stamp for it, it passes the time stamp back by calling skb_hwtstamp_tx() with the original skb, the raw @@ -191,6 +195,6 @@ Time stamps for outgoing packets are to be generated as follows: this would occur at a later time in the processing pipeline than other software time stamping and therefore could lead to unexpected deltas between time stamps. -- If the driver did not call set skb_tx(skb)->in_progress, then +- If the driver did not set the SKBTX_IN_PROGRESS flag (see above), then dev_hard_start_xmit() checks whether software time stamping is wanted as fallback and potentially generates the time stamp. diff --git a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt index 26c0f9c..dd04361 100644 --- a/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt +++ b/Documentation/pcmcia/driver-changes.txt @@ -1,4 +1,29 @@ This file details changes in 2.6 which affect PCMCIA card driver authors: +* pcmcia_loop_config() and autoconfiguration (as of 2.6.36) + If struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->config_flags is set accordingly, + pcmcia_loop_config() now sets up certain configuration values + automatically, though the driver may still override the settings + in the callback function. The following autoconfiguration options + are provided at the moment: + CONF_AUTO_CHECK_VCC : check for matching Vcc + CONF_AUTO_SET_VPP : set Vpp + CONF_AUTO_AUDIO : auto-enable audio line, if required + CONF_AUTO_SET_IO : set ioport resources (->resource[0,1]) + CONF_AUTO_SET_IOMEM : set first iomem resource (->resource[2]) + +* pcmcia_request_configuration -> pcmcia_enable_device (as of 2.6.36) + pcmcia_request_configuration() got renamed to pcmcia_enable_device(), + as it mirrors pcmcia_disable_device(). Configuration settings are now + stored in struct pcmcia_device, e.g. in the fields config_flags, + config_index, config_base, vpp. + +* pcmcia_request_window changes (as of 2.6.36) + Instead of win_req_t, drivers are now requested to fill out + struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->resource[2,3,4,5] for up to four ioport + ranges. After a call to pcmcia_request_window(), the regions found there + are reserved and may be used immediately -- until pcmcia_release_window() + is called. + * pcmcia_request_io changes (as of 2.6.36) Instead of io_req_t, drivers are now requested to fill out struct pcmcia_device *p_dev->resource[0,1] for up to two ioport diff --git a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX index fb742c2..45e9d4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX @@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ interface.txt - Power management user interface in /sys/power notifiers.txt - Registering suspend notifiers in device drivers +opp.txt + - Operating Performance Point library pci.txt - How the PCI Subsystem Does Power Management pm_qos_interface.txt diff --git a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt index 7f7a737..638afdf 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/drivers-testing.txt @@ -23,10 +23,10 @@ Once you have resolved the suspend/resume-related problems with your test system without the new driver, you are ready to test it: a) Build the driver as a module, load it and try the test modes of hibernation - (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). + (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). b) Load the driver and attempt to hibernate in the "reboot", "shutdown" and - "platform" modes (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). + "platform" modes (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 1). c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of hibernation. @@ -34,12 +34,12 @@ c) Compile the driver directly into the kernel and try the test modes of d) Attempt to hibernate with the driver compiled directly into the kernel in the "reboot", "shutdown" and "platform" modes. -e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, +e) Try the test modes of suspend (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). [As far as the STR tests are concerned, it should not matter whether or not the driver is built as a module.] f) Attempt to suspend to RAM using the s2ram tool with the driver loaded - (see: Documents/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). + (see: Documentation/power/basic-pm-debugging.txt, 2). Each of the above tests should be repeated several times and the STD tests should be mixed with the STR tests. If any of them fails, the driver cannot be diff --git a/Documentation/power/interface.txt b/Documentation/power/interface.txt index e67211f..c537834 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/interface.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/interface.txt @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ smallest image possible. In particular, if "0" is written to this file, the suspend image will be as small as possible. Reading from this file will display the current image size limit, which -is set to 500 MB by default. +is set to 2/5 of available RAM by default. /sys/power/pm_trace controls the code which saves the last PM event point in the RTC across reboots, so that you can debug a machine that just hangs diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cd44558 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt @@ -0,0 +1,378 @@ +*=============* +* OPP Library * +*=============* + +(C) 2009-2010 Nishanth Menon <nm@ti.com>, Texas Instruments Incorporated + +Contents +-------- +1. Introduction +2. Initial OPP List Registration +3. OPP Search Functions +4. OPP Availability Control Functions +5. OPP Data Retrieval Functions +6. Cpufreq Table Generation +7. Data Structures + +1. Introduction +=============== +Complex SoCs of today consists of a multiple sub-modules working in conjunction. +In an operational system executing varied use cases, not all modules in the SoC +need to function at their highest performing frequency all the time. To +facilitate this, sub-modules in a SoC are grouped into domains, allowing some +domains to run at lower voltage and frequency while other domains are loaded +more. The set of discrete tuples consisting of frequency and voltage pairs that +the device will support per domain are called Operating Performance Points or +OPPs. + +OPP library provides a set of helper functions to organize and query the OPP +information. The library is located in drivers/base/power/opp.c and the header +is located in include/linux/opp.h. OPP library can be enabled by enabling +CONFIG_PM_OPP from power management menuconfig menu. OPP library depends on +CONFIG_PM as certain SoCs such as Texas Instrument's OMAP framework allows to +optionally boot at a certain OPP without needing cpufreq. + +Typical usage of the OPP library is as follows: +(users) -> registers a set of default OPPs -> (library) +SoC framework -> modifies on required cases certain OPPs -> OPP layer + -> queries to search/retrieve information -> + +Architectures that provide a SoC framework for OPP should select ARCH_HAS_OPP +to make the OPP layer available. + +OPP layer expects each domain to be represented by a unique device pointer. SoC +framework registers a set of initial OPPs per device with the OPP layer. This +list is expected to be an optimally small number typically around 5 per device. +This initial list contains a set of OPPs that the framework expects to be safely +enabled by default in the system. + +Note on OPP Availability: +------------------------ +As the system proceeds to operate, SoC framework may choose to make certain +OPPs available or not available on each device based on various external +factors. Example usage: Thermal management or other exceptional situations where +SoC framework might choose to disable a higher frequency OPP to safely continue +operations until that OPP could be re-enabled if possible. + +OPP library facilitates this concept in it's implementation. The following +operational functions operate only on available opps: +opp_find_freq_{ceil, floor}, opp_get_voltage, opp_get_freq, opp_get_opp_count +and opp_init_cpufreq_table + +opp_find_freq_exact is meant to be used to find the opp pointer which can then +be used for opp_enable/disable functions to make an opp available as required. + +WARNING: Users of OPP library should refresh their availability count using +get_opp_count if opp_enable/disable functions are invoked for a device, the +exact mechanism to trigger these or the notification mechanism to other +dependent subsystems such as cpufreq are left to the discretion of the SoC +specific framework which uses the OPP library. Similar care needs to be taken +care to refresh the cpufreq table in cases of these operations. + +WARNING on OPP List locking mechanism: +------------------------------------------------- +OPP library uses RCU for exclusivity. RCU allows the query functions to operate +in multiple contexts and this synchronization mechanism is optimal for a read +intensive operations on data structure as the OPP library caters to. + +To ensure that the data retrieved are sane, the users such as SoC framework +should ensure that the section of code operating on OPP queries are locked +using RCU read locks. The opp_find_freq_{exact,ceil,floor}, +opp_get_{voltage, freq, opp_count} fall into this category. + +opp_{add,enable,disable} are updaters which use mutex and implement it's own +RCU locking mechanisms. opp_init_cpufreq_table acts as an updater and uses +mutex to implment RCU updater strategy. These functions should *NOT* be called +under RCU locks and other contexts that prevent blocking functions in RCU or +mutex operations from working. + +2. Initial OPP List Registration +================================ +The SoC implementation calls opp_add function iteratively to add OPPs per +device. It is expected that the SoC framework will register the OPP entries +optimally- typical numbers range to be less than 5. The list generated by +registering the OPPs is maintained by OPP library throughout the device +operation. The SoC framework can subsequently control the availability of the +OPPs dynamically using the opp_enable / disable functions. + +opp_add - Add a new OPP for a specific domain represented by the device pointer. + The OPP is defined using the frequency and voltage. Once added, the OPP + is assumed to be available and control of it's availability can be done + with the opp_enable/disable functions. OPP library internally stores + and manages this information in the opp struct. This function may be + used by SoC framework to define a optimal list as per the demands of + SoC usage environment. + + WARNING: Do not use this function in interrupt context. + + Example: + soc_pm_init() + { + /* Do things */ + r = opp_add(mpu_dev, 1000000, 900000); + if (!r) { + pr_err("%s: unable to register mpu opp(%d)\n", r); + goto no_cpufreq; + } + /* Do cpufreq things */ + no_cpufreq: + /* Do remaining things */ + } + +3. OPP Search Functions +======================= +High level framework such as cpufreq operates on frequencies. To map the +frequency back to the corresponding OPP, OPP library provides handy functions +to search the OPP list that OPP library internally manages. These search +functions return the matching pointer representing the opp if a match is +found, else returns error. These errors are expected to be handled by standard +error checks such as IS_ERR() and appropriate actions taken by the caller. + +opp_find_freq_exact - Search for an OPP based on an *exact* frequency and + availability. This function is especially useful to enable an OPP which + is not available by default. + Example: In a case when SoC framework detects a situation where a + higher frequency could be made available, it can use this function to + find the OPP prior to call the opp_enable to actually make it available. + rcu_read_lock(); + opp = opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false); + rcu_read_unlock(); + /* dont operate on the pointer.. just do a sanity check.. */ + if (IS_ERR(opp)) { + pr_err("frequency not disabled!\n"); + /* trigger appropriate actions.. */ + } else { + opp_enable(dev,1000000000); + } + + NOTE: This is the only search function that operates on OPPs which are + not available. + +opp_find_freq_floor - Search for an available OPP which is *at most* the + provided frequency. This function is useful while searching for a lesser + match OR operating on OPP information in the order of decreasing + frequency. + Example: To find the highest opp for a device: + freq = ULONG_MAX; + rcu_read_lock(); + opp_find_freq_floor(dev, &freq); + rcu_read_unlock(); + +opp_find_freq_ceil - Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the + provided frequency. This function is useful while searching for a + higher match OR operating on OPP information in the order of increasing + frequency. + Example 1: To find the lowest opp for a device: + freq = 0; + rcu_read_lock(); + opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); + rcu_read_unlock(); + Example 2: A simplified implementation of a SoC cpufreq_driver->target: + soc_cpufreq_target(..) + { + /* Do stuff like policy checks etc. */ + /* Find the best frequency match for the req */ + rcu_read_lock(); + opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); + rcu_read_unlock(); + if (!IS_ERR(opp)) + soc_switch_to_freq_voltage(freq); + else + /* do something when we cant satisfy the req */ + /* do other stuff */ + } + +4. OPP Availability Control Functions +===================================== +A default OPP list registered with the OPP library may not cater to all possible +situation. The OPP library provides a set of functions to modify the +availability of a OPP within the OPP list. This allows SoC frameworks to have +fine grained dynamic control of which sets of OPPs are operationally available. +These functions are intended to *temporarily* remove an OPP in conditions such +as thermal considerations (e.g. don't use OPPx until the temperature drops). + +WARNING: Do not use these functions in interrupt context. + +opp_enable - Make a OPP available for operation. + Example: Lets say that 1GHz OPP is to be made available only if the + SoC temperature is lower than a certain threshold. The SoC framework + implementation might choose to do something as follows: + if (cur_temp < temp_low_thresh) { + /* Enable 1GHz if it was disabled */ + rcu_read_lock(); + opp = opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, false); + rcu_read_unlock(); + /* just error check */ + if (!IS_ERR(opp)) + ret = opp_enable(dev, 1000000000); + else + goto try_something_else; + } + +opp_disable - Make an OPP to be not available for operation + Example: Lets say that 1GHz OPP is to be disabled if the temperature + exceeds a threshold value. The SoC framework implementation might + choose to do something as follows: + if (cur_temp > temp_high_thresh) { + /* Disable 1GHz if it was enabled */ + rcu_read_lock(); + opp = opp_find_freq_exact(dev, 1000000000, true); + rcu_read_unlock(); + /* just error check */ + if (!IS_ERR(opp)) + ret = opp_disable(dev, 1000000000); + else + goto try_something_else; + } + +5. OPP Data Retrieval Functions +=============================== +Since OPP library abstracts away the OPP information, a set of functions to pull +information from the OPP structure is necessary. Once an OPP pointer is +retrieved using the search functions, the following functions can be used by SoC +framework to retrieve the information represented inside the OPP layer. + +opp_get_voltage - Retrieve the voltage represented by the opp pointer. + Example: At a cpufreq transition to a different frequency, SoC + framework requires to set the voltage represented by the OPP using + the regulator framework to the Power Management chip providing the + voltage. + soc_switch_to_freq_voltage(freq) + { + /* do things */ + rcu_read_lock(); + opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq); + v = opp_get_voltage(opp); + rcu_read_unlock(); + if (v) + regulator_set_voltage(.., v); + /* do other things */ + } + +opp_get_freq - Retrieve the freq represented by the opp pointer. + Example: Lets say the SoC framework uses a couple of helper functions + we could pass opp pointers instead of doing additional parameters to + handle quiet a bit of data parameters. + soc_cpufreq_target(..) + { + /* do things.. */ + max_freq = ULONG_MAX; + rcu_read_lock(); + max_opp = opp_find_freq_floor(dev,&max_freq); + requested_opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev,&freq); + if (!IS_ERR(max_opp) && !IS_ERR(requested_opp)) + r = soc_test_validity(max_opp, requested_opp); + rcu_read_unlock(); + /* do other things */ + } + soc_test_validity(..) + { + if(opp_get_voltage(max_opp) < opp_get_voltage(requested_opp)) + return -EINVAL; + if(opp_get_freq(max_opp) < opp_get_freq(requested_opp)) + return -EINVAL; + /* do things.. */ + } + +opp_get_opp_count - Retrieve the number of available opps for a device + Example: Lets say a co-processor in the SoC needs to know the available + frequencies in a table, the main processor can notify as following: + soc_notify_coproc_available_frequencies() + { + /* Do things */ + rcu_read_lock(); + num_available = opp_get_opp_count(dev); + speeds = kzalloc(sizeof(u32) * num_available, GFP_KERNEL); + /* populate the table in increasing order */ + freq = 0; + while (!IS_ERR(opp = opp_find_freq_ceil(dev, &freq))) { + speeds[i] = freq; + freq++; + i++; + } + rcu_read_unlock(); + + soc_notify_coproc(AVAILABLE_FREQs, speeds, num_available); + /* Do other things */ + } + +6. Cpufreq Table Generation +=========================== +opp_init_cpufreq_table - cpufreq framework typically is initialized with + cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo which is provided with the list of + frequencies that are available for operation. This function provides + a ready to use conversion routine to translate the OPP layer's internal + information about the available frequencies into a format readily + providable to cpufreq. + + WARNING: Do not use this function in interrupt context. + + Example: + soc_pm_init() + { + /* Do things */ + r = opp_init_cpufreq_table(dev, &freq_table); + if (!r) + cpufreq_frequency_table_cpuinfo(policy, freq_table); + /* Do other things */ + } + + NOTE: This function is available only if CONFIG_CPU_FREQ is enabled in + addition to CONFIG_PM as power management feature is required to + dynamically scale voltage and frequency in a system. + +7. Data Structures +================== +Typically an SoC contains multiple voltage domains which are variable. Each +domain is represented by a device pointer. The relationship to OPP can be +represented as follows: +SoC + |- device 1 + | |- opp 1 (availability, freq, voltage) + | |- opp 2 .. + ... ... + | `- opp n .. + |- device 2 + ... + `- device m + +OPP library maintains a internal list that the SoC framework populates and +accessed by various functions as described above. However, the structures +representing the actual OPPs and domains are internal to the OPP library itself +to allow for suitable abstraction reusable across systems. + +struct opp - The internal data structure of OPP library which is used to + represent an OPP. In addition to the freq, voltage, availability + information, it also contains internal book keeping information required + for the OPP library to operate on. Pointer to this structure is + provided back to the users such as SoC framework to be used as a + identifier for OPP in the interactions with OPP layer. + + WARNING: The struct opp pointer should not be parsed or modified by the + users. The defaults of for an instance is populated by opp_add, but the + availability of the OPP can be modified by opp_enable/disable functions. + +struct device - This is used to identify a domain to the OPP layer. The + nature of the device and it's implementation is left to the user of + OPP library such as the SoC framework. + +Overall, in a simplistic view, the data structure operations is represented as +following: + +Initialization / modification: + +-----+ /- opp_enable +opp_add --> | opp | <------- + | +-----+ \- opp_disable + \-------> domain_info(device) + +Search functions: + /-- opp_find_freq_ceil ---\ +-----+ +domain_info<---- opp_find_freq_exact -----> | opp | + \-- opp_find_freq_floor ---/ +-----+ + +Retrieval functions: ++-----+ /- opp_get_voltage +| opp | <--- ++-----+ \- opp_get_freq + +domain_info <- opp_get_opp_count diff --git a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt index 9363e05..8ed1758 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/regulator/overview.txt @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ regulators (where voltage output is controllable) and current sinks (where current limit is controllable). (C) 2008 Wolfson Microelectronics PLC. -Author: Liam Girdwood <lg@opensource.wolfsonmicro.com> +Author: Liam Girdwood <lrg@slimlogic.co.uk> Nomenclature diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt index 55b859b..ffe55ff 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ Run-time Power Management Framework for I/O Devices (C) 2009 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. +(C) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> 1. Introduction @@ -49,6 +50,15 @@ type's callbacks are not defined) of given device. The bus type, device type and device class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows. +By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts +enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function +to tell the PM core that a device's ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() +callbacks should be invoked in atomic context with interrupts disabled +(->runtime_idle() is still invoked the default way). This implies that these +callback routines must not block or sleep, but it also means that the +synchronous helper functions listed at the end of Section 4 can be used within +an interrupt handler or in an atomic context. + The subsystem-level suspend callback is _entirely_ _responsible_ for handling the suspend of the device as appropriate, which may, but need not include executing the device driver's own ->runtime_suspend() callback (from the @@ -157,7 +167,8 @@ rules: to execute it, the other callbacks will not be executed for the same device. * A request to execute ->runtime_resume() will cancel any pending or - scheduled requests to execute the other callbacks for the same device. + scheduled requests to execute the other callbacks for the same device, + except for scheduled autosuspends. 3. Run-time PM Device Fields @@ -165,7 +176,7 @@ The following device run-time PM fields are present in 'struct dev_pm_info', as defined in include/linux/pm.h: struct timer_list suspend_timer; - - timer used for scheduling (delayed) suspend request + - timer used for scheduling (delayed) suspend and autosuspend requests unsigned long timer_expires; - timer expiration time, in jiffies (if this is different from zero, the @@ -230,6 +241,32 @@ defined in include/linux/pm.h: interface; it may only be modified with the help of the pm_runtime_allow() and pm_runtime_forbid() helper functions + unsigned int no_callbacks; + - indicates that the device does not use the run-time PM callbacks (see + Section 8); it may be modified only by the pm_runtime_no_callbacks() + helper function + + unsigned int irq_safe; + - indicates that the ->runtime_suspend() and ->runtime_resume() callbacks + will be invoked with the spinlock held and interrupts disabled + + unsigned int use_autosuspend; + - indicates that the device's driver supports delayed autosuspend (see + Section 9); it may be modified only by the + pm_runtime{_dont}_use_autosuspend() helper functions + + unsigned int timer_autosuspends; + - indicates that the PM core should attempt to carry out an autosuspend + when the timer expires rather than a normal suspend + + int autosuspend_delay; + - the delay time (in milliseconds) to be used for autosuspend + + unsigned long last_busy; + - the time (in jiffies) when the pm_runtime_mark_last_busy() helper + function was last called for this device; used in calculating inactivity + periods for autosuspend + All of the above fields are members of the 'power' member of 'struct device'. 4. Run-time PM Device Helper Functions @@ -255,6 +292,12 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: error code on failure, where -EAGAIN or -EBUSY means it is safe to attempt to suspend the device again in future + int pm_runtime_autosuspend(struct device *dev); + - same as pm_runtime_suspend() except that the autosuspend delay is taken + into account; if pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() says the delay has + not yet expired then an autosuspend is scheduled for the appropriate time + and 0 is returned + int pm_runtime_resume(struct device *dev); - execute the subsystem-level resume callback for the device; returns 0 on success, 1 if the device's run-time PM status was already 'active' or @@ -267,6 +310,11 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: device (the request is represented by a work item in pm_wq); returns 0 on success or error code if the request has not been queued up + int pm_request_autosuspend(struct device *dev); + - schedule the execution of the subsystem-level suspend callback for the + device when the autosuspend delay has expired; if the delay has already + expired then the work item is queued up immediately + int pm_schedule_suspend(struct device *dev, unsigned int delay); - schedule the execution of the subsystem-level suspend callback for the device in future, where 'delay' is the time to wait before queuing up a @@ -298,12 +346,24 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: - decrement the device's usage counter int pm_runtime_put(struct device *dev); - - decrement the device's usage counter, run pm_request_idle(dev) and return - its result + - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run + pm_request_idle(dev) and return its result + + int pm_runtime_put_autosuspend(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run + pm_request_autosuspend(dev) and return its result int pm_runtime_put_sync(struct device *dev); - - decrement the device's usage counter, run pm_runtime_idle(dev) and return - its result + - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run + pm_runtime_idle(dev) and return its result + + int pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run + pm_runtime_suspend(dev) and return its result + + int pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend(struct device *dev); + - decrement the device's usage counter; if the result is 0 then run + pm_runtime_autosuspend(dev) and return its result void pm_runtime_enable(struct device *dev); - enable the run-time PM helper functions to run the device bus type's @@ -336,8 +396,8 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: zero) bool pm_runtime_suspended(struct device *dev); - - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended', or false - otherwise + - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended' and its + 'power.disable_depth' field is equal to zero, or false otherwise void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev); - set the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and decrease its usage @@ -349,19 +409,65 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h: counter (used by the /sys/devices/.../power/control interface to effectively prevent the device from being power managed at run time) + void pm_runtime_no_callbacks(struct device *dev); + - set the power.no_callbacks flag for the device and remove the run-time + PM attributes from /sys/devices/.../power (or prevent them from being + added when the device is registered) + + void pm_runtime_irq_safe(struct device *dev); + - set the power.irq_safe flag for the device, causing the runtime-PM + suspend and resume callbacks (but not the idle callback) to be invoked + with interrupts disabled + + void pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(struct device *dev); + - set the power.last_busy field to the current time + + void pm_runtime_use_autosuspend(struct device *dev); + - set the power.use_autosuspend flag, enabling autosuspend delays + + void pm_runtime_dont_use_autosuspend(struct device *dev); + - clear the power.use_autosuspend flag, disabling autosuspend delays + + void pm_runtime_set_autosuspend_delay(struct device *dev, int delay); + - set the power.autosuspend_delay value to 'delay' (expressed in + milliseconds); if 'delay' is negative then run-time suspends are + prevented + + unsigned long pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration(struct device *dev); + - calculate the time when the current autosuspend delay period will expire, + based on power.last_busy and power.autosuspend_delay; if the delay time + is 1000 ms or larger then the expiration time is rounded up to the + nearest second; returns 0 if the delay period has already expired or + power.use_autosuspend isn't set, otherwise returns the expiration time + in jiffies + It is safe to execute the following helper functions from interrupt context: pm_request_idle() +pm_request_autosuspend() pm_schedule_suspend() pm_request_resume() pm_runtime_get_noresume() pm_runtime_get() pm_runtime_put_noidle() pm_runtime_put() +pm_runtime_put_autosuspend() +pm_runtime_enable() pm_suspend_ignore_children() pm_runtime_set_active() pm_runtime_set_suspended() -pm_runtime_enable() +pm_runtime_suspended() +pm_runtime_mark_last_busy() +pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() + +If pm_runtime_irq_safe() has been called for a device then the following helper +functions may also be used in interrupt context: + +pm_runtime_suspend() +pm_runtime_autosuspend() +pm_runtime_resume() +pm_runtime_get_sync() +pm_runtime_put_sync_suspend() 5. Run-time PM Initialization, Device Probing and Removal @@ -524,3 +630,141 @@ poweroff and run-time suspend callback, and similarly for system resume, thaw, restore, and run-time resume, can achieve this with the help of the UNIVERSAL_DEV_PM_OPS macro defined in include/linux/pm.h (possibly setting its last argument to NULL). + +8. "No-Callback" Devices + +Some "devices" are only logical sub-devices of their parent and cannot be +power-managed on their own. (The prototype example is a USB interface. Entire +USB devices can go into low-power mode or send wake-up requests, but neither is +possible for individual interfaces.) The drivers for these devices have no +need of run-time PM callbacks; if the callbacks did exist, ->runtime_suspend() +and ->runtime_resume() would always return 0 without doing anything else and +->runtime_idle() would always call pm_runtime_suspend(). + +Subsystems can tell the PM core about these devices by calling +pm_runtime_no_callbacks(). This should be done after the device structure is +initialized and before it is registered (although after device registration is +also okay). The routine will set the device's power.no_callbacks flag and +prevent the non-debugging run-time PM sysfs attributes from being created. + +When power.no_callbacks is set, the PM core will not invoke the +->runtime_idle(), ->runtime_suspend(), or ->runtime_resume() callbacks. +Instead it will assume that suspends and resumes always succeed and that idle +devices should be suspended. + +As a consequence, the PM core will never directly inform the device's subsystem +or driver about run-time power changes. Instead, the driver for the device's +parent must take responsibility for telling the device's driver when the +parent's power state changes. + +9. Autosuspend, or automatically-delayed suspends + +Changing a device's power state isn't free; it requires both time and energy. +A device should be put in a low-power state only when there's some reason to +think it will remain in that state for a substantial time. A common heuristic +says that a device which hasn't been used for a while is liable to remain +unused; following this advice, drivers should not allow devices to be suspended +at run-time until they have been inactive for some minimum period. Even when +the heuristic ends up being non-optimal, it will still prevent devices from +"bouncing" too rapidly between low-power and full-power states. + +The term "autosuspend" is an historical remnant. It doesn't mean that the +device is automatically suspended (the subsystem or driver still has to call +the appropriate PM routines); rather it means that run-time suspends will +automatically be delayed until the desired period of inactivity has elapsed. + +Inactivity is determined based on the power.last_busy field. Drivers should +call pm_runtime_mark_last_busy() to update this field after carrying out I/O, +typically just before calling pm_runtime_put_autosuspend(). The desired length +of the inactivity period is a matter of policy. Subsystems can set this length +initially by calling pm_runtime_set_autosuspend_delay(), but after device +registration the length should be controlled by user space, using the +/sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms attribute. + +In order to use autosuspend, subsystems or drivers must call +pm_runtime_use_autosuspend() (preferably before registering the device), and +thereafter they should use the various *_autosuspend() helper functions instead +of the non-autosuspend counterparts: + + Instead of: pm_runtime_suspend use: pm_runtime_autosuspend; + Instead of: pm_schedule_suspend use: pm_request_autosuspend; + Instead of: pm_runtime_put use: pm_runtime_put_autosuspend; + Instead of: pm_runtime_put_sync use: pm_runtime_put_sync_autosuspend. + +Drivers may also continue to use the non-autosuspend helper functions; they +will behave normally, not taking the autosuspend delay into account. +Similarly, if the power.use_autosuspend field isn't set then the autosuspend +helper functions will behave just like the non-autosuspend counterparts. + +The implementation is well suited for asynchronous use in interrupt contexts. +However such use inevitably involves races, because the PM core can't +synchronize ->runtime_suspend() callbacks with the arrival of I/O requests. +This synchronization must be handled by the driver, using its private lock. +Here is a schematic pseudo-code example: + + foo_read_or_write(struct foo_priv *foo, void *data) + { + lock(&foo->private_lock); + add_request_to_io_queue(foo, data); + if (foo->num_pending_requests++ == 0) + pm_runtime_get(&foo->dev); + if (!foo->is_suspended) + foo_process_next_request(foo); + unlock(&foo->private_lock); + } + + foo_io_completion(struct foo_priv *foo, void *req) + { + lock(&foo->private_lock); + if (--foo->num_pending_requests == 0) { + pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(&foo->dev); + pm_runtime_put_autosuspend(&foo->dev); + } else { + foo_process_next_request(foo); + } + unlock(&foo->private_lock); + /* Send req result back to the user ... */ + } + + int foo_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev) + { + struct foo_priv foo = container_of(dev, ...); + int ret = 0; + + lock(&foo->private_lock); + if (foo->num_pending_requests > 0) { + ret = -EBUSY; + } else { + /* ... suspend the device ... */ + foo->is_suspended = 1; + } + unlock(&foo->private_lock); + return ret; + } + + int foo_runtime_resume(struct device *dev) + { + struct foo_priv foo = container_of(dev, ...); + + lock(&foo->private_lock); + /* ... resume the device ... */ + foo->is_suspended = 0; + pm_runtime_mark_last_busy(&foo->dev); + if (foo->num_pending_requests > 0) + foo_process_requests(foo); + unlock(&foo->private_lock); + return 0; + } + +The important point is that after foo_io_completion() asks for an autosuspend, +the foo_runtime_suspend() callback may race with foo_read_or_write(). +Therefore foo_runtime_suspend() has to check whether there are any pending I/O +requests (while holding the private lock) before allowing the suspend to +proceed. + +In addition, the power.autosuspend_delay field can be changed by user space at +any time. If a driver cares about this, it can call +pm_runtime_autosuspend_expiration() from within the ->runtime_suspend() +callback while holding its private lock. If the function returns a nonzero +value then the delay has not yet expired and the callback should return +-EAGAIN. diff --git a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt index 514b94f..1bdfa04 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/s2ram.txt @@ -49,6 +49,13 @@ machine that doesn't boot) is: device (lspci and /sys/devices/pci* is your friend), and see if you can fix it, disable it, or trace into its resume function. + If no device matches the hash (or any matches appear to be false positives), + the culprit may be a device from a loadable kernel module that is not loaded + until after the hash is checked. You can check the hash against the current + devices again after more modules are loaded using sysfs: + + cat /sys/power/pm_trace_dev_match + For example, the above happens to be the VGA device on my EVO, which I used to run with "radeonfb" (it's an ATI Radeon mobility). It turns out that "radeonfb" simply cannot resume that device - it tries to set the diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt index 9d60ab7..ea71889 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt @@ -66,7 +66,8 @@ swsusp saves the state of the machine into active swaps and then reboots or powerdowns. You must explicitly specify the swap partition to resume from with ``resume='' kernel option. If signature is found it loads and restores saved state. If the option ``noresume'' is specified as a boot parameter, it skips -the resuming. +the resuming. If the option ``hibernate=nocompress'' is specified as a boot +parameter, it saves hibernation image without compression. In the meantime while the system is suspended you should not add/remove any of the hardware, write to the filesystems, etc. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt index 568fa08..302db5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt @@ -49,40 +49,13 @@ Table of Contents f) MDIO on GPIOs g) SPI busses - VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips - 1) The /system-controller node - 2) Child nodes of /system-controller - a) Marvell Discovery MDIO bus - b) Marvell Discovery ethernet controller - c) Marvell Discovery PHY nodes - d) Marvell Discovery SDMA nodes - e) Marvell Discovery BRG nodes - f) Marvell Discovery CUNIT nodes - g) Marvell Discovery MPSCROUTING nodes - h) Marvell Discovery MPSCINTR nodes - i) Marvell Discovery MPSC nodes - j) Marvell Discovery Watch Dog Timer nodes - k) Marvell Discovery I2C nodes - l) Marvell Discovery PIC (Programmable Interrupt Controller) nodes - m) Marvell Discovery MPP (Multipurpose Pins) multiplexing nodes - n) Marvell Discovery GPP (General Purpose Pins) nodes - o) Marvell Discovery PCI host bridge node - p) Marvell Discovery CPU Error nodes - q) Marvell Discovery SRAM Controller nodes - r) Marvell Discovery PCI Error Handler nodes - s) Marvell Discovery Memory Controller nodes - - VIII - Specifying interrupt information for devices + VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices 1) interrupts property 2) interrupt-parent property 3) OpenPIC Interrupt Controllers 4) ISA Interrupt Controllers - IX - Specifying GPIO information for devices - 1) gpios property - 2) gpio-controller nodes - - X - Specifying device power management information (sleep property) + VIII - Specifying device power management information (sleep property) Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540 diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt index 80510c0..777abd7 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/spi.txt @@ -1,7 +1,9 @@ * SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) Required properties: -- cell-index : SPI controller index. +- cell-index : QE SPI subblock index. + 0: QE subblock SPI1 + 1: QE subblock SPI2 - compatible : should be "fsl,spi". - mode : the SPI operation mode, it can be "cpu" or "cpu-qe". - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device @@ -29,3 +31,23 @@ Example: gpios = <&gpio 18 1 // device reg=<0> &gpio 19 1>; // device reg=<1> }; + + +* eSPI (Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface) + +Required properties: +- compatible : should be "fsl,mpc8536-espi". +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. +- interrupts : should contain eSPI interrupt, the device has one interrupt. +- fsl,espi-num-chipselects : the number of the chipselect signals. + +Example: + spi@110000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "fsl,mpc8536-espi"; + reg = <0x110000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <53 0x2>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + fsl,espi-num-chipselects = <4>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt index b001524..bd5723f 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/usb.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ and additions : Required properties : - compatible : Should be "fsl-usb2-mph" for multi port host USB controllers, or "fsl-usb2-dr" for dual role USB controllers + or "fsl,mpc5121-usb2-dr" for dual role USB controllers of MPC5121 - phy_type : For multi port host USB controllers, should be one of "ulpi", or "serial". For dual role USB controllers, should be one of "ulpi", "utmi", "utmi_wide", or "serial". @@ -33,6 +34,12 @@ Recommended properties : - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that services interrupts for this device. +Optional properties : + - fsl,invert-drvvbus : boolean; for MPC5121 USB0 only. Indicates the + port power polarity of internal PHY signal DRVVBUS is inverted. + - fsl,invert-pwr-fault : boolean; for MPC5121 USB0 only. Indicates + the PWR_FAULT signal polarity is inverted. + Example multi port host USB controller device node : usb@22000 { compatible = "fsl-usb2-mph"; @@ -57,3 +64,18 @@ Example dual role USB controller device node : dr_mode = "otg"; phy = "ulpi"; }; + +Example dual role USB controller device node for MPC5121ADS: + + usb@4000 { + compatible = "fsl,mpc5121-usb2-dr"; + reg = <0x4000 0x1000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + interrupt-parent = < &ipic >; + interrupts = <44 0x8>; + dr_mode = "otg"; + phy_type = "utmi_wide"; + fsl,invert-drvvbus; + fsl,invert-pwr-fault; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt index f93462c..6d8be34 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt @@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ The proper channel for reporting bugs is either through the Linux OS distribution company that provided your OS or by posting issues to the PowerPC development mailing list at: -linuxppc-dev@ozlabs.org +linuxppc-dev@lists.ozlabs.org This request is to provide a documented and searchable public exchange of the problems and solutions surrounding this driver for the benefit of diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt index 221f38b..19f8278 100644 --- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt +++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt @@ -21,8 +21,8 @@ three rotations, respectively, to balance the tree), with slightly slower To quote Linux Weekly News: There are a number of red-black trees in use in the kernel. - The anticipatory, deadline, and CFQ I/O schedulers all employ - rbtrees to track requests; the packet CD/DVD driver does the same. + The deadline and CFQ I/O schedulers employ rbtrees to + track requests; the packet CD/DVD driver does the same. The high-resolution timer code uses an rbtree to organize outstanding timer requests. The ext3 filesystem tracks directory entries in a red-black tree. Virtual memory areas (VMAs) are tracked with red-black diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas index 3002356..b64d10d 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas @@ -1,3 +1,72 @@ +Release Date : Tues. Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Adam Radford +Current Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1 +Old Version : 00.00.04.31-rc1 + 1. Rename megaraid_sas.c to megaraid_sas_base.c. + 2. Update GPL headers. + 3. Add MSI-X support and 'msix_disable' module parameter. + 4. Use lowest memory bar (for SR-IOV VF support). + 5. Add struct megasas_instance_temlate changes, and change all code to use + new instance entries: + + irqreturn_t (*service_isr )(int irq, void *devp); + void (*tasklet)(unsigned long); + u32 (*init_adapter)(struct megasas_instance *); + u32 (*build_and_issue_cmd) (struct megasas_instance *, + struct scsi_cmnd *); + void (*issue_dcmd) (struct megasas_instance *instance, + struct megasas_cmd *cmd); + + 6. Add code to support MegaRAID 9265/9285 controllers device id (0x5b). +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- +1 Release Date : Thur. May 03, 2010 09:12:45 PST 2009 - + (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) + Bo Yang + +2 Current Version : 00.00.04.31-rc1 +3 Older Version : 00.00.04.17.1-rc1 + +1. Add the Online Controller Reset (OCR) to the Driver. + OCR is the new feature for megaraid_sas driver which + will allow the fw to do the chip reset which will not + affact the OS behavious. + + To add the OCR support, driver need to do: + a). reset the controller chips -- Xscale and Gen2 which + will change the function calls and add the reset function + related to this two chips. + + b). during the reset, driver will store the pending cmds + which not returned by FW to driver's pending queue. Driver + will re-issue those pending cmds again to FW after the OCR + finished. + + c). In driver's timeout routine, driver will report to + OS as reset. Also driver's queue routine will block the + cmds until the OCR finished. + + d). in Driver's ISR routine, if driver get the FW state as + state change, FW in Failure status and FW support online controller + reset (OCR), driver will start to do the controller reset. + + e). In driver's IOCTL routine, the application cmds will wait for the + OCR to finish, then issue the cmds to FW. + + f). Before driver kill adapter, driver will do last chance of + OCR to see if driver can bring back the FW. + +2. Add the support update flag to the driver to tell LSI megaraid_sas + application which driver will support the device update. So application + will not need to do the device update after application add/del the device + from the system. +3. In driver's timeout routine, driver will do three time reset if fw is in + failed state. Driver will kill adapter if can't bring back FW after the + this three times reset. +4. Add the input parameter max_sectors to 1MB support to our GEN2 controller. + customer can use the input paramenter max_sectors to add 1MB support to GEN2 + controller. + 1 Release Date : Thur. Oct 29, 2009 09:12:45 PST 2009 - (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) Bo Yang diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt index 570ef2b..df322c1 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt @@ -1044,9 +1044,9 @@ Details: /** - * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke 'done' on completion + * queuecommand - queue scsi command, invoke scp->scsi_done on completion + * @shost: pointer to the scsi host object * @scp: pointer to scsi command object - * @done: function pointer to be invoked on completion * * Returns 0 on success. * @@ -1074,42 +1074,45 @@ Details: * * Other types of errors that are detected immediately may be * flagged by setting scp->result to an appropriate value, - * invoking the 'done' callback, and then returning 0 from this - * function. If the command is not performed immediately (and the - * LLD is starting (or will start) the given command) then this - * function should place 0 in scp->result and return 0. + * invoking the scp->scsi_done callback, and then returning 0 + * from this function. If the command is not performed + * immediately (and the LLD is starting (or will start) the given + * command) then this function should place 0 in scp->result and + * return 0. * * Command ownership. If the driver returns zero, it owns the - * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the 'done' - * callback is executed. Note: the driver may call done before - * returning zero, but after it has called done, it may not - * return any value other than zero. If the driver makes a - * non-zero return, it must not execute the command's done - * callback at any time. - * - * Locks: struct Scsi_Host::host_lock held on entry (with "irqsave") - * and is expected to be held on return. + * command and must take responsibility for ensuring the + * scp->scsi_done callback is executed. Note: the driver may + * call scp->scsi_done before returning zero, but after it has + * called scp->scsi_done, it may not return any value other than + * zero. If the driver makes a non-zero return, it must not + * execute the command's scsi_done callback at any time. + * + * Locks: up to and including 2.6.36, struct Scsi_Host::host_lock + * held on entry (with "irqsave") and is expected to be + * held on return. From 2.6.37 onwards, queuecommand is + * called without any locks held. * * Calling context: in interrupt (soft irq) or process context * - * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it will - * not wait for IO to complete. Hence the 'done' callback is invoked - * (often directly from an interrupt service routine) some time after - * this function has returned. In some cases (e.g. pseudo adapter - * drivers that manufacture the response to a SCSI INQUIRY) - * the 'done' callback may be invoked before this function returns. - * If the 'done' callback is not invoked within a certain period - * the SCSI mid level will commence error processing. - * If a status of CHECK CONDITION is placed in "result" when the - * 'done' callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should - * perform autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer + * Notes: This function should be relatively fast. Normally it + * will not wait for IO to complete. Hence the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked (often directly from an interrupt service + * routine) some time after this function has returned. In some + * cases (e.g. pseudo adapter drivers that manufacture the + * response to a SCSI INQUIRY) the scp->scsi_done callback may be + * invoked before this function returns. If the scp->scsi_done + * callback is not invoked within a certain period the SCSI mid + * level will commence error processing. If a status of CHECK + * CONDITION is placed in "result" when the scp->scsi_done + * callback is invoked, then the LLD driver should perform + * autosense and fill in the struct scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer * array. The scsi_cmnd::sense_buffer array is zeroed prior to * the mid level queuing a command to an LLD. * * Defined in: LLD **/ - int queuecommand(struct scsi_cmnd * scp, - void (*done)(struct scsi_cmnd *)) + int queuecommand(struct Scsi_Host *shost, struct scsi_cmnd * scp) /** diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt index 4075260..691ca29 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/st.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/st.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ This file contains brief information about the SCSI tape driver. The driver is currently maintained by Kai Mäkisara (email Kai.Makisara@kolumbus.fi) -Last modified: Sun Feb 24 21:59:07 2008 by kai.makisara +Last modified: Sun Aug 29 18:25:47 2010 by kai.makisara BASICS @@ -85,6 +85,17 @@ writing and the last operation has been a write. Two filemarks can be optionally written. In both cases end of data is signified by returning zero bytes for two consecutive reads. +Writing filemarks without the immediate bit set in the SCSI command block acts +as a synchronization point, i.e., all remaining data form the drive buffers is +written to tape before the command returns. This makes sure that write errors +are caught at that point, but this takes time. In some applications, several +consecutive files must be written fast. The MTWEOFI operation can be used to +write the filemarks without flushing the drive buffer. Writing filemark at +close() is always flushing the drive buffers. However, if the previous +operation is MTWEOFI, close() does not write a filemark. This can be used if +the program wants to close/open the tape device between files and wants to +skip waiting. + If rewind, offline, bsf, or seek is done and previous tape operation was write, a filemark is written before moving tape. @@ -301,6 +312,8 @@ MTBSR Space backward over count records. MTFSS Space forward over count setmarks. MTBSS Space backward over count setmarks. MTWEOF Write count filemarks. +MTWEOFI Write count filemarks with immediate bit set (i.e., does not + wait until data is on tape) MTWSM Write count setmarks. MTREW Rewind tape. MTOFFL Set device off line (often rewind plus eject). diff --git a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX index 07dcdb0..e09468a 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/serial/00-INDEX @@ -14,6 +14,8 @@ riscom8.txt - notes on using the RISCom/8 multi-port serial driver. rocket.txt - info on the Comtrol RocketPort multiport serial driver. +serial-rs485.txt + - info about RS485 structures and support in the kernel. specialix.txt - info on hardware/driver for specialix IO8+ multiport serial card. stallion.txt diff --git a/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a493238 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/serial/serial-rs485.txt @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + RS485 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS + +1. INTRODUCTION + + EIA-485, also known as TIA/EIA-485 or RS-485, is a standard defining the + electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced + digital multipoint systems. + This standard is widely used for communications in industrial automation + because it can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically + noisy environments. + +2. HARDWARE-RELATED CONSIDERATIONS + + Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Atmel AT91 or 16C950 UART) contain a built-in + half-duplex mode capable of automatically controlling line direction by + toggling RTS or DTR signals. That can be used to control external + half-duplex hardware like an RS485 transceiver or any RS232-connected + half-duplex devices like some modems. + + For these microcontrollers, the Linux driver should be made capable of + working in both modes, and proper ioctls (see later) should be made + available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and + vice versa. + +3. DATA STRUCTURES ALREADY AVAILABLE IN THE KERNEL + + The Linux kernel provides the serial_rs485 structure (see [1]) to handle + RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485 + parameters in the platform data and in ioctls. + + Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and RS485 should + provide at least the following ioctls: + + - TIOCSRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542F). This ioctl is used + to enable/disable RS485 mode from user-space + + - TIOCGRS485 (typically associated with number 0x542E). This ioctl is used + to get RS485 mode from kernel-space (i.e., driver) to user-space. + + In other words, the serial driver should contain a code similar to the next + one: + + static struct uart_ops atmel_pops = { + /* ... */ + .ioctl = handle_ioctl, + }; + + static int handle_ioctl(struct uart_port *port, + unsigned int cmd, + unsigned long arg) + { + struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; + + switch (cmd) { + case TIOCSRS485: + if (copy_from_user(&rs485conf, + (struct serial_rs485 *) arg, + sizeof(rs485conf))) + return -EFAULT; + + /* ... */ + break; + + case TIOCGRS485: + if (copy_to_user((struct serial_rs485 *) arg, + ..., + sizeof(rs485conf))) + return -EFAULT; + /* ... */ + break; + + /* ... */ + } + } + + +4. USAGE FROM USER-LEVEL + + From user-level, RS485 configuration can be get/set using the previous + ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code: + + #include <linux/serial.h> + + /* Driver-specific ioctls: */ + #define TIOCGRS485 0x542E + #define TIOCSRS485 0x542F + + /* Open your specific device (e.g., /dev/mydevice): */ + int fd = open ("/dev/mydevice", O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; + + /* Set RS485 mode: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_ENABLED; + + /* Set rts delay before send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_BEFORE_SEND; + rs485conf.delay_rts_before_send = ...; + + /* Set rts delay after send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; + rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...; + + if (ioctl (fd, TIOCSRS485, &rs485conf) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + /* Use read() and write() syscalls here... */ + + /* Close the device when finished: */ + if (close (fd) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + +5. REFERENCES + + [1] include/linux/serial.h diff --git a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 114b595..0000000 --- a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -Clock framework on SuperH architecture - -The framework on SH extends existing API by the function clk_set_rate_ex, -which prototype is as follows: - - clk_set_rate_ex (struct clk *clk, unsigned long rate, int algo_id) - -The algo_id parameter is used to specify algorithm used to recalculate clocks, -adjanced to clock, specified as first argument. It is assumed that algo_id==0 -means no changes to adjanced clock - -Internally, the clk_set_rate_ex forwards request to clk->ops->set_rate method, -if it is present in ops structure. The method should set the clock rate and adjust -all needed clocks according to the passed algo_id. -Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependent. For the sh7722, the following -values are defined: - - NO_CHANGE = 0, - IUS_N1_N1, /* I:U = N:1, U:Sh = N:1 */ - IUS_322, /* I:U:Sh = 3:2:2 */ - IUS_522, /* I:U:Sh = 5:2:2 */ - IUS_N11, /* I:U:Sh = N:1:1 */ - SB_N1, /* Sh:B = N:1 */ - SB3_N1, /* Sh:B3 = N:1 */ - SB3_32, /* Sh:B3 = 3:2 */ - SB3_43, /* Sh:B3 = 4:3 */ - SB3_54, /* Sh:B3 = 5:4 */ - BP_N1, /* B:P = N:1 */ - IP_N1 /* I:P = N:1 */ - -Each of these constants means relation between clocks that can be set via the FRQCR -register diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 7f4dceb..d0eb696 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -300,6 +300,74 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. control correctly. If you have problems regarding this, try another ALSA compliant mixer (alsamixer works). + Module snd-azt1605 + ------------------ + + Module for Aztech Sound Galaxy soundcards based on the Aztech AZT1605 + chipset. + + port - port # for BASE (0x220,0x240,0x260,0x280) + wss_port - port # for WSS (0x530,0x604,0xe80,0xf40) + irq - IRQ # for WSS (7,9,10,11) + dma1 - DMA # for WSS playback (0,1,3) + dma2 - DMA # for WSS capture (0,1), -1 = disabled (default) + mpu_port - port # for MPU-401 UART (0x300,0x330), -1 = disabled (default) + mpu_irq - IRQ # for MPU-401 UART (3,5,7,9), -1 = disabled (default) + fm_port - port # for OPL3 (0x388), -1 = disabled (default) + + This module supports multiple cards. It does not support autoprobe: port, + wss_port, irq and dma1 have to be specified. The other values are + optional. + + "port" needs to match the BASE ADDRESS jumper on the card (0x220 or 0x240) + or the value stored in the card's EEPROM for cards that have an EEPROM and + their "CONFIG MODE" jumper set to "EEPROM SETTING". The other values can + be choosen freely from the options enumerated above. + + If dma2 is specified and different from dma1, the card will operate in + full-duplex mode. When dma1=3, only dma2=0 is valid and the only way to + enable capture since only channels 0 and 1 are available for capture. + + Generic settings are "port=0x220 wss_port=0x530 irq=10 dma1=1 dma2=0 + mpu_port=0x330 mpu_irq=9 fm_port=0x388". + + Whatever IRQ and DMA channels you pick, be sure to reserve them for + legacy ISA in your BIOS. + + Module snd-azt2316 + ------------------ + + Module for Aztech Sound Galaxy soundcards based on the Aztech AZT2316 + chipset. + + port - port # for BASE (0x220,0x240,0x260,0x280) + wss_port - port # for WSS (0x530,0x604,0xe80,0xf40) + irq - IRQ # for WSS (7,9,10,11) + dma1 - DMA # for WSS playback (0,1,3) + dma2 - DMA # for WSS capture (0,1), -1 = disabled (default) + mpu_port - port # for MPU-401 UART (0x300,0x330), -1 = disabled (default) + mpu_irq - IRQ # for MPU-401 UART (5,7,9,10), -1 = disabled (default) + fm_port - port # for OPL3 (0x388), -1 = disabled (default) + + This module supports multiple cards. It does not support autoprobe: port, + wss_port, irq and dma1 have to be specified. The other values are + optional. + + "port" needs to match the BASE ADDRESS jumper on the card (0x220 or 0x240) + or the value stored in the card's EEPROM for cards that have an EEPROM and + their "CONFIG MODE" jumper set to "EEPROM SETTING". The other values can + be choosen freely from the options enumerated above. + + If dma2 is specified and different from dma1, the card will operate in + full-duplex mode. When dma1=3, only dma2=0 is valid and the only way to + enable capture since only channels 0 and 1 are available for capture. + + Generic settings are "port=0x220 wss_port=0x530 irq=10 dma1=1 dma2=0 + mpu_port=0x330 mpu_irq=9 fm_port=0x388". + + Whatever IRQ and DMA channels you pick, be sure to reserve them for + legacy ISA in your BIOS. + Module snd-aw2 -------------- @@ -1641,20 +1709,6 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. This card is also known as Audio Excel DSP 16 or Zoltrix AV302. - Module snd-sgalaxy - ------------------ - - Module for Aztech Sound Galaxy sound card. - - sbport - Port # for SB16 interface (0x220,0x240) - wssport - Port # for WSS interface (0x530,0xe80,0xf40,0x604) - irq - IRQ # (7,9,10,11) - dma1 - DMA # - - This module supports multiple cards. - - The power-management is supported. - Module snd-sscape ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt index ce46fa1..37c6aad 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio-Models.txt @@ -296,6 +296,7 @@ Conexant 5051 Conexant 5066 ============= laptop Basic Laptop config (default) + hp-laptop HP laptops, e g G60 dell-laptop Dell laptops dell-vostro Dell Vostro olpc-xo-1_5 OLPC XO 1.5 diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt index 278cc21..c82beb0 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/HD-Audio.txt @@ -57,9 +57,11 @@ dead. However, this detection isn't perfect on some devices. In such a case, you can change the default method via `position_fix` option. `position_fix=1` means to use LPIB method explicitly. -`position_fix=2` means to use the position-buffer. 0 is the default -value, the automatic check and fallback to LPIB as described in the -above. If you get a problem of repeated sounds, this option might +`position_fix=2` means to use the position-buffer. +`position_fix=3` means to use a combination of both methods, needed +for some VIA and ATI controllers. 0 is the default value for all other +controllers, the automatic check and fallback to LPIB as described in +the above. If you get a problem of repeated sounds, this option might help. In addition to that, every controller is known to be broken regarding diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 6bb916d..68a4fe3 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Declaring PXA2xx Master Controllers ----------------------------------- Typically a SPI master is defined in the arch/.../mach-*/board-*.c as a "platform device". The master configuration is passed to the driver via a table -found in arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h: +found in include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h: struct pxa2xx_spi_master { enum pxa_ssp_type ssp_type; @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ using the "spi_board_info" structure found in "linux/spi/spi.h". See Each slave device attached to the PXA must provide slave specific configuration information via the structure "pxa2xx_spi_chip" found in -"arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver +"include/linux/spi/pxa2xx_spi.h". The pxa2xx_spi master controller driver will uses the configuration whenever the driver communicates with the slave device. All fields are optional. diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt index 3894eaa..209e158 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt @@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ show up in /proc/sys/kernel: - core_uses_pid - ctrl-alt-del - dentry-state +- dmesg_restrict - domainname - hostname - hotplug @@ -213,6 +214,19 @@ to decide what to do with it. ============================================================== +dmesg_restrict: + +This toggle indicates whether unprivileged users are prevented from using +dmesg(8) to view messages from the kernel's log buffer. When +dmesg_restrict is set to (0) there are no restrictions. When +dmesg_restrict is set set to (1), users must have CAP_SYS_ADMIN to use +dmesg(8). + +The kernel config option CONFIG_SECURITY_DMESG_RESTRICT sets the default +value of dmesg_restrict. + +============================================================== + domainname & hostname: These files can be used to set the NIS/YP domainname and the diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt index b606c2c..30289fa 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt @@ -80,8 +80,10 @@ dirty_background_bytes Contains the amount of dirty memory at which the pdflush background writeback daemon will start writeback. -If dirty_background_bytes is written, dirty_background_ratio becomes a function -of its value (dirty_background_bytes / the amount of dirtyable system memory). +Note: dirty_background_bytes is the counterpart of dirty_background_ratio. Only +one of them may be specified at a time. When one sysctl is written it is +immediately taken into account to evaluate the dirty memory limits and the +other appears as 0 when read. ============================================================== @@ -97,8 +99,10 @@ dirty_bytes Contains the amount of dirty memory at which a process generating disk writes will itself start writeback. -If dirty_bytes is written, dirty_ratio becomes a function of its value -(dirty_bytes / the amount of dirtyable system memory). +Note: dirty_bytes is the counterpart of dirty_ratio. Only one of them may be +specified at a time. When one sysctl is written it is immediately taken into +account to evaluate the dirty memory limits and the other appears as 0 when +read. Note: the minimum value allowed for dirty_bytes is two pages (in bytes); any value lower than this limit will be ignored and the old configuration will be diff --git a/Documentation/sysrq.txt b/Documentation/sysrq.txt index 5c17196..312e375 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysrq.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysrq.txt @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ On all - write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger. e.g.: 'f' - Will call oom_kill to kill a memory hog process. -'g' - Used by kgdb on ppc and sh platforms. +'g' - Used by kgdb (kernel debugger) 'h' - Will display help (actually any other key than those listed here will display help. but 'h' is easy to remember :-) @@ -110,12 +110,15 @@ On all - write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger. e.g.: 'u' - Will attempt to remount all mounted filesystems read-only. -'v' - Dumps Voyager SMP processor info to your console. +'v' - Forcefully restores framebuffer console +'v' - Causes ETM buffer dump [ARM-specific] 'w' - Dumps tasks that are in uninterruptable (blocked) state. 'x' - Used by xmon interface on ppc/powerpc platforms. +'y' - Show global CPU Registers [SPARC-64 specific] + 'z' - Dump the ftrace buffer '0'-'9' - Sets the console log level, controlling which kernel messages diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c b/Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c index 4bfafb7..9a3e701 100644 --- a/Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c +++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c @@ -97,6 +97,33 @@ hpet_open_close(int argc, const char **argv) void hpet_info(int argc, const char **argv) { + struct hpet_info info; + int fd; + + if (argc != 1) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_info: device-name\n"); + return; + } + + fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY); + if (fd < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_info: open of %s failed\n", argv[0]); + return; + } + + if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) { + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_info: failed to get info\n"); + goto out; + } + + fprintf(stderr, "hpet_info: hi_irqfreq 0x%lx hi_flags 0x%lx ", + info.hi_ireqfreq, info.hi_flags); + fprintf(stderr, "hi_hpet %d hi_timer %d\n", + info.hi_hpet, info.hi_timer); + +out: + close(fd); + return; } void diff --git a/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96d87b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/trace/events-power.txt @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + Subsystem Trace Points: power + +The power tracing system captures events related to power transitions +within the kernel. Broadly speaking there are three major subheadings: + + o Power state switch which reports events related to suspend (S-states), + cpuidle (C-states) and cpufreq (P-states) + o System clock related changes + o Power domains related changes and transitions + +This document describes what each of the tracepoints is and why they +might be useful. + +Cf. include/trace/events/power.h for the events definitions. + +1. Power state switch events +============================ + +1.1 New trace API +----------------- + +A 'cpu' event class gathers the CPU-related events: cpuidle and +cpufreq. + +cpu_idle "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +cpu_frequency "state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +A suspend event is used to indicate the system going in and out of the +suspend mode: + +machine_suspend "state=%lu" + + +Note: the value of '-1' or '4294967295' for state means an exit from the current state, +i.e. trace_cpu_idle(4, smp_processor_id()) means that the system +enters the idle state 4, while trace_cpu_idle(PWR_EVENT_EXIT, smp_processor_id()) +means that the system exits the previous idle state. + +The event which has 'state=4294967295' in the trace is very important to the user +space tools which are using it to detect the end of the current state, and so to +correctly draw the states diagrams and to calculate accurate statistics etc. + +1.2 DEPRECATED trace API +------------------------ + +A new Kconfig option CONFIG_EVENT_POWER_TRACING_DEPRECATED with the default value of +'y' has been created. This allows the legacy trace power API to be used conjointly +with the new trace API. +The Kconfig option, the old trace API (in include/trace/events/power.h) and the +old trace points will disappear in a future release (namely 2.6.41). + +power_start "type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +power_frequency "type=%lu state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +power_end "cpu_id=%lu" + +The 'type' parameter takes one of those macros: + . POWER_NONE = 0, + . POWER_CSTATE = 1, /* C-State */ + . POWER_PSTATE = 2, /* Fequency change or DVFS */ + +The 'state' parameter is set depending on the type: + . Target C-state for type=POWER_CSTATE, + . Target frequency for type=POWER_PSTATE, + +power_end is used to indicate the exit of a state, corresponding to the latest +power_start event. + +2. Clocks events +================ +The clock events are used for clock enable/disable and for +clock rate change. + +clock_enable "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +clock_disable "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" +clock_set_rate "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +The first parameter gives the clock name (e.g. "gpio1_iclk"). +The second parameter is '1' for enable, '0' for disable, the target +clock rate for set_rate. + +3. Power domains events +======================= +The power domain events are used for power domains transitions + +power_domain_target "%s state=%lu cpu_id=%lu" + +The first parameter gives the power domain name (e.g. "mpu_pwrdm"). +The second parameter is the power domain target state. + diff --git a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl index 1b55146..12cecc8 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl +++ b/Documentation/trace/postprocess/trace-vmscan-postprocess.pl @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ use constant HIGH_KSWAPD_LATENCY => 20; use constant HIGH_KSWAPD_REWAKEUP => 21; use constant HIGH_NR_SCANNED => 22; use constant HIGH_NR_TAKEN => 23; -use constant HIGH_NR_RECLAIM => 24; +use constant HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED => 24; use constant HIGH_NR_CONTIG_DIRTY => 25; my %perprocesspid; @@ -58,11 +58,13 @@ my $opt_read_procstat; my $total_wakeup_kswapd; my ($total_direct_reclaim, $total_direct_nr_scanned); my ($total_direct_latency, $total_kswapd_latency); +my ($total_direct_nr_reclaimed); my ($total_direct_writepage_file_sync, $total_direct_writepage_file_async); my ($total_direct_writepage_anon_sync, $total_direct_writepage_anon_async); my ($total_kswapd_nr_scanned, $total_kswapd_wake); my ($total_kswapd_writepage_file_sync, $total_kswapd_writepage_file_async); my ($total_kswapd_writepage_anon_sync, $total_kswapd_writepage_anon_async); +my ($total_kswapd_nr_reclaimed); # Catch sigint and exit on request my $sigint_report = 0; @@ -104,7 +106,7 @@ my $regex_kswapd_wake_default = 'nid=([0-9]*) order=([0-9]*)'; my $regex_kswapd_sleep_default = 'nid=([0-9]*)'; my $regex_wakeup_kswapd_default = 'nid=([0-9]*) zid=([0-9]*) order=([0-9]*)'; my $regex_lru_isolate_default = 'isolate_mode=([0-9]*) order=([0-9]*) nr_requested=([0-9]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_taken=([0-9]*) contig_taken=([0-9]*) contig_dirty=([0-9]*) contig_failed=([0-9]*)'; -my $regex_lru_shrink_inactive_default = 'lru=([A-Z_]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_reclaimed=([0-9]*) priority=([0-9]*)'; +my $regex_lru_shrink_inactive_default = 'nid=([0-9]*) zid=([0-9]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_reclaimed=([0-9]*) priority=([0-9]*) flags=([A-Z_|]*)'; my $regex_lru_shrink_active_default = 'lru=([A-Z_]*) nr_scanned=([0-9]*) nr_rotated=([0-9]*) priority=([0-9]*)'; my $regex_writepage_default = 'page=([0-9a-f]*) pfn=([0-9]*) flags=([A-Z_|]*)'; @@ -203,8 +205,8 @@ $regex_lru_shrink_inactive = generate_traceevent_regex( "vmscan/mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_inactive", $regex_lru_shrink_inactive_default, "nid", "zid", - "lru", - "nr_scanned", "nr_reclaimed", "priority"); + "nr_scanned", "nr_reclaimed", "priority", + "flags"); $regex_lru_shrink_active = generate_traceevent_regex( "vmscan/mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_active", $regex_lru_shrink_active_default, @@ -371,10 +373,29 @@ EVENT_PROCESS: print " $regex_lru_isolate/o\n"; next; } + my $isolate_mode = $1; my $nr_scanned = $4; my $nr_contig_dirty = $7; - $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; + + # To closer match vmstat scanning statistics, only count isolate_both + # and isolate_inactive as scanning. isolate_active is rotation + # isolate_inactive == 0 + # isolate_active == 1 + # isolate_both == 2 + if ($isolate_mode != 1) { + $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $nr_scanned; + } $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_CONTIG_DIRTY} += $nr_contig_dirty; + } elsif ($tracepoint eq "mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_inactive") { + $details = $5; + if ($details !~ /$regex_lru_shrink_inactive/o) { + print "WARNING: Failed to parse mm_vmscan_lru_shrink_inactive as expected\n"; + print " $details\n"; + print " $regex_lru_shrink_inactive/o\n"; + next; + } + my $nr_reclaimed = $4; + $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED} += $nr_reclaimed; } elsif ($tracepoint eq "mm_vmscan_writepage") { $details = $5; if ($details !~ /$regex_writepage/o) { @@ -464,8 +485,8 @@ sub dump_stats { # Print out process activity printf("\n"); - printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "Process", "Direct", "Wokeup", "Pages", "Pages", "Pages", "Time"); - printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "details", "Rclms", "Kswapd", "Scanned", "Sync-IO", "ASync-IO", "Stalled"); + printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "Process", "Direct", "Wokeup", "Pages", "Pages", "Pages", "Pages", "Time"); + printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "details", "Rclms", "Kswapd", "Scanned", "Rclmed", "Sync-IO", "ASync-IO", "Stalled"); foreach $process_pid (keys %stats) { if (!$stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_DIRECT_RECLAIM_BEGIN}) { @@ -475,6 +496,7 @@ sub dump_stats { $total_direct_reclaim += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_DIRECT_RECLAIM_BEGIN}; $total_wakeup_kswapd += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WAKEUP_KSWAPD}; $total_direct_nr_scanned += $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED}; + $total_direct_nr_reclaimed += $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED}; $total_direct_writepage_file_sync += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_SYNC}; $total_direct_writepage_anon_sync += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_SYNC}; $total_direct_writepage_file_async += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_ASYNC}; @@ -489,11 +511,12 @@ sub dump_stats { $index++; } - printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8d %10d %8u %8u %8u %8.3f", + printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8d %10d %8u %8u %8u %8u %8.3f", $process_pid, $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_DIRECT_RECLAIM_BEGIN}, $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WAKEUP_KSWAPD}, $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED}, + $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED}, $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_SYNC} + $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_SYNC}, $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_ASYNC} + $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_ASYNC}, $this_reclaim_delay / 1000); @@ -529,8 +552,8 @@ sub dump_stats { # Print out kswapd activity printf("\n"); - printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "Kswapd", "Kswapd", "Order", "Pages", "Pages", "Pages"); - printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "Instance", "Wakeups", "Re-wakeup", "Scanned", "Sync-IO", "ASync-IO"); + printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "Kswapd", "Kswapd", "Order", "Pages", "Pages", "Pages", "Pages"); + printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8s %10s %8s %8s %8s %8s\n", "Instance", "Wakeups", "Re-wakeup", "Scanned", "Rclmed", "Sync-IO", "ASync-IO"); foreach $process_pid (keys %stats) { if (!$stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_KSWAPD_WAKE}) { @@ -539,16 +562,18 @@ sub dump_stats { $total_kswapd_wake += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_KSWAPD_WAKE}; $total_kswapd_nr_scanned += $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED}; + $total_kswapd_nr_reclaimed += $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED}; $total_kswapd_writepage_file_sync += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_SYNC}; $total_kswapd_writepage_anon_sync += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_SYNC}; $total_kswapd_writepage_file_async += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_ASYNC}; $total_kswapd_writepage_anon_async += $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_ASYNC}; - printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8d %10d %8u %8i %8u", + printf("%-" . $max_strlen . "s %8d %10d %8u %8u %8i %8u", $process_pid, $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_KSWAPD_WAKE}, $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_KSWAPD_REWAKEUP}, $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED}, + $stats{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED}, $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_SYNC} + $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_SYNC}, $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_ASYNC} + $stats{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_ASYNC}); @@ -579,6 +604,7 @@ sub dump_stats { print "\nSummary\n"; print "Direct reclaims: $total_direct_reclaim\n"; print "Direct reclaim pages scanned: $total_direct_nr_scanned\n"; + print "Direct reclaim pages reclaimed: $total_direct_nr_reclaimed\n"; print "Direct reclaim write file sync I/O: $total_direct_writepage_file_sync\n"; print "Direct reclaim write anon sync I/O: $total_direct_writepage_anon_sync\n"; print "Direct reclaim write file async I/O: $total_direct_writepage_file_async\n"; @@ -588,6 +614,7 @@ sub dump_stats { print "\n"; print "Kswapd wakeups: $total_kswapd_wake\n"; print "Kswapd pages scanned: $total_kswapd_nr_scanned\n"; + print "Kswapd pages reclaimed: $total_kswapd_nr_reclaimed\n"; print "Kswapd reclaim write file sync I/O: $total_kswapd_writepage_file_sync\n"; print "Kswapd reclaim write anon sync I/O: $total_kswapd_writepage_anon_sync\n"; print "Kswapd reclaim write file async I/O: $total_kswapd_writepage_file_async\n"; @@ -612,6 +639,7 @@ sub aggregate_perprocesspid() { $perprocess{$process}->{MM_VMSCAN_WAKEUP_KSWAPD} += $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WAKEUP_KSWAPD}; $perprocess{$process}->{HIGH_KSWAPD_REWAKEUP} += $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_KSWAPD_REWAKEUP}; $perprocess{$process}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED} += $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_SCANNED}; + $perprocess{$process}->{HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED} += $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{HIGH_NR_RECLAIMED}; $perprocess{$process}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_SYNC} += $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_SYNC}; $perprocess{$process}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_SYNC} += $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_ANON_SYNC}; $perprocess{$process}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_ASYNC} += $perprocesspid{$process_pid}->{MM_VMSCAN_WRITEPAGE_FILE_ASYNC}; diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt index b29d8e5..c9ffa9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> - December 11, 2009 + October 28, 2010 @@ -107,9 +107,14 @@ allowed to issue dynamic suspends. The user interface for controlling dynamic PM is located in the power/ subdirectory of each USB device's sysfs directory, that is, in /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/ where "..." is the device's ID. The -relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and autosuspend. -(There may also be a file named "level"; this file was deprecated -as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.) +relevant attribute files are: wakeup, control, and +autosuspend_delay_ms. (There may also be a file named "level"; this +file was deprecated as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the +"control" file. In 2.6.38 the "autosuspend" file will be deprecated +and replaced by the "autosuspend_delay_ms" file. The only difference +is that the newer file expresses the delay in milliseconds whereas the +older file uses seconds. Confusingly, both files are present in 2.6.37 +but only "autosuspend" works.) power/wakeup @@ -140,33 +145,36 @@ as of the 2.6.35 kernel and replaced by the "control" file.) suspended and autoresume was not allowed. This setting is no longer supported.) - power/autosuspend + power/autosuspend_delay_ms This file contains an integer value, which is the - number of seconds the device should remain idle before - the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay time). - The default is 2. 0 means to autosuspend as soon as - the device becomes idle, and negative values mean - never to autosuspend. You can write a number to the - file to change the autosuspend idle-delay time. - -Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend and writing "on" to power/control do -essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the device from being -autosuspended. Yes, this is a redundancy in the API. + number of milliseconds the device should remain idle + before the kernel will autosuspend it (the idle-delay + time). The default is 2000. 0 means to autosuspend + as soon as the device becomes idle, and negative + values mean never to autosuspend. You can write a + number to the file to change the autosuspend + idle-delay time. + +Writing "-1" to power/autosuspend_delay_ms and writing "on" to +power/control do essentially the same thing -- they both prevent the +device from being autosuspended. Yes, this is a redundancy in the +API. (In 2.6.21 writing "0" to power/autosuspend would prevent the device from being autosuspended; the behavior was changed in 2.6.22. The power/autosuspend attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.21, and the power/level attribute did not exist prior to 2.6.22. power/control -was added in 2.6.34.) +was added in 2.6.34, and power/autosuspend_delay_ms was added in +2.6.37 but did not become functional until 2.6.38.) Changing the default idle-delay time ------------------------------------ -The default autosuspend idle-delay time is controlled by a module -parameter in usbcore. You can specify the value when usbcore is -loaded. For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would +The default autosuspend idle-delay time (in seconds) is controlled by +a module parameter in usbcore. You can specify the value when usbcore +is loaded. For example, to set it to 5 seconds instead of 2 you would do: modprobe usbcore autosuspend=5 @@ -234,25 +242,23 @@ every device. If a driver knows that its device has proper suspend/resume support, it can enable autosuspend all by itself. For example, the video -driver for a laptop's webcam might do this, since these devices are -rarely used and so should normally be autosuspended. +driver for a laptop's webcam might do this (in recent kernels they +do), since these devices are rarely used and so should normally be +autosuspended. Sometimes it turns out that even when a device does work okay with -autosuspend there are still problems. For example, there are -experimental patches adding autosuspend support to the usbhid driver, -which manages keyboards and mice, among other things. Tests with a -number of keyboards showed that typing on a suspended keyboard, while -causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, would -nonetheless frequently result in lost keystrokes. Tests with mice -showed that some of them would issue a remote-wakeup request in -response to button presses but not to motion, and some in response to -neither. +autosuspend there are still problems. For example, the usbhid driver, +which manages keyboards and mice, has autosuspend support. Tests with +a number of keyboards show that typing on a suspended keyboard, while +causing the keyboard to do a remote wakeup all right, will nonetheless +frequently result in lost keystrokes. Tests with mice show that some +of them will issue a remote-wakeup request in response to button +presses but not to motion, and some in response to neither. The kernel will not prevent you from enabling autosuspend on devices that can't handle it. It is even possible in theory to damage a -device by suspending it at the wrong time -- for example, suspending a -USB hard disk might cause it to spin down without parking the heads. -(Highly unlikely, but possible.) Take care. +device by suspending it at the wrong time. (Highly unlikely, but +possible.) Take care. The driver interface for Power Management @@ -336,10 +342,6 @@ autosuspend the interface's device. When the usage counter is = 0 then the interface is considered to be idle, and the kernel may autosuspend the device. -(There is a similar usage counter field in struct usb_device, -associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces. -This counter is used only by the USB core.) - Drivers need not be concerned about balancing changes to the usage counter; the USB core will undo any remaining "get"s when a driver is unbound from its interface. As a corollary, drivers must not call @@ -409,11 +411,11 @@ during autosuspend. For example, there's not much point autosuspending a keyboard if the user can't cause the keyboard to do a remote wakeup by typing on it. If the driver sets intf->needs_remote_wakeup to 1, the kernel won't autosuspend the -device if remote wakeup isn't available or has been disabled through -the power/wakeup attribute. (If the device is already autosuspended, -though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to autoresume it. -Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe method, at which -time the device is guaranteed not to be autosuspended.) +device if remote wakeup isn't available. (If the device is already +autosuspended, though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to +autoresume it. Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe +method, at which time the device is guaranteed not to be +autosuspended.) If a driver does its I/O asynchronously in interrupt context, it should call usb_autopm_get_interface_async() before starting output and @@ -422,20 +424,19 @@ it receives an input event, it should call usb_mark_last_busy(struct usb_device *udev); -in the event handler. This sets udev->last_busy to the current time. -udev->last_busy is the field used for idle-delay calculations; -updating it will cause any pending autosuspend to be moved back. Most -of the usb_autopm_* routines will also set the last_busy field to the -current time. +in the event handler. This tells the PM core that the device was just +busy and therefore the next autosuspend idle-delay expiration should +be pushed back. Many of the usb_autopm_* routines also make this call, +so drivers need to worry only when interrupt-driven input arrives. Asynchronous operation is always subject to races. For example, a -driver may call one of the usb_autopm_*_interface_async() routines at -a time when the core has just finished deciding the device has been -idle for long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's -suspend method. The suspend method must be responsible for -synchronizing with the output request routine and the URB completion -handler; it should cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the -driver needs to use the device. +driver may call the usb_autopm_get_interface_async() routine at a time +when the core has just finished deciding the device has been idle for +long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's suspend +method. The suspend method must be responsible for synchronizing with +the I/O request routine and the URB completion handler; it should +cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the driver needs to use the +device. External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way, only autosuspend calls. The driver can tell them apart by checking @@ -472,7 +473,9 @@ Firstly, a device may already be autosuspended when a system suspend occurs. Since system suspends are supposed to be as transparent as possible, the device should remain suspended following the system resume. But this theory may not work out well in practice; over time -the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed. +the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed. As of 2.6.37 the +policy is to resume all devices during a system resume and let them +handle their own runtime suspends afterward. Secondly, a dynamic power-management event may occur as a system suspend is underway. The window for this is short, since system diff --git a/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt b/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt index fafcd47..afe596d 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt +++ b/Documentation/usb/proc_usb_info.txt @@ -1,12 +1,17 @@ /proc/bus/usb filesystem output =============================== -(version 2003.05.30) +(version 2010.09.13) The usbfs filesystem for USB devices is traditionally mounted at /proc/bus/usb. It provides the /proc/bus/usb/devices file, as well as the /proc/bus/usb/BBB/DDD files. +In many modern systems the usbfs filsystem isn't used at all. Instead +USB device nodes are created under /dev/usb/ or someplace similar. The +"devices" file is available in debugfs, typically as +/sys/kernel/debug/usb/devices. + **NOTE**: If /proc/bus/usb appears empty, and a host controller driver has been linked, then you need to mount the @@ -106,8 +111,8 @@ Legend: Topology info: -T: Bus=dd Lev=dd Prnt=dd Port=dd Cnt=dd Dev#=ddd Spd=ddd MxCh=dd -| | | | | | | | |__MaxChildren +T: Bus=dd Lev=dd Prnt=dd Port=dd Cnt=dd Dev#=ddd Spd=dddd MxCh=dd +| | | | | | | | |__MaxChildren | | | | | | | |__Device Speed in Mbps | | | | | | |__DeviceNumber | | | | | |__Count of devices at this level @@ -120,8 +125,13 @@ T: Bus=dd Lev=dd Prnt=dd Port=dd Cnt=dd Dev#=ddd Spd=ddd MxCh=dd Speed may be: 1.5 Mbit/s for low speed USB 12 Mbit/s for full speed USB - 480 Mbit/s for high speed USB (added for USB 2.0) + 480 Mbit/s for high speed USB (added for USB 2.0); + also used for Wireless USB, which has no fixed speed + 5000 Mbit/s for SuperSpeed USB (added for USB 3.0) + For reasons lost in the mists of time, the Port number is always + too low by 1. For example, a device plugged into port 4 will + show up with "Port=03". Bandwidth info: B: Alloc=ddd/ddd us (xx%), #Int=ddd, #Iso=ddd @@ -291,7 +301,7 @@ Here's an example, from a system which has a UHCI root hub, an external hub connected to the root hub, and a mouse and a serial converter connected to the external hub. -T: Bus=00 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#= 1 Spd=12 MxCh= 2 +T: Bus=00 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#= 1 Spd=12 MxCh= 2 B: Alloc= 28/900 us ( 3%), #Int= 2, #Iso= 0 D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1 P: Vendor=0000 ProdID=0000 Rev= 0.00 @@ -301,21 +311,21 @@ C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=40 MxPwr= 0mA I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=hub E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 8 Ivl=255ms -T: Bus=00 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 4 +T: Bus=00 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 4 D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1 P: Vendor=0451 ProdID=1446 Rev= 1.00 C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=e0 MxPwr=100mA I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=hub E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 1 Ivl=255ms -T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 3 Spd=1.5 MxCh= 0 +T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 3 Spd=1.5 MxCh= 0 D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1 P: Vendor=04b4 ProdID=0001 Rev= 0.00 C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=100mA I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=03(HID ) Sub=01 Prot=02 Driver=mouse E: Ad=81(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 3 Ivl= 10ms -T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=02 Cnt=02 Dev#= 4 Spd=12 MxCh= 0 +T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=02 Cnt=02 Dev#= 4 Spd=12 MxCh= 0 D: Ver= 1.00 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS= 8 #Cfgs= 1 P: Vendor=0565 ProdID=0001 Rev= 1.08 S: Manufacturer=Peracom Networks, Inc. @@ -330,12 +340,12 @@ E: Ad=82(I) Atr=03(Int.) MxPS= 8 Ivl= 8ms Selecting only the "T:" and "I:" lines from this (for example, by using "procusb ti"), we have: -T: Bus=00 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#= 1 Spd=12 MxCh= 2 -T: Bus=00 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 4 +T: Bus=00 Lev=00 Prnt=00 Port=00 Cnt=00 Dev#= 1 Spd=12 MxCh= 2 +T: Bus=00 Lev=01 Prnt=01 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 2 Spd=12 MxCh= 4 I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=09(hub ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=hub -T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 3 Spd=1.5 MxCh= 0 +T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=00 Cnt=01 Dev#= 3 Spd=1.5 MxCh= 0 I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 1 Cls=03(HID ) Sub=01 Prot=02 Driver=mouse -T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=02 Cnt=02 Dev#= 4 Spd=12 MxCh= 0 +T: Bus=00 Lev=02 Prnt=02 Port=02 Cnt=02 Dev#= 4 Spd=12 MxCh= 0 I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 3 Cls=00(>ifc ) Sub=00 Prot=00 Driver=serial diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 index f251054..42517d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88 @@ -83,3 +83,4 @@ 82 -> WinFast DTV2000 H rev. J [107d:6f2b] 83 -> Prof 7301 DVB-S/S2 [b034:3034] 84 -> Samsung SMT 7020 DVB-S [18ac:dc00,18ac:dccd] + 85 -> Twinhan VP-1027 DVB-S [1822:0023] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx index 5c56875..31b4857 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ 0 -> Unknown EM2800 video grabber (em2800) [eb1a:2800] - 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868] + 1 -> Unknown EM2750/28xx video grabber (em2820/em2840) [eb1a:2710,eb1a:2820,eb1a:2821,eb1a:2860,eb1a:2861,eb1a:2862,eb1a:2863,eb1a:2870,eb1a:2881,eb1a:2883,eb1a:2868,eb1a:2875] 2 -> Terratec Cinergy 250 USB (em2820/em2840) [0ccd:0036] 3 -> Pinnacle PCTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0208] 4 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB 2 (em2820/em2840) [2040:4200,2040:4201] @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800) 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/100/101/107 / Kaiser Baas Video to DVD maker (em2820/em2840) [1b80:e302,1b80:e304,2304:0207,2304:021a] 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500] - 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] + 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 -> SIIG AVTuner-PVR / Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) @@ -31,6 +31,7 @@ 30 -> Videology 20K14XUSB USB2.0 (em2820/em2840) 31 -> Usbgear VD204v9 (em2821) 32 -> Supercomp USB 2.0 TV (em2821) + 33 -> Elgato Video Capture (em2860) [0fd9:0033] 34 -> Terratec Cinergy A Hybrid XS (em2860) [0ccd:004f] 35 -> Typhoon DVD Maker (em2860) 36 -> NetGMBH Cam (em2860) @@ -45,14 +46,14 @@ 45 -> Pinnacle PCTV DVB-T (em2870) 46 -> Compro, VideoMate U3 (em2870) [185b:2870] 47 -> KWorld DVB-T 305U (em2880) [eb1a:e305] - 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) [eb1a:e310] + 48 -> KWorld DVB-T 310U (em2880) 49 -> MSI DigiVox A/D (em2880) [eb1a:e310] 50 -> MSI DigiVox A/D II (em2880) [eb1a:e320] 51 -> Terratec Hybrid XS Secam (em2880) [0ccd:004c] 52 -> DNT DA2 Hybrid (em2881) 53 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (em2881) 54 -> Kworld VS-DVB-T 323UR (em2882) [eb1a:e323] - 55 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e] + 55 -> Terratec Cinnergy Hybrid T USB XS (em2882) (em2882) [0ccd:005e,0ccd:0042] 56 -> Pinnacle Hybrid Pro (2) (em2882) [2304:0226] 57 -> Kworld PlusTV HD Hybrid 330 (em2883) [eb1a:a316] 58 -> Compro VideoMate ForYou/Stereo (em2820/em2840) [185b:2041] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 index 4000c29..6b4c72d 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 @@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ 125 -> Beholder BeholdTV 409 [0000:4090] 126 -> Beholder BeholdTV 505 FM [5ace:5050] 127 -> Beholder BeholdTV 507 FM / BeholdTV 509 FM [5ace:5070,5ace:5090] -128 -> Beholder BeholdTV Columbus TVFM [0000:5201] +128 -> Beholder BeholdTV Columbus TV/FM [0000:5201] 129 -> Beholder BeholdTV 607 FM [5ace:6070] 130 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 [5ace:6190] 131 -> Twinhan Hybrid DTV-DVB 3056 PCI [1822:0022] @@ -180,3 +180,5 @@ 179 -> Beholder BeholdTV A7 [5ace:7090] 180 -> Avermedia PCI M733A [1461:4155,1461:4255] 181 -> TechoTrend TT-budget T-3000 [13c2:2804] +182 -> Kworld PCI SBTVD/ISDB-T Full-Seg Hybrid [17de:b136] +183 -> Compro VideoMate Vista M1F [185b:c900] diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile b/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile deleted file mode 100644 index 1ed0e98..0000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Makefile +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ -# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built. -obj- := dummy.o - -# List of programs to build -hostprogs-y := v4lgrab - -# Tell kbuild to always build the programs -always := $(hostprogs-y) diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia b/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia deleted file mode 100644 index 8a747fe..0000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.cpia +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ -This is a driver for the CPiA PPC2 driven parallel connected -Camera. For example the Creative WebcamII is CPiA driven. - - ) [1]Peter Pregler, Linz 2000, published under the [2]GNU GPL - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -USAGE: - -General: -======== - -1) Make sure you have created the video devices (/dev/video*): - -- if you have a recent MAKEDEV do a 'cd /dev;./MAKEDEV video' -- otherwise do a: - -cd /dev -mknod video0 c 81 0 -ln -s video0 video - -2) Compile the kernel (see below for the list of options to use), - configure your parport and reboot. - -3) If all worked well you should get messages similar - to the following (your versions may be different) on the console: - -V4L-Driver for Vision CPiA based cameras v0.7.4 -parport0: read2 timeout. -parport0: Multimedia device, VLSI Vision Ltd PPC2 -Parallel port driver for Vision CPiA based camera - CPIA Version: 1.20 (2.0) - CPIA PnP-ID: 0553:0002:0100 - VP-Version: 1.0 0100 - 1 camera(s) found - - -As modules: -=========== - -Make sure you have selected the following kernel options (you can -select all stuff as modules): - -The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'. - -CONFIG_PARPORT=m -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=m -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=m -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=m -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=m - -For autoloading of all those modules you need to tell module-init-tools -some stuff. Add the following line to your module-init-tools config-file -(e.g. /etc/modprobe.conf or wherever your distribution does store that -stuff): - -options parport_pc io=0x378 irq=7 dma=3 -alias char-major-81 cpia_pp - -The first line tells the dma/irq channels to use. Those _must_ match -the settings of your BIOS. Do NOT simply use the values above. See -Documentation/parport.txt for more information about this. The second -line associates the video-device file with the driver. Of cause you -can also load the modules once upon boot (usually done in /etc/modules). - -Linked into the kernel: -======================= - -Make sure you have selected the following kernel options. Note that -you cannot compile the parport-stuff as modules and the cpia-driver -statically (the other way round is okay though). - -The cpia-stuff is in the section 'Character devices -> Video For Linux'. - -CONFIG_PARPORT=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_PC_FIFO=y -CONFIG_PARPORT_1284=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_DEV=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA=y -CONFIG_VIDEO_CPIA_PP=y - -To use DMA/irq you will need to tell the kernel upon boot time the -hardware configuration of the parport. You can give the boot-parameter -at the LILO-prompt or specify it in lilo.conf. I use the following -append-line in lilo.conf: - - append="parport=0x378,7,3" - -See Documentation/parport.txt for more information about the -configuration of the parport and the values given above. Do not simply -use the values given above. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -FEATURES: - -- mmap/read v4l-interface (but no overlay) -- image formats: CIF/QCIF, SIF/QSIF, various others used by isabel; - note: all sizes except CIF/QCIF are implemented by clipping, i.e. - pixels are not uploaded from the camera -- palettes: VIDEO_PALETTE_GRAY, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555, - VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24, VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB32, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUYV, - VIDEO_PALETTE_UYVY, VIDEO_PALETTE_YUV422 -- state information (color balance, exposure, ...) is preserved between - device opens -- complete control over camera via proc-interface (_all_ camera settings are - supported), there is also a python-gtk application available for this [3] -- works under SMP (but the driver is completely serialized and synchronous) - so you get no benefit from SMP, but at least it does not crash your box -- might work for non-Intel architecture, let us know about this - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -TESTED APPLICATIONS: - -- a simple test application based on Xt is available at [3] -- another test-application based on gqcam-0.4 (uses GTK) -- gqcam-0.6 should work -- xawtv-3.x (also the webcam software) -- xawtv-2.46 -- w3cam (cgi-interface and vidcat, e.g. you may try out 'vidcat |xv - -maxpect -root -quit +noresetroot -rmode 5 -') -- vic, the MBONE video conferencing tool (version 2.8ucl4-1) -- isabel 3R4beta (barely working, but AFAICT all the problems are on - their side) -- camserv-0.40 - -See [3] for pointers to v4l-applications. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -KNOWN PROBLEMS: - -- some applications do not handle the image format correctly, you will - see strange horizontal stripes instead of a nice picture -> make sure - your application does use a supported image size or queries the driver - for the actually used size (reason behind this: the camera cannot - provide any image format, so if size NxM is requested the driver will - use a format to the closest fitting N1xM1, the application should now - query for this granted size, most applications do not). -- all the todo ;) -- if there is not enough light and the picture is too dark try to - adjust the SetSensorFPS setting, automatic frame rate adjustment - has its price -- do not try out isabel 3R4beta (built 135), you will be disappointed - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -TODO: - -- multiple camera support (struct camera or something) - This should work, - but hasn't been tested yet. -- architecture independence? -- SMP-safe asynchronous mmap interface -- nibble mode for old parport interfaces -- streaming capture, this should give a performance gain - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -IMPLEMENTATION NOTES: - -The camera can act in two modes, streaming or grabbing. Right now a -polling grab-scheme is used. Maybe interrupt driven streaming will be -used for a asynchronous mmap interface in the next major release of the -driver. This might give a better frame rate. - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -THANKS (in no particular order): - -- Scott J. Bertin <sbertin@mindspring.com> for cleanups, the proc-filesystem - and much more -- Henry Bruce <whb@vvl.co.uk> for providing developers information about - the CPiA chip, I wish all companies would treat Linux as seriously -- Karoly Erdei <Karoly.Erdei@risc.uni-linz.ac.at> and RISC-Linz for being - my boss ;) resp. my employer and for providing me the hardware and - allow me to devote some working time to this project -- Manuel J. Petit de Gabriel <mpetit@dit.upm.es> for providing help - with Isabel (http://isabel.dit.upm.es/) -- Bas Huisman <bhuism@cs.utwente.nl> for writing the initial parport code -- Jarl Totland <Jarl.Totland@bdc.no> for setting up the mailing list - and maintaining the web-server[3] -- Chris Whiteford <Chris@informinteractive.com> for fixes related to the - 1.02 firmware -- special kudos to all the tester whose machines crashed and/or - will crash. :) - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- -REFERENCES - - 1. http://www.risc.uni-linz.ac.at/ - mailto:Peter_Pregler@email.com - 2. see the file COPYING in the top directory of the kernel tree - 3. http://webcam.sourceforge.net/ diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran index 00e3f92..699b60e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran @@ -322,76 +322,11 @@ your IRQs and make sure the card has its own interrupts. 4. Programming interface -This driver conforms to video4linux and video4linux2, both can be used to -use the driver. Since video4linux didn't provide adequate calls to fully -use the cards' features, we've introduced several programming extensions, -which are currently officially accepted in the 2.4.x branch of the kernel. -These extensions are known as the v4l/mjpeg extensions. See zoran.h for -details (structs/ioctls). - -Information - video4linux: -http://linux.bytesex.org/v4l2/API.html -Documentation/video4linux/API.html -/usr/include/linux/videodev.h - -Information - video4linux/mjpeg extensions: -./zoran.h -(also see below) - -Information - video4linux2: -http://linuxtv.org -http://v4l2spec.bytesex.org/ -/usr/include/linux/videodev2.h - -More information on the video4linux/mjpeg extensions, by Serguei -Miridonovi and Rainer Johanni: --- -The ioctls for that interface are as follows: - -BUZIOC_G_PARAMS -BUZIOC_S_PARAMS - -Get and set the parameters of the buz. The user should always do a -BUZIOC_G_PARAMS (with a struct buz_params) to obtain the default -settings, change what he likes and then make a BUZIOC_S_PARAMS call. - -BUZIOC_REQBUFS - -Before being able to capture/playback, the user has to request -the buffers he is wanting to use. Fill the structure -zoran_requestbuffers with the size (recommended: 256*1024) and -the number (recommended 32 up to 256). There are no such restrictions -as for the Video for Linux buffers, you should LEAVE SUFFICIENT -MEMORY for your system however, else strange things will happen .... -On return, the zoran_requestbuffers structure contains number and -size of the actually allocated buffers. -You should use these numbers for doing a mmap of the buffers -into the user space. -The BUZIOC_REQBUFS ioctl also makes it happen, that the next mmap -maps the MJPEG buffer instead of the V4L buffers. - -BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT -BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY - -Queue a buffer for capture or playback. The first call also starts -streaming capture. When streaming capture is going on, you may -only queue further buffers or issue syncs until streaming -capture is switched off again with a argument of -1 to -a BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT/BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY ioctl. - -BUZIOC_SYNC - -Issue this ioctl when all buffers are queued. This ioctl will -block until the first buffer becomes free for saving its -data to disk (after BUZIOC_QBUF_CAPT) or for reuse (after BUZIOC_QBUF_PLAY). - -BUZIOC_G_STATUS - -Get the status of the input lines (video source connected/norm). +This driver conforms to video4linux2. Support for V4L1 and for the custom +zoran ioctls has been removed in kernel 2.6.38. For programming example, please, look at lavrec.c and lavplay.c code in -lavtools-1.2p2 package (URL: http://www.cicese.mx/) -and the 'examples' directory in the original Buz driver distribution. +the MJPEG-tools (http://mjpeg.sf.net/). Additional notes for software developers: @@ -402,9 +337,6 @@ Additional notes for software developers: standard is "more constant" for current country than geometry settings of a variety of TV capture cards which may work in ITU or square pixel format. --- -Please note that lavplay/lavrec are also included in the MJPEG-tools -(http://mjpeg.sf.net/). =========================== diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards index 12217fc..db833ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Cards @@ -464,10 +464,6 @@ Siemens ------- Multimedia eXtension Board (MXB) (SAA7146, SAA7111) -Stradis -------- - SDM275,SDM250,SDM026,SDM025 (SAA7146, IBMMPEG2): MPEG2 decoder only - Powercolor ---------- MTV878 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV index 9d112f7..093c0cd 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/MAKEDEV @@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ function makedev () { echo "*** new device names ***" makedev video 0 makedev radio 64 -makedev vtx 192 makedev vbi 224 #echo "*** old device names (for compatibility only) ***" diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt index 56ba7bb..261776e 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt @@ -302,12 +302,14 @@ sonixj 0c45:60fb Surfer NoName sonixj 0c45:60fc LG-LIC300 sonixj 0c45:60fe Microdia Audio sonixj 0c45:6100 PC Camera (SN9C128) +sonixj 0c45:6102 PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610a PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610b PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610c PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:610e PC Camera (SN9C128) sonixj 0c45:6128 Microdia/Sonix SNP325 sonixj 0c45:612a Avant Camera +sonixj 0c45:612b Speed-Link REFLECT2 sonixj 0c45:612c Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix sonixj 0c45:6130 Sonix Pccam sonixj 0c45:6138 Sn9c120 Mo4000 @@ -364,6 +366,7 @@ t613 17a1:0128 TASCORP JPEG Webcam, NGS Cyclops vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC pac207 2001:f115 D-Link DSB-C120 sq905c 2770:9050 Disney pix micro (CIF) +sq905c 2770:9051 Lego Bionicle sq905c 2770:9052 Disney pix micro 2 (VGA) sq905c 2770:905c All 11 known cameras with this ID sq905 2770:9120 All 24 known cameras with this ID diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt index bf3af5f..34e2842 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt @@ -45,8 +45,6 @@ module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the module or meye.<param>=<value> on the kernel boot line when meye is statically linked into the kernel). Those options are: - forcev4l1: force use of V4L1 API instead of V4L2 - gbuffers: number of capture buffers, default is 2 (32 max) gbufsize: size of each capture buffer, default is 614400 @@ -79,9 +77,8 @@ Usage: Private API: ------------ - The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API - (either v4l1 or v4l2), so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) - should work with this driver. + The driver supports frame grabbing with the video4linux API, + so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) should work with this driver. Besides the video4linux interface, the driver has a private interface for accessing the Motion Eye extended parameters (camera sharpness, @@ -123,7 +120,4 @@ Private API: Bugs / Todo: ------------ - - the driver could be much cleaned up by removing the v4l1 support. - However, this means all v4l1-only applications will stop working. - - 'motioneye' still uses the meye private v4l1 API extensions. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index e831aac..f22f35c 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ All drivers have the following structure: 2) A way of initializing and commanding sub-devices (if any). -3) Creating V4L2 device nodes (/dev/videoX, /dev/vbiX, /dev/radioX and - /dev/vtxX) and keeping track of device-node specific data. +3) Creating V4L2 device nodes (/dev/videoX, /dev/vbiX and /dev/radioX) + and keeping track of device-node specific data. 4) Filehandle-specific structs containing per-filehandle data; @@ -192,6 +192,11 @@ You also need a way to go from the low-level struct to v4l2_subdev. For the common i2c_client struct the i2c_set_clientdata() call is used to store a v4l2_subdev pointer, for other busses you may have to use other methods. +Bridges might also need to store per-subdev private data, such as a pointer to +bridge-specific per-subdev private data. The v4l2_subdev structure provides +host private data for that purpose that can be accessed with +v4l2_get_subdev_hostdata() and v4l2_set_subdev_hostdata(). + From the bridge driver perspective you load the sub-device module and somehow obtain the v4l2_subdev pointer. For i2c devices this is easy: you call i2c_get_clientdata(). For other busses something similar needs to be done. @@ -448,6 +453,10 @@ You should also set these fields: - ioctl_ops: if you use the v4l2_ioctl_ops to simplify ioctl maintenance (highly recommended to use this and it might become compulsory in the future!), then set this to your v4l2_ioctl_ops struct. +- lock: leave to NULL if you want to do all the locking in the driver. + Otherwise you give it a pointer to a struct mutex_lock and before any + of the v4l2_file_operations is called this lock will be taken by the + core and released afterwards. - parent: you only set this if v4l2_device was registered with NULL as the parent device struct. This only happens in cases where one hardware device has multiple PCI devices that all share the same v4l2_device core. @@ -464,6 +473,22 @@ If you use v4l2_ioctl_ops, then you should set either .unlocked_ioctl or The v4l2_file_operations struct is a subset of file_operations. The main difference is that the inode argument is omitted since it is never used. +v4l2_file_operations and locking +-------------------------------- + +You can set a pointer to a mutex_lock in struct video_device. Usually this +will be either a top-level mutex or a mutex per device node. If you want +finer-grained locking then you have to set it to NULL and do you own locking. + +If a lock is specified then all file operations will be serialized on that +lock. If you use videobuf then you must pass the same lock to the videobuf +queue initialize function: if videobuf has to wait for a frame to arrive, then +it will temporarily unlock the lock and relock it afterwards. If your driver +also waits in the code, then you should do the same to allow other processes +to access the device node while the first process is waiting for something. + +The implementation of a hotplug disconnect should also take the lock before +calling v4l2_device_disconnect. video_device registration ------------------------- @@ -483,7 +508,6 @@ types exist: VFL_TYPE_GRABBER: videoX for video input/output devices VFL_TYPE_VBI: vbiX for vertical blank data (i.e. closed captions, teletext) VFL_TYPE_RADIO: radioX for radio tuners -VFL_TYPE_VTX: vtxX for teletext devices (deprecated, don't use) The last argument gives you a certain amount of control over the device device node number used (i.e. the X in videoX). Normally you will pass -1 @@ -547,9 +571,8 @@ from /dev). After video_unregister_device() returns no new opens can be done. However, in the case of USB devices some application might still have one of these -device nodes open. So after the unregister all file operations will return -an error as well, except for the ioctl and unlocked_ioctl file operations: -those will still be passed on since some buffer ioctls may still be needed. +device nodes open. So after the unregister all file operations (except +release, of course) will return an error as well. When the last user of the video device node exits, then the vdev->release() callback is called and you can do the final cleanup there. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c b/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c deleted file mode 100644 index c8ded17..0000000 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4lgrab.c +++ /dev/null @@ -1,201 +0,0 @@ -/* Simple Video4Linux image grabber. */ -/* - * Video4Linux Driver Test/Example Framegrabbing Program - * - * Compile with: - * gcc -s -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes v4lgrab.c -o v4lgrab - * Use as: - * v4lgrab >image.ppm - * - * Copyright (C) 1998-05-03, Phil Blundell <philb@gnu.org> - * Copied from http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/vgrabber.c - * with minor modifications (Dave Forrest, drf5n@virginia.edu). - * - * - * For some cameras you may need to pre-load libv4l to perform - * the necessary decompression, e.g.: - * - * export LD_PRELOAD=/usr/lib/libv4l/v4l1compat.so - * ./v4lgrab >image.ppm - * - * see http://hansdegoede.livejournal.com/3636.html for details. - * - */ - -#include <unistd.h> -#include <sys/types.h> -#include <sys/stat.h> -#include <fcntl.h> -#include <stdio.h> -#include <sys/ioctl.h> -#include <stdlib.h> - -#include <linux/types.h> -#include <linux/videodev.h> - -#define VIDEO_DEV "/dev/video0" - -/* Stole this from tvset.c */ - -#define READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(buf, format, depth, r, g, b) \ -{ \ - switch (format) \ - { \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY: \ - switch (depth) \ - { \ - case 4: \ - case 6: \ - case 8: \ - (r) = (g) = (b) = (*buf++ << 8);\ - break; \ - \ - case 16: \ - (r) = (g) = (b) = \ - *((unsigned short *) buf); \ - buf += 2; \ - break; \ - } \ - break; \ - \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565: \ - { \ - unsigned short tmp = *(unsigned short *)buf; \ - (r) = tmp&0xF800; \ - (g) = (tmp<<5)&0xFC00; \ - (b) = (tmp<<11)&0xF800; \ - buf += 2; \ - } \ - break; \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555: \ - (r) = (buf[0]&0xF8)<<8; \ - (g) = ((buf[0] << 5 | buf[1] >> 3)&0xF8)<<8; \ - (b) = ((buf[1] << 2 ) & 0xF8)<<8; \ - buf += 2; \ - break; \ - \ - case VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24: \ - (r) = buf[0] << 8; (g) = buf[1] << 8; \ - (b) = buf[2] << 8; \ - buf += 3; \ - break; \ - \ - default: \ - fprintf(stderr, \ - "Format %d not yet supported\n", \ - format); \ - } \ -} - -static int get_brightness_adj(unsigned char *image, long size, int *brightness) { - long i, tot = 0; - for (i=0;i<size*3;i++) - tot += image[i]; - *brightness = (128 - tot/(size*3))/3; - return !((tot/(size*3)) >= 126 && (tot/(size*3)) <= 130); -} - -int main(int argc, char ** argv) -{ - int fd = open(VIDEO_DEV, O_RDONLY), f; - struct video_capability cap; - struct video_window win; - struct video_picture vpic; - - unsigned char *buffer, *src; - int bpp = 24, r = 0, g = 0, b = 0; - unsigned int i, src_depth = 16; - - if (fd < 0) { - perror(VIDEO_DEV); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGCAP, &cap) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOGCAP"); - fprintf(stderr, "(" VIDEO_DEV " not a video4linux device?)\n"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGWIN, &win) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOCGWIN"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (ioctl(fd, VIDIOCGPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - perror("VIDIOCGPICT"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - - if (cap.type & VID_TYPE_MONOCHROME) { - vpic.depth=8; - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_GREY; /* 8bit grey */ - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.depth=6; - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.depth=4; - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n"); - close(fd); - exit(1); - } - } - } - } else { - vpic.depth=24; - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB24; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic) < 0) { - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB565; - vpic.depth=16; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - vpic.palette=VIDEO_PALETTE_RGB555; - vpic.depth=15; - - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - fprintf(stderr, "Unable to find a supported capture format.\n"); - return -1; - } - } - } - } - - buffer = malloc(win.width * win.height * bpp); - if (!buffer) { - fprintf(stderr, "Out of memory.\n"); - exit(1); - } - - do { - int newbright; - read(fd, buffer, win.width * win.height * bpp); - f = get_brightness_adj(buffer, win.width * win.height, &newbright); - if (f) { - vpic.brightness += (newbright << 8); - if(ioctl(fd, VIDIOCSPICT, &vpic)==-1) { - perror("VIDIOSPICT"); - break; - } - } - } while (f); - - fprintf(stdout, "P6\n%d %d 255\n", win.width, win.height); - - src = buffer; - - for (i = 0; i < win.width * win.height; i++) { - READ_VIDEO_PIXEL(src, vpic.palette, src_depth, r, g, b); - fputc(r>>8, stdout); - fputc(g>>8, stdout); - fputc(b>>8, stdout); - } - - close(fd); - return 0; -} diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf index 17a1f9a..1d00d7f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/videobuf @@ -247,8 +247,6 @@ calls. The relevant helper functions are: int nonblocking); int videobuf_streamon(struct videobuf_queue *q); int videobuf_streamoff(struct videobuf_queue *q); - int videobuf_cgmbuf(struct videobuf_queue *q, struct video_mbuf *mbuf, - int count); So, for example, a VIDIOC_REQBUFS call turns into a call to the driver's vidioc_reqbufs() callback which, in turn, usually only needs to locate the @@ -258,10 +256,7 @@ boilerplate in a lot of V4L2 drivers. The vidioc_streamon() and vidioc_streamoff() functions will be a bit more complex, of course, since they will also need to deal with starting and -stopping the capture engine. videobuf_cgmbuf(), called from the driver's -vidiocgmbuf() function, only exists if the V4L1 compatibility module has -been selected with CONFIG_VIDEO_V4L1_COMPAT, so its use must be surrounded -with #ifdef directives. +stopping the capture engine. Buffer allocation diff --git a/Documentation/vm/highmem.txt b/Documentation/vm/highmem.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4324d24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/vm/highmem.txt @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + ==================== + HIGH MEMORY HANDLING + ==================== + +By: Peter Zijlstra <a.p.zijlstra@chello.nl> + +Contents: + + (*) What is high memory? + + (*) Temporary virtual mappings. + + (*) Using kmap_atomic. + + (*) Cost of temporary mappings. + + (*) i386 PAE. + + +==================== +WHAT IS HIGH MEMORY? +==================== + +High memory (highmem) is used when the size of physical memory approaches or +exceeds the maximum size of virtual memory. At that point it becomes +impossible for the kernel to keep all of the available physical memory mapped +at all times. This means the kernel needs to start using temporary mappings of +the pieces of physical memory that it wants to access. + +The part of (physical) memory not covered by a permanent mapping is what we +refer to as 'highmem'. There are various architecture dependent constraints on +where exactly that border lies. + +In the i386 arch, for example, we choose to map the kernel into every process's +VM space so that we don't have to pay the full TLB invalidation costs for +kernel entry/exit. This means the available virtual memory space (4GiB on +i386) has to be divided between user and kernel space. + +The traditional split for architectures using this approach is 3:1, 3GiB for +userspace and the top 1GiB for kernel space: + + +--------+ 0xffffffff + | Kernel | + +--------+ 0xc0000000 + | | + | User | + | | + +--------+ 0x00000000 + +This means that the kernel can at most map 1GiB of physical memory at any one +time, but because we need virtual address space for other things - including +temporary maps to access the rest of the physical memory - the actual direct +map will typically be less (usually around ~896MiB). + +Other architectures that have mm context tagged TLBs can have separate kernel +and user maps. Some hardware (like some ARMs), however, have limited virtual +space when they use mm context tags. + + +========================== +TEMPORARY VIRTUAL MAPPINGS +========================== + +The kernel contains several ways of creating temporary mappings: + + (*) vmap(). This can be used to make a long duration mapping of multiple + physical pages into a contiguous virtual space. It needs global + synchronization to unmap. + + (*) kmap(). This permits a short duration mapping of a single page. It needs + global synchronization, but is amortized somewhat. It is also prone to + deadlocks when using in a nested fashion, and so it is not recommended for + new code. + + (*) kmap_atomic(). This permits a very short duration mapping of a single + page. Since the mapping is restricted to the CPU that issued it, it + performs well, but the issuing task is therefore required to stay on that + CPU until it has finished, lest some other task displace its mappings. + + kmap_atomic() may also be used by interrupt contexts, since it is does not + sleep and the caller may not sleep until after kunmap_atomic() is called. + + It may be assumed that k[un]map_atomic() won't fail. + + +================= +USING KMAP_ATOMIC +================= + +When and where to use kmap_atomic() is straightforward. It is used when code +wants to access the contents of a page that might be allocated from high memory +(see __GFP_HIGHMEM), for example a page in the pagecache. The API has two +functions, and they can be used in a manner similar to the following: + + /* Find the page of interest. */ + struct page *page = find_get_page(mapping, offset); + + /* Gain access to the contents of that page. */ + void *vaddr = kmap_atomic(page); + + /* Do something to the contents of that page. */ + memset(vaddr, 0, PAGE_SIZE); + + /* Unmap that page. */ + kunmap_atomic(vaddr); + +Note that the kunmap_atomic() call takes the result of the kmap_atomic() call +not the argument. + +If you need to map two pages because you want to copy from one page to +another you need to keep the kmap_atomic calls strictly nested, like: + + vaddr1 = kmap_atomic(page1); + vaddr2 = kmap_atomic(page2); + + memcpy(vaddr1, vaddr2, PAGE_SIZE); + + kunmap_atomic(vaddr2); + kunmap_atomic(vaddr1); + + +========================== +COST OF TEMPORARY MAPPINGS +========================== + +The cost of creating temporary mappings can be quite high. The arch has to +manipulate the kernel's page tables, the data TLB and/or the MMU's registers. + +If CONFIG_HIGHMEM is not set, then the kernel will try and create a mapping +simply with a bit of arithmetic that will convert the page struct address into +a pointer to the page contents rather than juggling mappings about. In such a +case, the unmap operation may be a null operation. + +If CONFIG_MMU is not set, then there can be no temporary mappings and no +highmem. In such a case, the arithmetic approach will also be used. + + +======== +i386 PAE +======== + +The i386 arch, under some circumstances, will permit you to stick up to 64GiB +of RAM into your 32-bit machine. This has a number of consequences: + + (*) Linux needs a page-frame structure for each page in the system and the + pageframes need to live in the permanent mapping, which means: + + (*) you can have 896M/sizeof(struct page) page-frames at most; with struct + page being 32-bytes that would end up being something in the order of 112G + worth of pages; the kernel, however, needs to store more than just + page-frames in that memory... + + (*) PAE makes your page tables larger - which slows the system down as more + data has to be accessed to traverse in TLB fills and the like. One + advantage is that PAE has more PTE bits and can provide advanced features + like NX and PAT. + +The general recommendation is that you don't use more than 8GiB on a 32-bit +machine - although more might work for you and your workload, you're pretty +much on your own - don't expect kernel developers to really care much if things +come apart. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt index 6690fc3..4e7da65 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ a command line tool, numactl(8), exists that allows one to: + set the shared policy for a shared memory segment via mbind(2) -The numactl(8) tool is packages with the run-time version of the library +The numactl(8) tool is packaged with the run-time version of the library containing the memory policy system call wrappers. Some distributions package the headers and compile-time libraries in a separate development package. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page-types.c b/Documentation/vm/page-types.c index ccd951f..cc96ee2 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/page-types.c +++ b/Documentation/vm/page-types.c @@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ static void prepare_hwpoison_fd(void) } if (opt_unpoison && !hwpoison_forget_fd) { - sprintf(buf, "%s/renew-pfn", hwpoison_debug_fs); + sprintf(buf, "%s/unpoison-pfn", hwpoison_debug_fs); hwpoison_forget_fd = checked_open(buf, O_WRONLY); } } diff --git a/Documentation/workqueue.txt b/Documentation/workqueue.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..996a27d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/workqueue.txt @@ -0,0 +1,381 @@ + +Concurrency Managed Workqueue (cmwq) + +September, 2010 Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> + Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org> + +CONTENTS + +1. Introduction +2. Why cmwq? +3. The Design +4. Application Programming Interface (API) +5. Example Execution Scenarios +6. Guidelines + + +1. Introduction + +There are many cases where an asynchronous process execution context +is needed and the workqueue (wq) API is the most commonly used +mechanism for such cases. + +When such an asynchronous execution context is needed, a work item +describing which function to execute is put on a queue. An +independent thread serves as the asynchronous execution context. The +queue is called workqueue and the thread is called worker. + +While there are work items on the workqueue the worker executes the +functions associated with the work items one after the other. When +there is no work item left on the workqueue the worker becomes idle. +When a new work item gets queued, the worker begins executing again. + + +2. Why cmwq? + +In the original wq implementation, a multi threaded (MT) wq had one +worker thread per CPU and a single threaded (ST) wq had one worker +thread system-wide. A single MT wq needed to keep around the same +number of workers as the number of CPUs. The kernel grew a lot of MT +wq users over the years and with the number of CPU cores continuously +rising, some systems saturated the default 32k PID space just booting +up. + +Although MT wq wasted a lot of resource, the level of concurrency +provided was unsatisfactory. The limitation was common to both ST and +MT wq albeit less severe on MT. Each wq maintained its own separate +worker pool. A MT wq could provide only one execution context per CPU +while a ST wq one for the whole system. Work items had to compete for +those very limited execution contexts leading to various problems +including proneness to deadlocks around the single execution context. + +The tension between the provided level of concurrency and resource +usage also forced its users to make unnecessary tradeoffs like libata +choosing to use ST wq for polling PIOs and accepting an unnecessary +limitation that no two polling PIOs can progress at the same time. As +MT wq don't provide much better concurrency, users which require +higher level of concurrency, like async or fscache, had to implement +their own thread pool. + +Concurrency Managed Workqueue (cmwq) is a reimplementation of wq with +focus on the following goals. + +* Maintain compatibility with the original workqueue API. + +* Use per-CPU unified worker pools shared by all wq to provide + flexible level of concurrency on demand without wasting a lot of + resource. + +* Automatically regulate worker pool and level of concurrency so that + the API users don't need to worry about such details. + + +3. The Design + +In order to ease the asynchronous execution of functions a new +abstraction, the work item, is introduced. + +A work item is a simple struct that holds a pointer to the function +that is to be executed asynchronously. Whenever a driver or subsystem +wants a function to be executed asynchronously it has to set up a work +item pointing to that function and queue that work item on a +workqueue. + +Special purpose threads, called worker threads, execute the functions +off of the queue, one after the other. If no work is queued, the +worker threads become idle. These worker threads are managed in so +called thread-pools. + +The cmwq design differentiates between the user-facing workqueues that +subsystems and drivers queue work items on and the backend mechanism +which manages thread-pool and processes the queued work items. + +The backend is called gcwq. There is one gcwq for each possible CPU +and one gcwq to serve work items queued on unbound workqueues. + +Subsystems and drivers can create and queue work items through special +workqueue API functions as they see fit. They can influence some +aspects of the way the work items are executed by setting flags on the +workqueue they are putting the work item on. These flags include +things like CPU locality, reentrancy, concurrency limits and more. To +get a detailed overview refer to the API description of +alloc_workqueue() below. + +When a work item is queued to a workqueue, the target gcwq is +determined according to the queue parameters and workqueue attributes +and appended on the shared worklist of the gcwq. For example, unless +specifically overridden, a work item of a bound workqueue will be +queued on the worklist of exactly that gcwq that is associated to the +CPU the issuer is running on. + +For any worker pool implementation, managing the concurrency level +(how many execution contexts are active) is an important issue. cmwq +tries to keep the concurrency at a minimal but sufficient level. +Minimal to save resources and sufficient in that the system is used at +its full capacity. + +Each gcwq bound to an actual CPU implements concurrency management by +hooking into the scheduler. The gcwq is notified whenever an active +worker wakes up or sleeps and keeps track of the number of the +currently runnable workers. Generally, work items are not expected to +hog a CPU and consume many cycles. That means maintaining just enough +concurrency to prevent work processing from stalling should be +optimal. As long as there are one or more runnable workers on the +CPU, the gcwq doesn't start execution of a new work, but, when the +last running worker goes to sleep, it immediately schedules a new +worker so that the CPU doesn't sit idle while there are pending work +items. This allows using a minimal number of workers without losing +execution bandwidth. + +Keeping idle workers around doesn't cost other than the memory space +for kthreads, so cmwq holds onto idle ones for a while before killing +them. + +For an unbound wq, the above concurrency management doesn't apply and +the gcwq for the pseudo unbound CPU tries to start executing all work +items as soon as possible. The responsibility of regulating +concurrency level is on the users. There is also a flag to mark a +bound wq to ignore the concurrency management. Please refer to the +API section for details. + +Forward progress guarantee relies on that workers can be created when +more execution contexts are necessary, which in turn is guaranteed +through the use of rescue workers. All work items which might be used +on code paths that handle memory reclaim are required to be queued on +wq's that have a rescue-worker reserved for execution under memory +pressure. Else it is possible that the thread-pool deadlocks waiting +for execution contexts to free up. + + +4. Application Programming Interface (API) + +alloc_workqueue() allocates a wq. The original create_*workqueue() +functions are deprecated and scheduled for removal. alloc_workqueue() +takes three arguments - @name, @flags and @max_active. @name is the +name of the wq and also used as the name of the rescuer thread if +there is one. + +A wq no longer manages execution resources but serves as a domain for +forward progress guarantee, flush and work item attributes. @flags +and @max_active control how work items are assigned execution +resources, scheduled and executed. + +@flags: + + WQ_NON_REENTRANT + + By default, a wq guarantees non-reentrance only on the same + CPU. A work item may not be executed concurrently on the same + CPU by multiple workers but is allowed to be executed + concurrently on multiple CPUs. This flag makes sure + non-reentrance is enforced across all CPUs. Work items queued + to a non-reentrant wq are guaranteed to be executed by at most + one worker system-wide at any given time. + + WQ_UNBOUND + + Work items queued to an unbound wq are served by a special + gcwq which hosts workers which are not bound to any specific + CPU. This makes the wq behave as a simple execution context + provider without concurrency management. The unbound gcwq + tries to start execution of work items as soon as possible. + Unbound wq sacrifices locality but is useful for the following + cases. + + * Wide fluctuation in the concurrency level requirement is + expected and using bound wq may end up creating large number + of mostly unused workers across different CPUs as the issuer + hops through different CPUs. + + * Long running CPU intensive workloads which can be better + managed by the system scheduler. + + WQ_FREEZEABLE + + A freezeable wq participates in the freeze phase of the system + suspend operations. Work items on the wq are drained and no + new work item starts execution until thawed. + + WQ_MEM_RECLAIM + + All wq which might be used in the memory reclaim paths _MUST_ + have this flag set. The wq is guaranteed to have at least one + execution context regardless of memory pressure. + + WQ_HIGHPRI + + Work items of a highpri wq are queued at the head of the + worklist of the target gcwq and start execution regardless of + the current concurrency level. In other words, highpri work + items will always start execution as soon as execution + resource is available. + + Ordering among highpri work items is preserved - a highpri + work item queued after another highpri work item will start + execution after the earlier highpri work item starts. + + Although highpri work items are not held back by other + runnable work items, they still contribute to the concurrency + level. Highpri work items in runnable state will prevent + non-highpri work items from starting execution. + + This flag is meaningless for unbound wq. + + WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE + + Work items of a CPU intensive wq do not contribute to the + concurrency level. In other words, runnable CPU intensive + work items will not prevent other work items from starting + execution. This is useful for bound work items which are + expected to hog CPU cycles so that their execution is + regulated by the system scheduler. + + Although CPU intensive work items don't contribute to the + concurrency level, start of their executions is still + regulated by the concurrency management and runnable + non-CPU-intensive work items can delay execution of CPU + intensive work items. + + This flag is meaningless for unbound wq. + + WQ_HIGHPRI | WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE + + This combination makes the wq avoid interaction with + concurrency management completely and behave as a simple + per-CPU execution context provider. Work items queued on a + highpri CPU-intensive wq start execution as soon as resources + are available and don't affect execution of other work items. + +@max_active: + +@max_active determines the maximum number of execution contexts per +CPU which can be assigned to the work items of a wq. For example, +with @max_active of 16, at most 16 work items of the wq can be +executing at the same time per CPU. + +Currently, for a bound wq, the maximum limit for @max_active is 512 +and the default value used when 0 is specified is 256. For an unbound +wq, the limit is higher of 512 and 4 * num_possible_cpus(). These +values are chosen sufficiently high such that they are not the +limiting factor while providing protection in runaway cases. + +The number of active work items of a wq is usually regulated by the +users of the wq, more specifically, by how many work items the users +may queue at the same time. Unless there is a specific need for +throttling the number of active work items, specifying '0' is +recommended. + +Some users depend on the strict execution ordering of ST wq. The +combination of @max_active of 1 and WQ_UNBOUND is used to achieve this +behavior. Work items on such wq are always queued to the unbound gcwq +and only one work item can be active at any given time thus achieving +the same ordering property as ST wq. + + +5. Example Execution Scenarios + +The following example execution scenarios try to illustrate how cmwq +behave under different configurations. + + Work items w0, w1, w2 are queued to a bound wq q0 on the same CPU. + w0 burns CPU for 5ms then sleeps for 10ms then burns CPU for 5ms + again before finishing. w1 and w2 burn CPU for 5ms then sleep for + 10ms. + +Ignoring all other tasks, works and processing overhead, and assuming +simple FIFO scheduling, the following is one highly simplified version +of possible sequences of events with the original wq. + + TIME IN MSECS EVENT + 0 w0 starts and burns CPU + 5 w0 sleeps + 15 w0 wakes up and burns CPU + 20 w0 finishes + 20 w1 starts and burns CPU + 25 w1 sleeps + 35 w1 wakes up and finishes + 35 w2 starts and burns CPU + 40 w2 sleeps + 50 w2 wakes up and finishes + +And with cmwq with @max_active >= 3, + + TIME IN MSECS EVENT + 0 w0 starts and burns CPU + 5 w0 sleeps + 5 w1 starts and burns CPU + 10 w1 sleeps + 10 w2 starts and burns CPU + 15 w2 sleeps + 15 w0 wakes up and burns CPU + 20 w0 finishes + 20 w1 wakes up and finishes + 25 w2 wakes up and finishes + +If @max_active == 2, + + TIME IN MSECS EVENT + 0 w0 starts and burns CPU + 5 w0 sleeps + 5 w1 starts and burns CPU + 10 w1 sleeps + 15 w0 wakes up and burns CPU + 20 w0 finishes + 20 w1 wakes up and finishes + 20 w2 starts and burns CPU + 25 w2 sleeps + 35 w2 wakes up and finishes + +Now, let's assume w1 and w2 are queued to a different wq q1 which has +WQ_HIGHPRI set, + + TIME IN MSECS EVENT + 0 w1 and w2 start and burn CPU + 5 w1 sleeps + 10 w2 sleeps + 10 w0 starts and burns CPU + 15 w0 sleeps + 15 w1 wakes up and finishes + 20 w2 wakes up and finishes + 25 w0 wakes up and burns CPU + 30 w0 finishes + +If q1 has WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE set, + + TIME IN MSECS EVENT + 0 w0 starts and burns CPU + 5 w0 sleeps + 5 w1 and w2 start and burn CPU + 10 w1 sleeps + 15 w2 sleeps + 15 w0 wakes up and burns CPU + 20 w0 finishes + 20 w1 wakes up and finishes + 25 w2 wakes up and finishes + + +6. Guidelines + +* Do not forget to use WQ_MEM_RECLAIM if a wq may process work items + which are used during memory reclaim. Each wq with WQ_MEM_RECLAIM + set has an execution context reserved for it. If there is + dependency among multiple work items used during memory reclaim, + they should be queued to separate wq each with WQ_MEM_RECLAIM. + +* Unless strict ordering is required, there is no need to use ST wq. + +* Unless there is a specific need, using 0 for @max_active is + recommended. In most use cases, concurrency level usually stays + well under the default limit. + +* A wq serves as a domain for forward progress guarantee + (WQ_MEM_RECLAIM, flush and work item attributes. Work items which + are not involved in memory reclaim and don't need to be flushed as a + part of a group of work items, and don't require any special + attribute, can use one of the system wq. There is no difference in + execution characteristics between using a dedicated wq and a system + wq. + +* Unless work items are expected to consume a huge amount of CPU + cycles, using a bound wq is usually beneficial due to the increased + level of locality in wq operations and work item execution. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt index 30b43e1..bdeb81c 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.txt @@ -600,6 +600,7 @@ Protocol: 2.07+ 0x00000001 lguest 0x00000002 Xen 0x00000003 Moorestown MID + 0x00000004 CE4100 TV Platform Field name: hardware_subarch_data Type: write (subarch-dependent) diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/kernel-stacks b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/kernel-stacks index 5ad65d5..a01eec5 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/kernel-stacks +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/kernel-stacks @@ -18,9 +18,9 @@ specialized stacks contain no useful data. The main CPU stacks are: Used for external hardware interrupts. If this is the first external hardware interrupt (i.e. not a nested hardware interrupt) then the kernel switches from the current task to the interrupt stack. Like - the split thread and interrupt stacks on i386 (with CONFIG_4KSTACKS), - this gives more room for kernel interrupt processing without having - to increase the size of every per thread stack. + the split thread and interrupt stacks on i386, this gives more room + for kernel interrupt processing without having to increase the size + of every per thread stack. The interrupt stack is also used when processing a softirq. |